BC 5800

BC-5800
Auto Hematology Analyzer
Service Manual
Copyright
2008 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called
Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This
manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not convey any
license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume
any liability arising out of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.

Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this manual
in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
, are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China

and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial
purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable
for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the
condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this

product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national
and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
I
z This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
z It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
z Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will
be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause
personal injury.
II
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or
other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from
the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved
by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to Mindray,
the following procedure should be followed:
1. Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain a
Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must
appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be
accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model
number, serial number, and a brief description of the reason for return;
2. Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product is
shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges);
3. Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by
Customer Service department.
III
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park,
Address:
Nanshan,ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,
Phone: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500
IV
Table of Contents
Copyright I
Warranty.............................................................................................................................III
Return Policy......................................................................................................................III
Table of Contents 1
1 Using This Manual 1-1

1.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Who Should Read This Manual........................................................................... 1-2
1.3 How to Find Information ...................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual....................................................................... 1-4
1.5 Special Terms Used in This Manual .................................................................... 1-5
1.6 Symbols............................................................................................................... 1-6
2 System Structure 2-1

2.1 System Overview................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Hardware System ................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4 Main Structure...................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5 Software Structure ............................................................................................. 2-12
3 Fluidic System 3-1

3.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Introduction of Pneumatic Parts .......................................................................... 3-7
3.3 Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4 Basic Cycle Design Description......................................................................... 3-16
3.5 Sample Predilution Flowchart............................................................................ 3-25
4 Hardware System 4-1

4.1 Main Board .......................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Signal Processing Board ................................................................................... 4-21
4.3 Driver Board....................................................................................................... 4-36
4.4 Power Board ...................................................................................................... 4-75
4.5 Interface Board .................................................................................................. 4-84
4.6 Indicator Board .................................................................................................. 4-90
4.7 Touchscreen Control Board ............................................................................... 4-93
4.8 Pneumatic Control Board .................................................................................. 4-97
4.9 Pre-amplification Board, Laser Control Board and Volumetric Board ............. 4-103
4.10 Sample Transport Board.................................................................................. 4-122
4.11 Sample Detecting Board.................................................................................. 4-137
4.12 Pressure Detecting Board ............................................................................... 4-148
1
Using This Manual
4.13 SATA and IDE Signal Conversion Board ......................................................... 4-154
5 Servicing 5-1
5.1 General ................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Disassembling the Panels ................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Replacing the Power Supply Assembly ............................................................. 5-12
5.4 Replacing the Touchscreen Assembly............................................................... 5-16
5.5 Replacing the Fluidic Components.................................................................... 5-22
5.6 Replacing the RBC Assembly............................................................................ 5-56
5.7 Replacing the HGB Bath Assembly ................................................................... 5-66
5.8 Replacing the WBC Bath Assembly .................................................................. 5-70
5.9 Replacing the Reagent Preheating Assembly ................................................... 5-76
5.10 Replacing the Open Vial Sampling/SRV Assembly ........................................... 5-78
5.11 Replacing the Sample Transmitting Assembly .................................................. 5-96
5.12 Replacing the Autosampler and Mixer Assemblies ......................................... 5-115
5.13 Replacing the Pneumatic Unit ......................................................................... 5-130
5.14 Replacing the Ambient Temperature Sensor................................................... 5-138
5.15 Replacing the Blood Sensor ............................................................................ 5-140
5.16 Replacing the Filtering Cartridge ..................................................................... 5-142
6 Optical System 6-1

6.1 Optical System Adjustment and Servicing .......................................................... 6-1
6.2 Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies.......................................... 6-2
6.3 Adjustment......................................................................................................... 6-11
6.4 Common Failures of the Optical System ........................................................... 6-27
7 Troubleshooting 7-1
7.1 Error code and information.................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Causes of Common Errors .................................................................................. 7-6
7.3 Function Sequence Codes and Information ...................................................... 7-14
7.4 Error analysis and processing ........................................................................... 7-16
8 Maintaining Your Analyzer 8-1

8.1 List of Parts That Need to Be Replaced Periodically .......................................... 8-1
8.2 Basic Maintenance from Service Engineer ......................................................... 8-1
9 Appendices A-1
2
1 Using This Manual
1.1 Introduction
The chapter explains how to use the BC-5800 service manual. This manual provides the
reference information and procedures needed in servicing the BC-5800. Before servicing the
BC-5800, read and understand the manual carefully to ensure the proper servicing of the
equipment and personnel safety.
This manual is to be used together with the operation manual of BC-5800. It does not contain
information and procedures already covered in the operation manual of BC-5800.
z Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

manual and the operation manual.
1-1
Using This Manual
1.2 Who Should Read This Manual
To use this manual effectively, you need to have the following capacities:
Comprehensive knowledge of electric circuit and fluidic system;
Comprehensive knowledge of reagents;
Comprehensive knowledge of quality control;
Thorough understanding of troubleshooting;
The ability to operate the analyzer skillfully;
The ability to use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology;
The ability to use a digital voltmeter and an oscilloscope masterly;
And the ability to read pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related

terminology.
1-2
Using This Manual
1.3 How to Find Information
This operation manual comprises 8 chapters and 5 appendices. Refer to the table below to find
the information you need.
If you want to See

learn about the system structure and the basic Chapter 2 System Structure
principle of BC-5800
learn about the fluidic system Chapter 3 Fluidic System
learn about the hardware system Chapter 4 Hardware System
learn about how to service the BC-5800 Chapter 5 Servicing
learn about the optical system of BC-5800 and its Chapter 6 Optical System
maintenance methods
learn about how to troubleshoot the common errors Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
of the BC-5800
learn about how to maintain the BC-5800 Chapter 8 Maintenance
learn about the main spare parts of the BC-5800 Appendix A List of Spare parts
learn about the main wearing parts of the BC-5800 Appendix B List of Wearing Parts
learn about the schematic diagram of the fluidic Appendix C Fluidic Diagram
system of the BC-5800
learn about the function of each valve and pump of Appendix D Pump and Valve
the BC-5800 Function Table
learn about the tubing connection of the BC-5800 Appendix E Tubing
1-3
Using This Manual
1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual
This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meaning in the text:
Format Meaning
[XX] all capital letters enclosed in [ ] indicate a key name (either on
the pop-up keyboard or the external keyboard)
XX letters included in " " indicate text you can find on the screen
of BC-5800
XX italic letters indicate titles of the chapters that are referred to
XX all-capitalized, bold and italic letters indicate a major operation
defined in Section 1.4
All illustrations in this manual are provided as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect
your analyzer setup or data displayed.
1-4
Using This Manual
1.5 Special Terms Used in This Manual
When you read It means

to press the desired item lightly with your finger; or to left-CLICK
CLICK
it with the mouse.
to CLICK the desired edit box and use the external keyboard or
ENTER the pop-up keyboard to enter the desired characters or digits; or
to scan the number by using the bar-code scanner.
to move the cursor to the character or digit that you want to delete
by clicking the left button of the mouse or using
[][][Home][End],
DELETE
and then delete the character after the cursor by pressing [Del], or
delete the character before the cursor by pressing [BackSpace]
([] on the upper right part of the soft keyboard).
to CLICK the arrow buttons at the ends of the scroll bar; or to
CLICK and hold the mouse button down while dragging the scroll
DRAG SCROLL BAR bar until the desired information is displayed; or to touch the scroll
bar and rest your finger there until the desired information is
displayed.
to CLICK the down arrow button of the desired box to display the
pull-down list, (and DRAG SCROLL BAR) to browse and then
SELECT from
CLICK the desired item; or to press the keys
** pull-down list
([][][PageUp][PageDown]) to browse the current list and press
[ENTER] to select the desired item.
1-5
Using This Manual
1.6 Symbols
You will find the following symbols in this manual.
When you see Then

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.
alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or
unreliable analysis results.

alerting you to information that requires your attention.

alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.
When you see It means
CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

DOCUMENTS.
BIOLOGICAL RISK
HIGH VOLTAGE
WARNING, LASER BEAM
WARNING, HOT SURFACE
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
1-6
Using This Manual
EARTH (GROUND)
ALTERNATING CURRENT
FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE
TYPE B DEVICE
BATCH CODE
USE BY (YYYY-MM-DD)
SERIAL NUMBER
MEASUREMENT AUTHORIZATION
SYMBOL
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
MANUFACTURER
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
Be sure to observe the following precautions for the safety of patients, operators and yours
when you are servicing the analyzer.
1-7
Using This Manual
z It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or harm to human health.
z Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.

ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.
z When servicing the analyzer, be sure to turn off the power. Servicing the
analyzer when it is on may bring risk of electric shock or damage to
electronic components.
z Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do
not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.
z To prevent personal injury during maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs and
hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, clipper and piercer.
z Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

injury during the normal operation, removal and maintenance.
z Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc.

according to government regulations.
z The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and mucosa. Wear proper personal
protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe laboratory
procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
z If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of
water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into
your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a
doctor.
1-8
Using This Manual
z Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer

strictly as instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer
carefully after the maintenance.
z For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray

customer service department for maintenance advice.
z To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove

metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the
equipment.
z Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a

possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an
ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.
z This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
z Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
z All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious. Take
proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.
z The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials.
Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.
1-9
2 System Structure
2.1 System Overview
Hardware
Hardware is designed for signal gathering, the controlling and driving of motion components
and the processing and display of data. It is mainly composed of main board, power drive
board, signal processing board, power board, blood sensor board and pressure sensor
board.
Interfaces
BC-5800 offers many interfaces to facilitate data processing and selection of various
accessories. It provides 4 USB interfaces, 1 network interface, 1 pneumatic unit control
interface and 1 reserved interface. USB interfaces can be used to connect mouse, keyboard,
printer, scanner and USB, and to perform software upgrade. The network interface adopts
built-in network card, can perform networking function.
Software running environment
System software can be divided into boot software, operation software and application
software. The boot software and operation software are stored in the FLASH chip of the main
board, and the application software is stored in the hard disk. The boot software has two main
functions, one is to configure address space, and the other is to initialize system memory.
The operation system completes the resource initialization of CPU board and provides
operation system environment to the application software. The application software offers an
interactive operation interface.
Fluidic system
Fluidic system is the tubing structure of the analyzer where reagent, sample and air flow
through. All hydraulic parts are connected correspondingly, and they are controlled by
software and drive hardware according to the specified order to realize control over the
allocation and direction of media.
2-1
System Structure
2.2 Fluidic System
Please refer to Chapter 3 Fluidic System of this manual.
2-2
System Structure
2.3 Hardware System
Please refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System of this manual.
2-3
System Structure
2.4 Main Structure
BC-5800 5-differential auto hematology analyzer consists of the main unit (analyzer),
pneumatic unit and accessories.
Figure 2-1 Front of the Analyzer
1----Touch screen 4----Sample probe

2----Power button 5----Aspirate key
3----Power indicator
2-4
System Structure
Figure 2-2 Front of the Analyzer (Autoloader Configured)
1----Touch screen 5----Aspirate key

2----Power button 6----Sample tube
3----Power indicator 7----Tube rack
4----Sample probe 8----Autoloader
2-5
System Structure
1
2
21 3
20
19
18 4
17 5
16
15
14
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
Figure 2-3 Back of the Analyzer
1----USB interface 12----M-58D diluent inlet

2----Reserved interface 13----M-58D diluent sensor BNC connector
3----Pneumatic unit control interface 14----M-58LBA lyse inlet
4----USB interface 15----M-58LBA lyse sensor BNC connector
5----Power input 16----M-58LEO() lyse inlet
6----Vacuum interface 17----M-58LEO() lyse sensor BNC connector
7----Pressure interface 18----M-58LEO() lyse sensor BNC connector
8----M-58 diluent sensor BNC connector 19----M-58LEO() lyse inlet
9----Waste sensor BNC connector 20----M-58LH lyse inlet
10----M-58 cleanser inlet 21----M-58LH lyse sensor BNC connector
11----Waste outlet
2-6
System Structure
Figure 2-4 Front of the Analyzer (Front Cover Removed)
1----RBC & HGB bath unit 5----Cover photocoupler protecting unit

2----Cover support unit 6----Manual sampling and SRV(Sample
Rotator Valve) unit
3----WBC bath unit 7----START on/off unit
4----RBC premix bath unit 8----Syringes
2-7
System Structure
Figure 2-5 Front of the Analyzer (Front Cover Removed, Pierce & Mix Unit Configured)
1----RBC & HGB bath unit 6----Manual sampling and SRV(Sample

Rotator Valve) unit
2----Cover support unit 7----START on/off unit
3----WBC bath unit 8----Syringes
4----RBC premix bath unit 9----Pierce & mix unit
5----Cover photocoupler protecting
unit
2-8
System Structure
8 7 6 5
Figure 2-6 Inside Right of the Analyzer (Right Door Removed)
1----Optical system 5----Burkert valve unit

2----Valve & pump unit 6----Pinch valve unit
3----Cistern and waste chamber 7---- Waste chamber
unit
4----Waste five-way valve unit 8----Reagent preheating unit
2-9
System Structure
9 10 11 12
7
6
Figure 2-7 Inside Left of the Analyzer (Left Door Removed)
1----Power input 7----Pressure sensor board

2----Interface board 8----Fan
3----Filter 9----Hard disk unit
4----Air valve unit 10----Main board and signal board unit
5----Pressure regulator unit 11----PCB support bar unit
6----Power drive board unit 12----Volumetric unit
2-10
System Structure
Figure 2-8 Front of Pneumatic Unit
1----Relief valve 2----Power indicator
2-11
System Structure
2.5 Software Structure
Software system can be divided into boot software, operation software and application
software. Boot software is autoloaded by hardware; its code runs in FLASH to configure
address space and to initialize system memory. Operation system completes the resource
initialization of CPU board, loading application software and transferring the CPU control
authority to application software. The code of application software runs in SDRAM, it obtains
the resource data needed from external hard disk to provide functions like counting,
parameter setting, quality control, device maintenance, data management, assistance, help,
etc. The application software sends control command to corresponding fluidic units at the
specified time according to the fluidic unit control sequence in basic sequence.
2.5.1 Menu Structure

1. Main screen
There are 8 function icons in the main screen menu. Operators can click on the function
icons in the main screen to enter into corresponding screens to perform all functions of the
analyzer. See Figure 2-9 for the submenu structure of the main screen.
Figure 2-9 Menu Structure of the Main Screen
2. Counting screen
Counting screen comprises four parts: status region, measurement result and data region of
the current sample, data display region of the next sample and function button region.
Operators can click each function button in the counting screen to perform the functions of
the analyzer.
See Figure 2-10 for the menu structure of the counting screen:
2-12
System Structure
Figure 2-10 Menu Structure of the Counting Screen
3. Review screen
There are two modes of sample results review, table review mode and graph review mode.
When entering review screen from other screens, operators see the list review screen first.
See below for the menu structure of each screen:
Table review
2-13
System Structure
See Figure 2-11 for the menu structure of the table review menu:
Figure 2-11 Menu Structure of Table Review Mode
Graph review
See Figure 2-12 for the menu structure of the graph review mode:
2-14
System Structure
Figure 2-12 Menu Structure of Graph Review Mode
4. QC (Quality Control) screen

There are two QC programs: L-J QC and X-B QC. When switching to QC screen from other
screen, operators see L-J QC screen first.
L-J QC
See Figure 2-13 for the menu structure of L-J QC screen
2-15
System Structure
Figure 2-13 L-J QC Menu Structure
X-B QC
See Figure 2-14 for the menu structure of X-B QC screen
Figure 2-14 L-J QC Menu Structure
5. "Service" screen
"Service" screen includes "Maintenance", "Status", "Self-test", "Log", "Debug" and
"Initialization" screens. When switching to "Service" screen from other screens, operators
see the "Maintenance" screen first. See below for the menu structure of each screen:
2-16
System Structure
"Maintenance" screen
See Figure 2-15 for the menu structure of the "Maintenance" screen:
Figure 2-15 Menu Structure of the "Maintenance" Screen
"Status" screen
See Figure 2-16 for the menu structure of the "Status" screen:
2-17
System Structure
Service Main
Count
Maintain
Status Version
Self-test Temp&Pres
Log Vol.&Cur.
Init. Position
Debug Func. Set
Figure 2-16 Menu Structure of the "Status" Screen
"Self-test" screen
See Figure 2-17 for the menu structure of the "Self-test" screen:
2-18
System Structure
Figure 2-17 Menu Structure of the "Self-test" Screen
"Log" screen
See Figure 2-18 for the menu structure of the "Log" screen:
2-19
System Structure
Figure 2-18 Menu Structure of the "Log" screen
"Debug" screen
See Figure 2-19 for the menu structure of the "Debug" screen:
2-20
System Structure
Figure 2-19 Menu Structure of the "Debug" Screen
"Initialization" screen
See Figure 2-20 for the menu structure of the "Initialization" screen:
2-21
System Structure
Service Main
Count
Maintain
Status
Self-test
Log
Init. Set init.
Debug Runs init.
Figure 2-20 Menu Structure of the "Initialization" Screen
7. "Setup" screen
"Setup" screen includes "User", "Setting" and "Advance" screens. When switching to
"Setup" screen from other screen, operators see "Setting" screen first. See below for the
menu structure of each function screen:
Setting
See Figure 2-21 for the menu structure of the "Setting" screen:
2-22
System Structure
Figure 2-21 Menu Structure of "Setting" Screen
2-23
System Structure
Advanced
See Figure 2-22 for the menu structure of the "Advanced" screen:
Advanced Main
Count
User
Setting
Advanced Service
Figure 2-22 Menu Structure of "Advanced" Screen
User Management
See Figure 2-23 for the menu structure of the "User" screen:
Figure 2-23 Menu Structure of the "User" Screen
8. Calibration screen
2-24
System Structure
Figure 2-24 Menu Structure of the "Calibration" screen
2.5.2 Password
There are three levels of password: common user level, user administrator level and service
engineer level. The authorities of user administrator level cover all those of the common user
level, and the authorities of the service engineer level cover all those of the user administrator
level. See Table 2-1 for the permitted functions under each level of password.
Table 2-1 Function Comparison Table of All Levels of Password
Password Module Screen Permitted Functions

level
Common Counting Counting Switching count mode, editing data of
user the next sample, implementing count,
adding diluent, printing results of the
current sample, implementing
background count, unclogging,
cleaning, auto-sampling, STAT and
reviewing research parameters.
Review Table review Browsing sample records, editing
sample information (sample ID cannot
be altered), CV, and trend, selecting,
searching for and printing sample
data, switching
2-25
System Structure
Graph review Editing sample information, printing

sample data and research parameters
LJ QC setup, LJ QC count, LJ QC
LJ QC graph and LJ QC table
XB QC setup and control, XB QC
QC XB QC graph, XB QC table
Manual Manual calibration result browsing
Calibration calibration and printing
Setup User User management(altering username,
password and operator's information)
Setting Setting date and time, assistance
settings and reagent expiration date.
Service Self-test Mechanical self-test, valve self-test,
circuit self-test
Log Includes "All", "Parameter Setup"
and "Others". Error information and
run sequence records cannot be
viewed in "All"
Status Version, temperature and pressure,
voltage and current, position and
photocoupler, and configuration
Maintenance Replacing/priming, cleaning,
maintaining, overall maintenance
User Counting Counting Adjust histogram
administrator Review Table review 1 Delete sample data (set the deleting
authority for administrator in "Setup"
screen)
2 Modify sample ID
3 Check sample data
Graph review 1 Adjust histogram
2 Modify sample ID
3 Check sample data
Calibration Modify open vial-whole blood, open
Manual vial-predilute calibration parameters
calibration and print
Calibrator Calibration under open vial-whole
blood and open vial-predilute mode
Fresh blood Calibration for fresh blood under open
vial-whole blood and open
vial-predilute mode
Calibration Browsing and printing calibration
history history
2-26
System Structure
Setup User 1 Add users

2 Delete users
3 Modify user information
Setting Print device parameters,
communication parameters, counting
report printing setup, autoloader stop
condition, gain setup (HGB setting),
reference range (general, man,
woman, child, neonate, user-defined),
counting parameter units, RBC count
time, department and sender ID
setup, tube barcode setup (autoloader
configured)
Service Initialization Can initialize parameter units and
reference range, and print device
information
Self-test Can perform touch screen calibration
Log Display "All", "Parameter Setup",
"Others" and "Error Information".
Run sequence records and log of
operations of service engineer level
cannot be viewed in "All".
Service Counting Counting
engineer Review Table review 1 Export data to USB (sample data
export, scattergram export)
2 View and print repeatability and
trend graph
3 Delete sample data
Graph review Display and print special information
of samples
Calibration Modify calibration parameter under
open vial-whole blood and open
vial-predilute mode; modify the related
parameters under autoloader-whole
Manual blood or closed tube-whole blood
calibration mode
Modify calibration parameter under
open vial-whole blood and open
vial-predilute mode; modify the related
parameters under autoloader-whole
blood or closed tube-whole blood
Calibrator mode
2-27
System Structure
Setup Advanced 1 set auto-entry Flash mode

setting\service 2 Languages
engineer 3 Device serial numbers
4 Volume setup for RBC volumetric
tube
5 Sample record deletion authority
setup
6print bind reference range and its
flags
Gain Set the current value of all gains
Service Log 1 Display log type: "All", "Parameter
Setup", "Others", "Error
Information" and "Run Sequence".
All records can be viewed
2 Can export log with USB
Status 1 View version information of CD and
algorithm in version screen
2 View Temp. PID
(Kp,Ti,Td,T(S),SP()) in temperature
& pressure screen
Self-test Temperature and pressure calibration
can be done in self-test screen
Initialization View runs initialization
Debug 1 Importing data with USB
2 Wipe block debug
3 Mix unit debug.
Maintenance Software upgrade (USB upgrade)
2-28
3 Fluidic System
3.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts
3.1.1 Needles
Sample probe: connects to SRV (Sample Rotary Valve) for sample aspiration under
open vial mode.
Piercing needle: connects to piercing mechanism for sample aspiration under

autoloader mode.
Sample flow probe: connects to flow cell for the formation of sample flow in WBC
detection unit.
3.1.2 Probe Wipe

Probe wipe for sample probe: locates below SRV, its function is to wash the interior
and exterior of the sample probe.
Probe wipe for piercing needle: locates in piercing mechanism, its function is to
wash the interior and exterior of the piercing needle.
3.1.3 Pumps
Metering pump: metering part, aspirates fluid by negative pressure, and then
switches to negative pressure to drain fluid, providing reagent of a predetermined
amount for sample analysis. For specific models and function, please refer to
Appendix D3.
Syringes: aspirates and dispenses sample and reagent quantitatively. 1

2.5ml-syringe and 1 100ul-syringe. The first one is mainly used to aspirate sample
and diluent for cleaning open vial and piercing probe wipe; the latter one is mainly
used to push sample flow.
3.1.4 Valves
Fluidic valve: controls fluid or air flow direction.
Pinch valve: starts/stops the fluid flow. For the quantity and function, please refer to
Appendix D4.
3-1
Fluidic System
Check valve: controls the unidirectional flow of fluid or air. For the quantity and
function, please refer to Appendix D5. See Figure 3-1 for the direction of check
valve.
Figure 3-1 Check Valve
SRV: metering part, provides a pre-determined amount of sample for analysis. See
Figure 3-2 - Figure 3-4.
3-2
Figure 3-2 Open vial feeding position SRV fluidic status
3-3
Fluidic System
Figure 3-3 Autoloading position SRV fluidic status
3-4
Fluidic System
Figure 3-4 SRV tube interfaces
Serial Serial
Hole position Hole position
No. number
1. HGB6ul (open vial) 13.
2. RBC6ul (open vial) 14. RBC sample (first dilution) 62.5ul
3. 15. (open vial)

DIFF20ul (open vial)
4. 16.
5. 17.
BASO 20ul (open vial)
6. 18. RBC sample (first dilution) 62.5ul
7. HGB6ul (autoloading) 19. (autoloading)
8. RBC6ul (autoloading) 20.
9. 21. Open vial positioning hole

DIFF20ul (autoloading)
10 22. Piercing positioning hole
11 23. Peripheral cleaning channel

BASO 20ul (autoloading)
12 24. /
3.1.5 Cisterns and Waste Cisterns

DIL cistern: diluent cistern, for sample diluting and cleaning.
FCM cistern: sheath fluid (diluent) cistern, for WBC detection and cleaning.
Cleanser cistern: cleanser cistern, for cleanser maintenance.
WC1 waste cistern: waste cistern, gathering waste of WC2, WC3 and other
channels.
WC2 waste cistern: waste cistern, gathering waste of WBC unit.
WC3 waste cistern: waste cistern, providing stable negative pressure during RBC
counting and gathering waste of RBC unit.
3-5
Fluidic System
3.1.6 Baths
WBC bath: includes DIFF bath and BASO bath; DIFF bath is for the reaction of WBC
4-differential sample,
BASO bath is for the reaction of sample testing basophils.
Flow cell: it is the part facilitating WBC testing; sheath fluid forms here.
RBC premix bath: RBC channel, it is for the first dilution of sample in RBC channel.
RBC bath: RBC/PLT detection unit where the test on RBC/PLT completes.
HGB bath: HGB detection unit where the HGB test completes.
Volume tube: controls the volume of RBC/PLT testing sample.
3-6
Fluidic System
3.2 Introduction of Pneumatic Parts
3.2.1 Pneumatic System

Pneumatic system provides pressure to support the normal operation of the analyzer.
Pneumatic unit provides pressure and vacuum to the analyzer at the same time; the pressure
is regulated to 0.25MPa within the pneumatic unit and then starts output. After the analyzer
receives the pressure and vacuum from the pneumatic unit, a drying filter filtrates and dries the
pressure, and then regulates it to 0.07MPa and 0.16MPa; the vacuum is also regulated to
0.04MPa.
See the following Figure 3-5 for the pneumatic system.
Figure 3-5 Pneumatic system
3.2.2 The Functions of Air Pressure

See the following Table 3-1 for the functions of air pressure.
Table 3-1 Illustration on using pressure
Type Name Function

Pressure 0.25MPa Driving cylinder and pinch valve.
0.16MPa Forming sheath fluid.
0.07MPa Draining waste;
3-7
Fluidic System
Draining reagent for metering pump, DIL cistern and cleanser

cistern.
Vacuum 0.085MPa Aspirating reagent for metering pumps and cisterns.
0.04MPa WC1 cistern aspirates waste.
3.2.3 Valves
Air valve: controls the directional flow of air.
Pressure regulator: regulates pressure coming out directly from the pneumatic unit to
meet requirement on all kinds of pressure.
3.2.4 Filters
Pressure filter: filtrates and dries the air with pressure coming directly out from the
pneumatic unit.
Small filter: connects to FCM cistern, filters small impurities in diluent coming out
from FCM cistern.
Figure 3-6 Small filter
3-8
Fluidic System
3.3 Fluidic System
3.3.1 Reagent Volume Required

Sample analysis for a single sample each time
The analysis modes include open vial whole blood, autoloading whole blood and
predilute mode, each mode is divided into CBC+5DIFF and CBC, so there are
altogether 6 modes.
CBC+5DIFF mode
Autoloading Predilute
Open vial
Reagents Name whole
whole blood
blood
M-58 diluent M-58D diluent 58mL 60ml 58ml
M-58LEO(I) lyse 1.56mL 1.56mL 1.56mL
M-580LEO(II) lyse 0.32mL 0.32mL 0.32mL
M-58 lyse
M-58LBA lyse 1.56mL 1.56mL 1.56mL
M-58LH lyse 1.0mL 1.0mL 1.0mL
CBC mode
Autoloading Predilute
Open vial
Reagents Name whole
whole blood
blood
M-58 diluent M-58D diluent 48mL 50ml 48mL
M-58LEO(I) lyse - - -
M-58LEO(II) lyse - - -
M-58 lyse
M-58LBA lyse 1.56mL 1.56mL 1.56mL
M-58LH lyse 1.0mL 1.0mL 1.0mL
Normal startup function
Reagent volume required:

Reagent volume required
Reagents Name
when starting up normally
M-58 diluent M-58D diluent 216ml
M-58LEO(I) lyse 5.2ml
M-58LEO(II) lyse 1.28ml
M-58 lyse
M-58LBA lyse 5.2ml
M-58LH lyse 4.0ml
Cleanser for -
M-58 cleanser
hospital use
3-9
Fluidic System
Startup after emptying(prepare to ship)
Reagent volume required

Reagent volume Notes
required when starting
Reagents Name up after
emptying(prepare to
ship)
Volume consumed is
414ml, 260ml reagent
is stored in tubing and
cisterns
Volume consumed is
M-58LEO(I) lyse 13.52ml 8.22ml, 5.3ml reagent
is stored in tubes
Volume consumed is
5.58ml, 3.38ml
M-58LEO(II) lyse 8.96ml
reagent is stored in
M-58 lyse tubes
Volume consumed is
M-58LBA lyse 15.6ml 12.3ml, 3.3ml reagent
is stored in tubes
Volume consumed is
M-58LH lyse 9ml 5.8ml, 3.2ml reagent
is stored in tubes
Volume consumed is
Cleanser for 25ml, 117ml reagent is
M-58 cleanser 142ml
hospital use stored in tubes and
cisterns
Shutdown function
Reagent volume required:
Reagent volume
Reagents Name required when shutting
down normally
M-58LEO(I) lyse -
M-58LEO(II) lyse -
M-58 lyse
M-58LBA lyse -
M-58LH lyse -
Cleanser for 49ml
M-58 cleanser
hospital use
3-10
Fluidic System
3.3.2 Fluidic System Drawing
Figure 3-7 Fluidic system
3.3.3 WBC Channel
BASO Channel
Reagents used:
LBA lyse: lyses RBC, PLT and turns WBC (excluding basophils) into naked nucleus cells;
Diluent: cleaning, and providing sheath fluid
Detection principle: flow cytometry and semi-conductive laser scatter technology
Detection parameters: WBC, BASO# and BASO%
Diagram information: WBC scattergram
Dilution ratio: 1:52
Metering volume: 50.9l
Function description: the sample is diluted in the bath to the ratio of 1:52, and then
the dilution moves to the flow cell. Meanwhile sheath fluid is started and stabilized.
After that, the dilution moves to the measuring segment of the flow cell. Sample
syringe pushes the dilution, which is surrounded by the sheath fluid, through the flow
cell for optical measurement at a stable speed within certain amount of time. Then
clean the measurement tube to restore its original status.
3-11
Fluidic System
DIFF Channel
Reagents used:
LEO(I) and LEO(II): lyses RBC and performs dissimilation treatment to various types of WBC;
Diluent: cleaning, and providing sheath fluid
Detection principle: flow cytometry and semi-conductive laser scatter technology
Detection parameters: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%,

EOS# and EOS%
Diagram information: DIFF scattergram
Metering volume: 61.7l
Function description: the sample is diluted in the bath to the ratio of 1:68, and then
the dilution moves to the flow cell. Meanwhile sheath fluid is started and stabilized.
After that, the dilution moves to the measuring segment of the flow cell. Sample
syringe drives the dilution, which is surrounded by the sheath fluid, through the flow
cell for optical measurement at a stable speed within certain amount of time. Then
clean the measurement tube to restore its original status.
Fluidic Disposition of WBC Channel

Aspirating and metering sample and reagent: aspirate sample into SRV with whole
blood aspirating syringe, and then DP1 aspirates the pre-determined amount of
reagent and dispense the reagent into DIFF bath. DP2 and DP3 both aspirate certain
amount of reagent and then dispense the DIFF and BASO samples into DIFF and
BASO baths.
Mix: mix the sample with reagent by jet flow produced when dispensing the sample
and by using the mixing bar in DIFF and BASO bath.
Clean: clean the bath with fluid in DIL cistern through energizing fluidic valve SV17
and pinch valve PV11 and PV12.
Waste drainage: drain the waste with WC1 vacuum by energizing SV30 and SV31.
3.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel
RBC/PLT Channel
Reagents used:
Diluent: diluting and cleaning, providing conductive environment and isovolumetric treatment
to cells
Detection principle: aperture impedance method
3-12
Fluidic System
Detection parameters: RBC and PLT
Diagram information: RBC histogram and PLT histogram
Metering volume: 300l
The function of RBC channel is to count RBC and PLT in blood sample, the method adopted is
impedance method. During the detection, blood sample needs to be diluted to the ratio of
1:18000, which is hard to achieve with a single dilution, so the second dilution needs to be
conducted. First dilute the sample to the ratio of 1:433 and dispense it in to the premix bath;
and then aspirate the 1:433 sample back into the SRV and redilute it to the ratio of 1:41.6,
finally dispense it into RBC bath to form the 1:18000 sample.
RBC/PLT Channel Disposition

Aspirating and metering of sample and reagent: First dispense the sample that is
measured by SRV through 2.6ml metering pump DP8 and SV22 into RBC premix
bath, aspirate the sample that is diluted for the fist time with 1ml metering pump, and
then dispense the diluted sample into RBC counting bath through metering pump
DP8, SV22 and SV05.
Mix: bubble mix and jet flow mix;
Clean: add diluent into the RBC counting bath through DP8, SV22 and SV05 to clean
the bath; add diluent in to the premix bath through DP6 and SV23 to clean the bath;
Waste draining: RBC premix bath drains waste by WC1 vacuum and SV29; RBC
counting bath drains waste by WC1 vacuum and SV36;
3.3.5 HGB Channel

HGB Channel
Reagents used:
Diluent: to dilute and clean
HGB lyse: to lyse RBC and mix with HGB
Detection principle: colorimetric method
Detection parameter: HGB
The detection principle of HGB channel is colorimetric method, HGB concentration is

obtained by comparing the intensity of light passing through the sample with blank
reference reading.
HGB Channel Disposition

Aspirating and metering sample and reagent: dispense the sample in SRV into HGB
3-13
Fluidic System
bath through DP7 and SV19, meanwhile dispense certain amount of lyse into the
bath through DP5 and SV28;
Mix: bubble mix and jet flow mix;
Clean: dispense diluent into the HGB bath through DP7 and SV19 to clean the bath;
Waste draining: drains waste by WC1 vacuum and SV35;
3.3.6 Fluid Feeding and Draining Channel

Fluid feeding and draining channel includes DIL cistern, FCM cistern, waste cistern WC1, WC2
and WC3. See Figure 3-8 for the fluidic system connection. DIl and FCM cistern units both
have a three-way valve and a pneumatic pinch valve apart from the cistern. The three-way air
valve switches pressure for the cistern. Under pressure (DIL cistern: 0.07Mpa, FCM cistern
0.16Mpa), the cistern feeds fluid to the fluidic system and provides pressure as a driving force;
under vacuum, the three-way air valve helps to energize the pinch valve, the cistern is then
filled with fluid (from the diluent container). WC2 is an open container with air pressure; its
outlet is connected to WC1 through pneumatic pinch valve PV1. Energize PV1, waste in WC2
flows to WC1. WC3 is a closed container; its outlet is connected to WC1 through pneumatic
pinch valve PV6. Energize PV6, waste in WC3 flows to WC1, meanwhile WC3 stores vacuum
for RBC counting, and RBC bath and volumetric tube cleaning.WC1 also has a three-way air
valve and a pneumatic pinch valve. The energizing/de-energizing of the air valve switches the
pressure of WC1 between pressure (0.07Mpa) and vacuum (0.04Mpa). Under vacuum, WC1
can gather waste in all channels; under pressure, it helps to energize PV2 to drain waste into
waste container. The inlet of waste pump is connected to the waste draining outlets of all
channels; its outlet is connected to waste container.
The corresponding channels of each cistern, waste cistern and waste pump are marked in
Figure 3-8.
3-14
Fluidic System
Figure 3-8 The fluidic connection chart of cistern and waste channels
3.3.7 Sampling and Blood Dispensing Channel

Sampling and blood dispensing modules include: SRV and its controlling cylinder, peripheral
cleaning channel, probe wipe and whole blood aspirating syringe. The function of blood
dispensing and sampling channel is to aspirate certain amount of sample into SRV, complete
sample metering through the rotation of SRV, and then dispense certain amount of sample into
corresponding baths by metering pumps. The function of peripheral cleaning channel is to
clean the sample that is spilled out when SRV is rotating and avoid sample from leakage.
Probe wipe cleans the interior and exterior of sample probe.
3.3.8 Shutdown Cleanser Cleaning Disposition

Cleanser cleaning drive: the cleaning drive is the pressure of 0.07MPa in the
cleanser cistern and whole blood aspirating syringe, each is for a different cleaning
area. 0.07MPa pressure cleans all baths and flow cell; the syringe cleans SRV and
sample probe;
Cleanser cleaning procedure: energize fluid valve SV13 and the cleanser control
valves of all baths, dispense certain amount of cleanser into the baths by pressure to
clean them.
3-15
Fluidic System
3.4 Basic Cycle Design Description
3.4.1 Open Vial Whole Blood Measurement Cycle

0-11s, see the red lines in Figure 3-9
SRV is at the working position, that is SRV bar stays at the upper position.
During 0-3.6s, aspirate the sample to SRV from manual sample flow probe through
whole blood syringe SV09 and SV10;
Start probe wipe to clean the exterior of the open vial sample probe;
Empty RBC premix bath, RBC bath, HGB bath, DIFF and BASO bath;
Add 2ml diluent to HGB bath through DP7 and SV19, wait for 3.5s until the dilution
becomes stable, measure background voltage and then empty HGB bath;
Dispense diluent into RBC bath through DP8, SV22 and SV5 to clean the bath and
then empty it;
Dispense LEO I lyse and LBA lyse into DIFF bath and BASO bath respectively to
clean the baths, then empty them;
Empty waste cistern.

T43 J27-T351-J104
C12 T13 M-50 T1
C5 LF1 T19 C45
T18
WC2-2
WC2-1
T20 M-50D T2
T44
GV78 GV80 LBA T3

SV15 GV79
T14
LEO(I) T4
T45
BASO DIFF VAC CV1 VAC

CV2 VAC LEO(II) T5
T22
0.16MPa
T23
0.07MPa
T181
C36 0.07MPa LH T6
T38-J105
J43-T29-J44
T15
T46
SV3 SV2
T201
SV6
J45-T11-J46
J47-T10-J48
J41-T28-J42
LEO(II)
T185
PV8/GV53 PV7/GV54
J49-T9-J50
T202
LBA
LEO(I)
M-50

T169-T170
T8
LH
T12
T172-T173
T7
J1-T180-J2 C1
J7-T49-J8
J96-T31-J95
M-50
LH
FCM DIL
J39-T27-J40
T179

SV8 SV1
J37-T26-J38
T216-P2
T215-P1
J11-T48-J12
PV12/GV50 PV11/GV51
T197
T198
T160 J51-T30-J52 0.07MPa

T47
T36
T184 SV25 VAC
C38
J13-T174-J14
DP1 GV69
J21-T153-J22
SV7 T50
T38-J28-T37-J29
C3 C6 C7 C8 C11 C14 LEO(II) 0.32mL

T182 J3-T178-J4 J5-T177-J6 T175 J15-T171-J16 J17-T168-J18 T152 T154 T155
C2 C4 C10 C13 SV13 C47
J9-T176-J10
J19-T151-J20 T158 J23-T159-J24 J53-T32-J54 0.07MPa

PV10/GV52
T156
SV11 SV26 VAC

T51
VAC 1 2 DP2 GV71
T183
SV30 SV31 4 3 LEO(I) 0.52mL

0.07 MPa C39 J31-T41
T39-J30 6 5 T33-J35
SV17 J33-T33
GV75 T150 SV12 8 7
T40-J34-T35 T35-J36 J55-T34-J56 0.07MPa
T161
SV18
VAC
S_SYRINGE
SV27
DP4 J25-T42-J26 J32-T41 DP3
100L
1.5mL C9 LBA 0.52mL GV72

T71 C48
SV33
T52
SV14
T200
VAC C15 T162 T163

GV76 C59
SV23
T157
0.07MPa T73-J57 T72 C49 OPEN T61

SV24 SV34
T149
T62
T76
0.07MPa
T77 C50
T78
T199
T53
WC2-2
WC2-1
T164
T79-J80
C51

DP6 L M
T74-J58 T75 PV3-
1mL I1 T88-J59
I2 PV3/GV57
T63
C16 T90-P7 T91-J98

G2
T54
GV66 G1
T80
T117
E1
T165
J81-T95 T87-J60 C40

-0.04MPa
E2
0.07MPa
T89-P8 T92-J97
H WC2
C20 C57
T55
T116
C17 T60
RBC C56
T81
T56
GV77
K
T86
SV37 PV1/GV59
CV5 D2
D1
F2 T59 T64
T189
T166
J84-T115-J85
F1 C41 SV38
T191
T65
B2
T57
B1
T58
SV29 A2 A1 T85 T195

T112-J83-T113-J82-T114 T94-J64 T93
C C52 C58 C64
T82
C130
T83
SV5 C60
0.07MPa
J78-T147
C61
J73-T167-J74
T119 T118
T148-P4-P3
T204 T203 T120 SV16 WC1

T67
T69
T68
T103-J67-T102-J68-T101
T66
C23 C22 T188

GF3
C21 T187

C62 C63
SV22
J86-T138-P6 SV10 T190
T84
GV74
SV32
LH
J93-T139-P5-J94 C66 WC3

T106
0.07MPa GV67
0.07MPa
C35 T144 J75-T145-J76

PV5-
PV4-
PV3-
J77-T146
VAC
SV28 C19 VAC

T135
T348
0.07MPa
DP8 C53 PV2/GV58

T193
T136 J79-T137
T105
2.6mL
T143
T141 C18 T70

T192
C28 CV3
J91-T140-J92
T133
0.07MPa

VAC
HGB
T194
PV6/GV49
GV70
T210

T99
GV65 J65-T104-J66
T100
T132
T108
T109
PV5- T218
SV9 T107 T110 T111 C65
T142
C29 C55
J72-T126-P9
C54

0.07MPa
C27 PV5/GV55 C42 SV36

DP5
T209
J71-T125
1mL GV73 SV19

WC1-
T134
GV68
J69-T98-J70
PV4/GV56
T205-J88-T206-J87-T207 C33
P_SYRINGE
GV60
CV6
GV61
T124
2.5mL
T130
SV35 DP7
C24 J89-T208-J90 CV4
2mL
PV4-
T129 T128 T127 C32 SV21

T214 T213 T212 T211
C30 C31 T123
C25 C26
T186 WC1-
T97
SV20
T122 C43
T131 T121 T96
C34
Figure 3-9 Aspiration fluidic status under open vial whole blood mode
3-16
Fluidic System
SRV switches to the lower position, that is the SRV bar is at the lower position; That
means the SRV has obtained samples of 4 portions needed for the measurement;
Dispense RBC sample into premix bath through DP8 and SV22 to dilute it for the first
time, and then aspirate the diluted sample back into aspiration channel through DP6;
Dispense HGB sample into HGB bath through DP7 and SV19, meanwhile add lyse
into HGB bath through DP5 and SV28 to mix with the sample;
Dispense DIFF sample into DIFF bath through DP2 and SV26;
Dispense BASO sample into BASO bath through DP3 and SV27;
Other operations: fill up FCM cistern, empty WC2 waste cistern.

T43 J27-T351-J104
C12 T13 M-50 T1
C5 LF1 T19 C45
T18
WC2-2
WC2-1
T20 M-50D T2
T44
GV78 GV80 LBA T3

SV15 GV79
T14
LEO(I) T4
T45

CV2 VAC LEO(II) T5
T22
0.16MPa
T23
0.07MPa
T181
C36 0.07MPa LH T6
T38-J105
J43-T29-J44
T15
T46
SV3 SV2
T201
SV6
J45-T11-J46
J47-T10-J48
J41-T28-J42
LEO(II)
T185
PV8/GV53 PV7/GV54
J49-T9-J50
T202
LBA
LEO(I)
M-50

T169-T170
T8
LH
T12
T172-T173
T7
J1-T180-J2 C1
J7-T49-J8
J96-T31-J95
M-50
LH
FCM DIL
J39-T27-J40
T179

SV8 SV1
J37-T26-J38
T216-P2
T215-P1
J11-T48-J12
PV12/GV50 PV11/GV51
T197
T198
T160 J51-T30-J52 0.07MPa

T47
T36
T184 SV25 VAC
C38
J13-T174-J14
DP1 GV69
J21-T153-J22
SV7 T50
T38-J28-T37-J29
C3 C6 C7 C8 C11 C14 LEO(II) 0.32mL
C2 C4 C10 C13 SV13 C47
J9-T176-J10
J19-T151-J20 T158 J23-T159-J24 J53-T32-J54 0.07MPa

PV10/GV52
T156
SV11 SV26 VAC

T51
VAC 1 2 DP2 GV71
T183
SV30 SV31 4 3 LEO(I) 0.52mL

0.07 MPa C39 J31-T41
T39-J30 6 5 T33-J35
SV17 J33-T33
GV75 T150 SV12 8 7
T40-J34-T35 T35-J36 J55-T34-J56 0.07MPa
T161
SV18
VAC
S_SYRINGE
SV27
DP4 J25-T42-J26 J32-T41 DP3
100L

T71 C48
SV33
T52
SV14
T200
VAC C15 T162 T163

GV76 C59
SV23
T157
0.07MPa T73-J57 T72 C49 OPEN T61

SV24 SV34
T149
T62
T76
0.07MPa
T77 C50
T78
T199
T53
WC2-2
WC2-1
T164
T79-J80
C51

DP6 L M
T74-J58 T75 PV3-
1mL I1 T88-J59
I2 PV3/GV57
T63
C16 T90-P7 T91-J98
G2
T54
GV66 G1
T80
T117
E1
T165
J81-T95 T87-J60 C40
-0.04MPa
E2
0.07MPa
T89-P8 T92-J97
H WC2
C20 C57
T55
T116
C17 T60
RBC C56
T81
T56
GV77
K
T86
SV37 PV1/GV59
CV5 D2
D1
F2 T59 T64
T189
T166
J84-T115-J85
F1 C41 SV38
T191
T65
B2
T57
B1
T58
SV29 A2 A1 T85 T195

T112-J83-T113-J82-T114 T94-J64 T93
C C52 C58 C64
T82
C130
T83
SV5 C60
0.07MPa
J78-T147
C61
J73-T167-J74
T119 T118
T148-P4-P3
T204 T203 T120 SV16 WC1
T67
T69
T68
T103-J67-T102-J68-T101
T66
C23 C22 T188
GF3
C21 T187

C62 C63
SV22
J86-T138-P6 SV10 T190
T84
GV74
SV32
LH
J93-T139-P5-J94 C66 WC3

T106
0.07MPa GV67
0.07MPa
C35 T144 J75-T145-J76
PV5-
PV4-
PV3-
J77-T146
VAC
SV28 C19 VAC

T135
T348
0.07MPa
DP8 C53 PV2/GV58
T193
T136 J79-T137
T105
2.6mL
T143
T141 C18 T70
T192
C28 CV3
J91-T140-J92
T133
0.07MPa

VAC
HGB
T194
PV6/GV49
GV70
T210

T99
GV65 J65-T104-J66
T100
T132
T108
T109
PV5- T218
SV9 T107 T110 T111 C65
T142
C29 C55
J72-T126-P9
C54

0.07MPa
C27 PV5/GV55 C42 SV36

DP5
T209
J71-T125
1mL GV73 SV19

WC1-
T134
GV68
J69-T98-J70
PV4/GV56
T205-J88-T206-J87-T207 C33
P_SYRINGE
GV60
CV6
GV61
T124
2.5mL
T130
SV35 DP7
C24 J89-T208-J90 CV4
2mL
PV4-
T129 T128 T127 C32 SV21

T214 T213 T212 T211
C30 C31 T123
C25 C26
T186 WC1-
T97
SV20
T122 C43
T131 T121 T96
C34
Figure 3-10 Drainage fluidic status under open vial whole blood mode
SRV switches to the upper position;
Deliver the diluted sample (first dilution) that is measured by SRV to RBC bath
through DP8, SV22 and SV5;
Wait until the HGB sample turns stable, preparing measurement;
Deliver the sample in DIFF bath to the inlet of the flow cell through DP4, SV7, PV10
and PV11, start sheath fluid through SV3;
3-17
Fluidic System
T43 J27-T351-J104
C12 T13 M-50 T1
C5 LF1 T19 C45
T18
WC2-2
WC2-1
T20 M-50D T2
T44
GV78 GV80 LBA T3
SV15 GV79
T14
LEO(I) T4
T45
CV2 VAC LEO(II) T5
T22
0.16MPa
T23
0.07MPa
T181
C36 0.07MPa LH T6
T38-J105
J43-T29-J44
T15
T46
SV3 SV2
T201
SV6
J45-T11-J46
J47-T10-J48
J41-T28-J42
LEO(II)
T185
PV8/GV53 PV7/GV54
J49-T9-J50
T202
LBA
LEO(I)
M-50

T169-T170
T8
LH
T12
T172-T173
T7
J1-T180-J2 C1
J7-T49-J8
J96-T31-J95
M-50
LH
FCM DIL
J39-T27-J40
T179

SV8 SV1
J37-T26-J38
T216-P2
T215-P1
J11-T48-J12
PV12/GV50 PV11/GV51
T197
T198
T160 J51-T30-J52 0.07MPa
T47
T36
T184 SV25 VAC
C38
J13-T174-J14
DP1 GV69
J21-T153-J22
SV7 T50
T38-J28-T37-J29
C3 C6 C7 C8 C11 C14 LEO(II) 0.32mL
C2 C4 C10 C13 SV13 C47
J9-T176-J10
J19-T151-J20 T158 J23-T159-J24 J53-T32-J54 0.07MPa

PV10/GV52
T156
SV11 SV26 VAC
T51
VAC 1 2 DP2 GV71
T183
SV30 SV31 4 3 LEO(I) 0.52mL

0.07 MPa C39 J31-T41
T39-J30 6 5 T33-J35
SV17 J33-T33
GV75 T150 SV12 8 7
T40-J34-T35 T35-J36 J55-T34-J56 0.07MPa
T161
SV18
VAC
S_SYRINGE
SV27
DP4 J25-T42-J26 J32-T41 DP3
100L

T71 C48
SV33
T52
SV14
T200
VAC C15 T162 T163

GV76 C59
SV23
T157
0.07MPa T73-J57 T72 C49 OPEN T61
SV24 SV34
T149
T62
T76
0.07MPa
T77 C50
T78
T199
T53
WC2-2
WC2-1
T164
T79-J80
C51

DP6 L M
T74-J58 T75 PV3-
1mL I1 T88-J59
I2 PV3/GV57
T63
C16 T90-P7 T91-J98
G2
T54
GV66 G1
T80
T117
E1
T165
J81-T95 T87-J60 C40
-0.04MPa
E2
0.07MPa
T89-P8 T92-J97
H WC2
C20 C57
T55
T116
C17 T60
RBC C56
T81
T56
GV77
K
T86
SV37 PV1/GV59
CV5 D2
D1
F2 T59 T64
T189
T166
J84-T115-J85
F1 C41 SV38
T191
T65
B2
T57
B1
T58
SV29 A2 A1 T85 T195
T112-J83-T113-J82-T114 T94-J64 T93
C C52 C58 C64
T82
C130
T83
SV5 C60
0.07MPa
J78-T147
C61
J73-T167-J74
T204 T203 T120 T119 T118 T148-P4-P3 SV16 WC1
T67
T69
T68
T103-J67-T102-J68-T101
T66
C23 C22 T188
GF3
C21 T187

C62 C63
SV22
J86-T138-P6 SV10 T190
T84
GV74
SV32
LH
J93-T139-P5-J94 C66 WC3
T106
0.07MPa GV67
0.07MPa
C35 T144 J75-T145-J76
PV5-
PV4-
PV3-
J77-T146
VAC
SV28 C19 VAC

T135
T348
0.07MPa
DP8 C53 PV2/GV58
T193
T136 J79-T137
T105
2.6mL
T143
T141 C18 T70
T192
C28 CV3
J91-T140-J92
T133
0.07MPa

VAC
HGB
T194
PV6/GV49
GV70
T210

T99
GV65 J65-T104-J66
T100
T132
T108
T109
PV5- T218
SV9 T107 T110 T111 C65
T142
C29 C55
J72-T126-P9
C54

0.07MPa
C27 PV5/GV55 C42 SV36

DP5
T209
J71-T125
1mL GV73 SV19

WC1-
T134
GV68
T205-J88-T206-J87-T207
PV4/GV56 J69-T98-J70
C33
P_SYRINGE
GV60
CV6
GV61
T124
2.5mL
T130
SV35 DP7
C24 J89-T208-J90 CV4
2mL
PV4-
T129 T128 T127 C32 SV21

T214 T213 T212 T211
C30 C31 T123
C25 C26
T186 WC1-
T97
SV20
T122 C43
T131 T121 T96
C34
Figure 3-11 The first dilution RBC sample preparation fluidic status under open vial
whole blood mode
The sample syringe drives fluid to clean the sampling channel;
Start sample syringe, drive the DIFF sample slowly into the optical detection area of
the flow cell for measurement;
Empty waste and clean DIFF bath, prime 1.5ml diluent into DIFF bath through SV17
and PV11 with the effect of DIL cistern pressure. DIFF bath is ready for
measurement.
Wait until the HGB sample turns stable, preparing measurement;
Energize SV37, RBC/PLT channel measurement starts;
Empty premix bath through SV11, dispense cleanser into premix bath through DP6 to
clean the bath;
3-18
Fluidic System
T43 J27-T351-J104
C12 T13 M-50 T1
C5 LF1 T19 C45
T18
WC2-2
WC2-1
T20 M-50D T2
T44
GV78 GV80 LBA T3
SV15 GV79
T14
LEO(I) T4
T45
CV2 VAC LEO(II) T5
T22
0.16MPa
T23
0.07MPa
T181
C36 0.07MPa LH T6
T38-J105
J43-T29-J44
T15
T46
SV3 SV2
T201
SV6
J45-T11-J46
J47-T10-J48
J41-T28-J42
LEO(II)
T185
PV8/GV53 PV7/GV54
J49-T9-J50
T202
LBA
LEO(I)
M-50

T169-T170
T8
LH
T12
T172-T173
T7
J1-T180-J2 C1
J7-T49-J8
J96-T31-J95
M-50
LH
FCM DIL
J39-T27-J40
T179

SV8 SV1
J37-T26-J38
T216-P2
T215-P1
J11-T48-J12
PV12/GV50 PV11/GV51
T197
T198
T160 J51-T30-J52 0.07MPa
T47
T36
T184 SV25 VAC
C38
J13-T174-J14
DP1 GV69
J21-T153-J22
SV7 T50
T38-J28-T37-J29
C3 C6 C7 C8 C11 C14 LEO(II) 0.32mL
C2 C4 C10 C13 SV13 C47
J9-T176-J10
J19-T151-J20 T158 J23-T159-J24 J53-T32-J54 0.07MPa

PV10/GV52
T156
SV11 SV26 VAC
T51
VAC 1 2 DP2 GV71
T183
SV30 SV31 4 3 LEO(I) 0.52mL

0.07 MPa C39 J31-T41
T39-J30 6 5 T33-J35
SV17 J33-T33
GV75 T150 SV12 8 7
T40-J34-T35 T35-J36 J55-T34-J56 0.07MPa
T161
SV18
VAC
S_SYRINGE
SV27
DP4 J25-T42-J26 J32-T41 DP3
100L

T71 C48
SV33
T52
SV14
T200
VAC C15 T162 T163

GV76 C59
SV23
T157
0.07MPa T73-J57 T72 C49 OPEN T61
SV24 SV34
T149
T62
T76
0.07MPa
T77 C50
T78
T199
T53
WC2-2
WC2-1
T164
T79-J80
C51

DP6 L M
T74-J58 T75 PV3-
1mL I1 T88-J59
I2 PV3/GV57
T63
C16 T90-P7 T91-J98
G2
T54
GV66 G1
T80
T117
E1
T165
J81-T95 T87-J60 C40
-0.04MPa
E2
0.07MPa
T89-P8 T92-J97
H WC2
C20 C57
T55
T116
C17 T60
RBC C56
T81
T56
GV77
K
T86
SV37 PV1/GV59
CV5 D2
D1
F2 T59 T64
T189
T166
J84-T115-J85
F1 C41 SV38
T191
T65
B2
T57
B1
T58
SV29 A2 A1 T85 T195
T112-J83-T113-J82-T114 T94-J64 T93
C C52 C58 C64
T82
C130
T83
SV5 C60
0.07MPa
J78-T147
C61
J73-T167-J74
T204 T203 T120 T119 T118 T148-P4-P3 SV16 WC1
T67
T69
T68
T103-J67-T102-J68-T101
T66
C23 C22 T188
GF3
C21 T187

C62 C63
SV22
J86-T138-P6 SV10 T190
T84
GV74
SV32
LH
J93-T139-P5-J94 C66 WC3
T106
0.07MPa GV67
0.07MPa
C35 T144 J75-T145-J76
PV5-
PV4-
PV3-
J77-T146
VAC
SV28 C19 VAC

T135
T348
0.07MPa
DP8 C53 PV2/GV58
T193
T136 J79-T137
T105
2.6mL
T143
T141 C18 T70
T192
C28 CV3
J91-T140-J92
T133
0.07MPa

VAC
HGB
T194
PV6/GV49
GV70
T210

T99
GV65 J65-T104-J66
T100
T132
T108
T109
PV5- T218
SV9 T107 T110 T111 C65
T142
C29 C55
J72-T126-P9
C54

0.07MPa
C27 PV5/GV55 C42 SV36

DP5
T209
J71-T125
1mL GV73 SV19

WC1-
T134
GV68
T205-J88-T206-J87-T207
PV4/GV56 J69-T98-J70
C33
P_SYRINGE
GV60
CV6
GV61
T124
2.5mL
T130
SV35 DP7
C24 J89-T208-J90 CV4
2mL
PV4-
T129 T128 T127 C32 SV21

T214 T213 T212 T211
C30 C31 T123
C25 C26
T186 WC1-
T97
SV20
T122 C43
T131 T121 T96
C34
Figure 3-12 DIFF measurement preparation fluidic status under open vial whole blood
mode
Open vial sample probe and probe wipe restore to the ready-for-detection status,
prepare next sample;
Wait for 19s so that the HGB sample turns stable, start measurement, and then
empty HGB bath after the measurement completes;
RBC detection in process;
Clean WBC sample preparation tubes through SV1, PV10, SV7 and SV8;
Drain waste through PV1 and WC2;
DIL obtains diluent from diluent container with the effect of vacuum through PV7 and
GV79.
3-19
Fluidic System
T43 J27-T351-J104
C12 T13 M-50 T1
C5 LF1 T19 C45
T18
WC2-2
WC2-1
T20 M-50D T2
T44
GV78 GV80 LBA T3
SV15 GV79
T14
LEO(I) T4
T45
CV2 VAC LEO(II) T5
T22
0.16MPa
T23
0.07MPa
T181
C36 0.07MPa LH T6
T38-J105
J43-T29-J44
T15
T46
SV3 SV2
T201
SV6
J45-T11-J46
J47-T10-J48
J41-T28-J42
LEO(II)
T185
PV8/GV53 PV7/GV54
J49-T9-J50
T202
LBA
LEO(I)
M-50

T169-T170
T8
LH
T12
T172-T173
T7
J1-T180-J2 C1
J7-T49-J8
J96-T31-J95
M-50
LH
FCM DIL
J39-T27-J40
T179

SV8 SV1
J37-T26-J38
T216-P2
T215-P1
J11-T48-J12
PV12/GV50 PV11/GV51
T197
T198
T160 J51-T30-J52 0.07MPa
T47
T36
T184 SV25 VAC
C38
J13-T174-J14
DP1 GV69
J21-T153-J22
SV7 T50
T38-J28-T37-J29
C3 C6 C7 C8 C11 C14 LEO(II) 0.32mL
C2 C4 C10 C13 SV13 C47
J9-T176-J10
J19-T151-J20 T158 J23-T159-J24 J53-T32-J54 0.07MPa

PV10/GV52
T156
SV11 SV26 VAC
T51
VAC 1 2 DP2 GV71
T183
SV30 SV31 4 3 LEO(I) 0.52mL

0.07 MPa C39 J31-T41
T39-J30 6 5 T33-J35
SV17 J33-T33
GV75 T150 SV12 8 7
T40-J34-T35 T35-J36 J55-T34-J56 0.07MPa
T161
SV18
VAC
S_SYRINGE
SV27
DP4 J25-T42-J26 J32-T41 DP3
100L

T71 C48
SV33
T52
SV14
T200
VAC C15 T162 T163

GV76 C59
SV23
T157
0.07MPa T73-J57 T72 C49 OPEN T61
SV24 SV34
T149
T62
T76
0.07MPa
T77 C50
T78
T199
T53
WC2-2
WC2-1
T164
T79-J80
C51

DP6 L M
T74-J58 T75 PV3-
1mL I1 T88-J59
I2 PV3/GV57
T63
C16 T90-P7 T91-J98
G2
T54
GV66 G1
T80
T117
E1
T165
J81-T95 T87-J60 C40
-0.04MPa
E2
0.07MPa
T89-P8 T92-J97
H WC2
C20 C57
T55
T116
C17 T60
RBC C56
T81
T56
GV77
K
T86
SV37 PV1/GV59
CV5 D2
D1
F2 T59 T64
T189
T166
J84-T115-J85
F1 C41 SV38
T191
T65
B2
T57
B1
T58
SV29 A2 A1 T85 T195
T112-J83-T113-J82-T114 T94-J64 T93
C C52 C58 C64
T82
C130
T83
SV5 C60
0.07MPa
J78-T147
C61
J73-T167-J74
T204 T203 T120 T119 T118 T148-P4-P3 SV16 WC1
T67
T69
T68
T103-J67-T102-J68-T101
T66
C23 C22 T188
GF3
C21 T187

C62 C63
SV22
J86-T138-P6 SV10 T190
T84
GV74
SV32
LH
J93-T139-P5-J94 C66 WC3
T106
0.07MPa GV67
0.07MPa
C35 T144 J75-T145-J76
PV5-
PV4-
PV3-
J77-T146
VAC
SV28 C19 VAC

T135
T348
0.07MPa
DP8 C53 PV2/GV58
T193
T136 J79-T137
T105
2.6mL
T143
T141 C18 T70
T192
C28 CV3
J91-T140-J92
T133
0.07MPa

VAC
HGB
T194
PV6/GV49
GV70
T210

T99
GV65 J65-T104-J66
T100
T132
T108
T109
PV5- T218
SV9 T107 T110 T111 C65
T142
C29 C55
J72-T126-P9
C54

0.07MPa
C27 PV5/GV55 C42 SV36

DP5
T209
J71-T125
1mL GV73 SV19

WC1-
T134
GV68
T205-J88-T206-J87-T207
PV4/GV56 J69-T98-J70
C33
P_SYRINGE
GV60
CV6
GV61
T124
2.5mL
T130
SV35 DP7
C24 J89-T208-J90 CV4
2mL
PV4-
T129 T128 T127 C32 SV21

T214 T213 T212 T211
C30 C31 T123
C25 C26
T186 WC1-
T97
SV20
T122 C43
T131 T121 T96
C34
Figure 3-13 RBC and DIFF measurement preparation fluidic status under open vial
whole blood mode
Add 4ml diluent into HGB bath through DP7 and SV19, HGB bath is ready for
measurement.
Deliver the sample in BASO bath to the inlet of the flow cell through DP4, SV7, PV10
and PV12, start sheath fluid through SV3;
Start sample syringe, drive the BASO sample slowly into the optical detection area of
the flow cell for measurement; Empty waste and clean BASO bath;
RBC/PLT measurement completes;
After clean the RBC premix bath, add 2ml diluent through DP6 and SV23. RBC
premix bath is ready for measurement;
Empty RBC bath, add 2.6ml diluent through DP8 and SV22 to clean the bath.
3-20
Fluidic System
T43 J27-T351-J104
C12 T13 M-50 T1
C5 LF1 T19 C45
T18
WC2-2
WC2-1
T20 M-50D T2
T44
GV78 GV80 LBA T3
SV15 GV79
T14
LEO(I) T4
T45
CV2 VAC LEO(II) T5
T22
0.16MPa
T23
0.07MPa
T181
C36 0.07MPa LH T6
T38-J105
J43-T29-J44
T15
T46
SV3 SV2
T201
SV6
J45-T11-J46
J47-T10-J48
J41-T28-J42
LEO(II)
T185
PV8/GV53 PV7/GV54
J49-T9-J50
T202
LBA
LEO(I)
M-50

T169-T170
T8
LH
T12
T172-T173
T7
J1-T180-J2 C1
J7-T49-J8
J96-T31-J95
M-50
LH
FCM DIL
J39-T27-J40
T179

SV8 SV1
J37-T26-J38
T216-P2
T215-P1
J11-T48-J12
PV12/GV50 PV11/GV51
T197
T198
T160 J51-T30-J52 0.07MPa
T47
T36
T184 SV25 VAC
C38
J13-T174-J14
DP1 GV69
J21-T153-J22
SV7 T50
T38-J28-T37-J29
C3 C6 C7 C8 C11 C14 LEO(II) 0.32mL
C2 C4 C10 C13 SV13 C47
J9-T176-J10
J19-T151-J20 T158 J23-T159-J24 J53-T32-J54 0.07MPa

PV10/GV52
T156
SV11 SV26 VAC
T51
VAC 1 2 DP2 GV71
T183
SV30 SV31 4 3 LEO(I) 0.52mL

0.07 MPa C39 J31-T41
T39-J30 6 5 T33-J35
SV17 J33-T33
GV75 T150 SV12 8 7
T40-J34-T35 T35-J36 J55-T34-J56 0.07MPa
T161
SV18
VAC
S_SYRINGE
SV27
DP4 J25-T42-J26 J32-T41 DP3
100L

T71 C48
SV33
T52
SV14
T200
VAC C15 T162 T163

GV76 C59
SV23
T157
0.07MPa T73-J57 T72 C49 OPEN T61
SV24 SV34
T149
T62
T76
0.07MPa
T77 C50
T78
T199
T53
WC2-2
WC2-1
T164
T79-J80
C51

DP6 L M
T74-J58 T75 PV3-
1mL I1 T88-J59
I2 PV3/GV57
T63
C16 T90-P7 T91-J98
G2
T54
GV66 G1
T80
T117
E1
T165
J81-T95 T87-J60 C40
-0.04MPa
E2
0.07MPa
T89-P8 T92-J97
H WC2
C20 C57
T55
T116
C17 T60
RBC C56
T81
T56
GV77
K
T86
SV37 PV1/GV59
CV5 D2
D1
F2 T59 T64
T189
T166
J84-T115-J85
F1 C41 SV38
T191
T65
B2
T57
B1
T58
SV29 A2 A1 T85 T195
T112-J83-T113-J82-T114 T94-J64 T93
C C52 C58 C64
T82
C130
T83
SV5 C60
0.07MPa
J78-T147
C61
J73-T167-J74
T204 T203 T120 T119 T118 T148-P4-P3 SV16 WC1
T67
T69
T68
T103-J67-T102-J68-T101
T66
C23 C22 T188
GF3
C21 T187

C62 C63
SV22
J86-T138-P6 SV10 T190
T84
GV74
SV32
LH
J93-T139-P5-J94 C66 WC3
T106
0.07MPa GV67
0.07MPa
C35 T144 J75-T145-J76
PV5-
PV4-
PV3-
J77-T146
VAC
SV28 C19 VAC

T135
T348
0.07MPa
DP8 C53 PV2/GV58
T193
T136 J79-T137
T105
2.6mL
T143
T141 C18 T70
T192
C28 CV3
J91-T140-J92
T133
0.07MPa

VAC
HGB
T194
PV6/GV49
GV70
T210

T99
GV65 J65-T104-J66
T100
T132
T108
T109
PV5- T218
SV9 T107 T110 T111 C65
T142
C29 C55
J72-T126-P9
C54

0.07MPa
C27 PV5/GV55 C42 SV36

DP5
T209
J71-T125
1mL GV73 SV19

WC1-
T134
GV68
T205-J88-T206-J87-T207
PV4/GV56 J69-T98-J70
C33
P_SYRINGE
GV60
CV6
GV61
T124
2.5mL
T130
SV35 DP7
C24 J89-T208-J90 CV4
2mL
PV4-
T129 T128 T127 C32 SV21

T214 T213 T212 T211
C30 C31 T123
C25 C26
T186 WC1-
T97
SV20
T122 C43
T131 T121 T96
C34
Figure 3-14 BASO sample preparation fluidic status under open vial whole blood mode

Clean RBC back bath through SV34 and SV37 with the effect of DIL pressure and
WC3 vacuum;
Dispense 1.5ml diluent into BASO bath through SV17 and PV12. BASO bath is ready
for measurement.
3-21
Fluidic System

T43 J27-T351-J104
C12 T13 M-50 T1
C5 LF1 T19 C45
T18
WC2-2
WC2-1
T20 M-50D T2
T44
GV78 GV80 LBA T3
SV15 GV79
T14
LEO(I) T4
T45
CV2 VAC LEO(II) T5
T22
0.16MPa
T23
0.07MPa
T181
C36 0.07MPa LH T6
T38-J105
J43-T29-J44
T15
T46
SV3 SV2
T201
SV6
J45-T11-J46
J47-T10-J48
J41-T28-J42
LEO(II)
T185
PV8/GV53 PV7/GV54
J49-T9-J50
T202
LBA
LEO(I)
M-50

T169-T170
T8
LH
T12
T172-T173
T7
J1-T180-J2 C1
J7-T49-J8
J96-T31-J95
M-50
LH
FCM DIL
J39-T27-J40
T179

SV8 SV1
J37-T26-J38
T216-P2
T215-P1
J11-T48-J12
PV12/GV50 PV11/GV51
T197
T198
T160 J51-T30-J52 0.07MPa
T47
T36
T184 SV25 VAC
C38
J13-T174-J14
DP1 GV69
J21-T153-J22
SV7 T50
T38-J28-T37-J29
C3 C6 C7 C8 C11 C14 LEO(II) 0.32mL
C2 C4 C10 C13 SV13 C47
J9-T176-J10
J19-T151-J20 T158 J23-T159-J24 J53-T32-J54 0.07MPa

PV10/GV52
T156
SV11 SV26 VAC
T51
VAC 1 2 DP2 GV71
T183
SV30 SV31 4 3 LEO(I) 0.52mL

0.07 MPa C39 J31-T41
T39-J30 6 5 T33-J35
SV17 J33-T33
GV75 T150 SV12 8 7
T40-J34-T35 T35-J36 J55-T34-J56 0.07MPa
T161
SV18
VAC
S_SYRINGE
SV27
DP4 J25-T42-J26 J32-T41 DP3
100L

T71 C48
SV33
T52
SV14
T200
VAC C15 T162 T163

GV76 C59
SV23
T157
0.07MPa T73-J57 T72 C49 OPEN T61
SV24 SV34
T149
T62
T76
0.07MPa
T77 C50
T78
T199
T53
WC2-2
WC2-1
T164
T79-J80
C51

DP6 L M
T74-J58 T75 PV3-
1mL I1 T88-J59
I2 PV3/GV57
T63
C16 T90-P7 T91-J98
G2
T54
GV66 G1
T80
T117
E1
T165
J81-T95 T87-J60 C40
-0.04MPa
E2
0.07MPa
T89-P8 T92-J97
H WC2
C20 C57
T55
T116
C17 T60
RBC C56
T81
T56
GV77
K
T86
SV37 PV1/GV59
CV5 D2
D1
F2 T59 T64
T189
T166
J84-T115-J85
F1 C41 SV38
T191
T65
B2
T57
B1
T58
SV29 A2 A1 T85 T195
T112-J83-T113-J82-T114 T94-J64 T93
C C52 C58 C64
T82
C130
T83
SV5 C60
0.07MPa
J78-T147
J73-T167-J74 C61
T119 T118
T148-P4-P3
T204 T203 T120 SV16 WC1
T67
T69
T68
T103-J67-T102-J68-T101
T66
C23 C22 T188
GF3
C21 T187

C62 C63
SV22
J86-T138-P6 SV10 T190
T84
GV74
SV32
LH
J93-T139-P5-J94 C66 WC3
T106
0.07MPa GV67
0.07MPa
C35 T144 J75-T145-J76
PV5-
PV4-
PV3-
J77-T146
VAC
SV28 C19 VAC

T135
T348
0.07MPa
DP8 C53 PV2/GV58
T193
T136 J79-T137
T105
2.6mL
T143
T141 C18 T70
T192
C28 CV3
J91-T140-J92
T133
0.07MPa

VAC
HGB
T194
PV6/GV49
GV70
T210

T99
GV65 J65-T104-J66
T100
T132
T108
T109
PV5- T218
SV9 T107 T110 T111 C65
T142
C29 C55
J72-T126-P9
C54

0.07MPa
C27 PV5/GV55 C42 SV36

DP5
T209
J71-T125
1mL GV73 SV19

WC1-
T134
GV68
J69-T98-J70
PV4/GV56
T205-J88-T206-J87-T207 C33
P_SYRINGE
GV60
CV6
GV61
T124
2.5mL
T130
SV35 DP7
C24 J89-T208-J90 CV4
2mL
PV4-
T129 T128 T127 C32 SV21

T214 T213 T212 T211
C30 C31 T123
C25 C26
T186 WC1-
T97
SV20
T122 C43
T131 T121 T96
C34
Figure 3-15 BASO measurement fluidic status under open vial whole blood mode
49-60s, see the red lines
RBC bath is ready for measurement after zapping
Clean WBC sample preparation tubes through SV1, PV10, SV7 and SV8 with the
effect of FCM pressure;
DIL obtains diluent from diluent container through PV7 and GV79 with the effect of
vacuum;
FCM obtains diluent from diluent container through PV8 and GV80 with the effect of
vacuum.
WC2 discharges waste to WC1;
WC1 drains waste into the waste container outside the instrument.
3-22
Fluidic System
T43 J27-T351-J104
C12 T13 M-50 T1
C5 LF1 T19 C45
T18
WC2-2
WC2-1
T20 M-50D T2
T44
GV78 GV80 LBA T3
SV15 GV79
T14
LEO(I) T4
T45
CV2 VAC LEO(II) T5
T22
0.16MPa
T23
0.07MPa
T181
C36 0.07MPa LH T6
T38-J105
J43-T29-J44
T15
T46
SV3 SV2
T201
SV6
J45-T11-J46
J47-T10-J48
J41-T28-J42
LEO(II)
T185
PV8/GV53 PV7/GV54
J49-T9-J50
T202
LBA
LEO(I)
M-50

T169-T170
T8
LH
T12
T172-T173
T7
J1-T180-J2 C1
J7-T49-J8
J96-T31-J95
M-50
LH
FCM DIL
J39-T27-J40
T179

SV8 SV1
J37-T26-J38
T216-P2
T215-P1
J11-T48-J12
PV12/GV50 PV11/GV51
T197
T198
T160 J51-T30-J52 0.07MPa
T47
T36
T184 SV25 VAC
C38
J13-T174-J14
DP1 GV69
J21-T153-J22
SV7 T50
T38-J28-T37-J29
C3 C6 C7 C8 C11 C14 LEO(II) 0.32mL
C2 C4 C10 C13 SV13 C47
J9-T176-J10
J19-T151-J20 T158 J23-T159-J24 J53-T32-J54 0.07MPa

PV10/GV52
T156
SV11 SV26 VAC
T51
VAC 1 2 DP2 GV71
T183
SV30 SV31 4 3 LEO(I) 0.52mL

0.07 MPa C39 J31-T41
T39-J30 6 5 T33-J35
SV17 J33-T33
GV75 T150 SV12 8 7
T40-J34-T35 T35-J36 J55-T34-J56 0.07MPa
T161
SV18
VAC
S_SYRINGE
SV27
DP4 J25-T42-J26 J32-T41 DP3
100L

T71 C48
SV33
T52
SV14
T200
VAC C15 T162 T163

GV76 C59
SV23
T157
0.07MPa T73-J57 T72 C49 OPEN T61
SV24 SV34
T149
T62
T76
0.07MPa
T77 C50
T78
T199
T53
WC2-2
WC2-1
T164
T79-J80
C51

DP6 L M
T74-J58 T75 PV3-
1mL I1 T88-J59
I2 PV3/GV57
T63
C16 T90-P7 T91-J98
G2
T54
GV66 G1
T80
T117
E1
T165
J81-T95 T87-J60 C40
-0.04MPa
E2
0.07MPa
T89-P8 T92-J97
H WC2
C20 C57
T55
T116
C17 T60
RBC C56
T81
T56
GV77
K
T86
SV37 PV1/GV59
CV5 D2
D1
F2 T59 T64
T189
T166
J84-T115-J85
F1 C41 SV38
T191
T65
B2
T57
B1
T58
SV29 A2 A1 T85 T195
T112-J83-T113-J82-T114 T94-J64 T93
C C52 C58 C64
T82
C130
T83
SV5 C60
0.07MPa
J78-T147
C61
J73-T167-J74
T204 T203 T120 T119 T118 T148-P4-P3 SV16 WC1
T67
T69
T68
T103-J67-T102-J68-T101
T66
C23 C22 T188
GF3
C21 T187

C62 C63
SV22
J86-T138-P6 SV10 T190
T84
GV74
SV32
LH
J93-T139-P5-J94 C66 WC3
T106
0.07MPa GV67
0.07MPa
C35 T144 J75-T145-J76
PV5-
PV4-
PV3-
J77-T146
VAC
SV28 C19 VAC

T135
T348
0.07MPa
DP8 C53 PV2/GV58
T193
T136 J79-T137
T105
2.6mL
T143
T141 C18 T70
T192
C28 CV3
J91-T140-J92
T133
0.07MPa

VAC
HGB
T194
PV6/GV49
GV70
T210

T99
GV65 J65-T104-J66
T100
T132
T108
T109
PV5- T218
SV9 T107 T110 T111 C65
T142
C29 C55
J72-T126-P9
C54

0.07MPa
C27 PV5/GV55 C42 SV36

DP5
T209
J71-T125
1mL GV73 SV19

WC1-
T134
GV68
T205-J88-T206-J87-T207
PV4/GV56 J69-T98-J70
C33
P_SYRINGE
GV60
CV6
GV61
T124
2.5mL
T130
SV35 DP7
C24 J89-T208-J90 CV4
2mL
PV4-
T129 T128 T127 C32 SV21

T214 T213 T212 T211
C30 C31 T123
C25 C26
T186 WC1-
T97
SV20
T122 C43
T131 T121 T96
C34
Figure 3-16 BASO measurement fluidic status under open vial whole blood mode
3.4.2 Open Vial Predilute Measurement Cycle

Measurement process
The open vial prediluted measurement cycle is completely the same as open vial whole blood
measurement cycle; see 3.4.1 for the detailed process;
The difference between the two modes: the sample under predilute mode is diluted according
to certain ratio outside the instrument; while the sample under whole blood mode is
unprediluted whole blood.
3.4.3 Autoloading Whole Blood Measurement Cycle

Sampling mode
Autoloading measurement mode meets the requirement of automatic analysis of massive

samples. It realizes functions like delivering tubes in batches, loading tubes, fetching tubes,
automatic sample aspiration, etc.;
3-23
Fluidic System
T43 J27-T351-J104
C12 T13 M-50 T1
C5 LF1 T19 C45
T18
WC2-2
WC2-1
T20 M-50D T2
T44
GV78 GV80 LBA T3
SV15 GV79
T14
LEO(I) T4
T45
CV2 VAC LEO(II) T5
T22
0.16MPa
T23
0.07MPa
T181
C36 0.07MPa LH T6
T38-J105
J43-T29-J44
T15
T46
SV3 SV2
T201
SV6
J45-T11-J46
J47-T10-J48
J41-T28-J42
LEO(II)
T185
PV8/GV53 PV7/GV54
J49-T9-J50
T202
LBA
LEO(I)
M-50

T169-T170
T8
LH
T12
T172-T173
T7
J1-T180-J2 C1
J7-T49-J8
J96-T31-J95
M-50
LH
FCM DIL
J39-T27-J40
T179

SV8 SV1
J37-T26-J38
T216-P2
T215-P1
J11-T48-J12
PV12/GV50 PV11/GV51
T197
T198
T160 J51-T30-J52 0.07MPa
T47
T36
T184 SV25 VAC
C38
J13-T174-J14
DP1 GV69
J21-T153-J22
SV7 T50
T38-J28-T37-J29
C3 C6 C7 C8 C11 C14 LEO(II) 0.32mL
C2 C4 C10 C13 SV13 C47
J9-T176-J10
J19-T151-J20 T158 J23-T159-J24 J53-T32-J54 0.07MPa

PV10/GV52
T156
SV11 SV26 VAC
T51
VAC 1 2 DP2 GV71
T183
SV30 SV31 4 3 LEO(I) 0.52mL

0.07 MPa C39 J31-T41
T39-J30 6 5 T33-J35
SV17 J33-T33
GV75 T150 SV12 8 7
T40-J34-T35 T35-J36 J55-T34-J56 0.07MPa
T161
SV18
VAC
S_SYRINGE
SV27
DP4 J25-T42-J26 J32-T41 DP3
100L

T71 C48
SV33
T52
SV14
T200
VAC C15 T162 T163

GV76 C59
SV23
T157
0.07MPa T73-J57 T72 C49 OPEN T61
SV24 SV34
T149
T62
T76
0.07MPa
T77 C50
T78
T199
T53
WC2-2
WC2-1
T164
T79-J80
C51

DP6 L M
T74-J58 T75 PV3-
1mL I1 T88-J59
I2 PV3/GV57
T63
C16 T90-P7 T91-J98
G2
T54
GV66 G1
T80
T117
E1
T165
J81-T95 T87-J60 C40
-0.04MPa
E2
0.07MPa
T89-P8 T92-J97
H WC2
C20 C57
T55
T116
C17 T60
RBC C56
T81
T56
GV77
K
T86
SV37 PV1/GV59
CV5 D2
D1
F2 T59 T64
T189
T166
J84-T115-J85
F1 C41 SV38
T191
T65
B2
T57
B1
T58
SV29 A2 A1 T85 T195
T112-J83-T113-J82-T114 T94-J64 T93
C C52 C58 C64
T82
C130
T83
SV5 C60
0.07MPa
J78-T147
C61
J73-T167-J74
T204 T203 T120 T119 T118 T148-P4-P3 SV16 WC1
T67
T69
T68
T103-J67-T102-J68-T101
T66
C23 C22 T188
GF3
C21 T187

C62 C63
SV22
J86-T138-P6 SV10 T190
T84
GV74
SV32
LH
J93-T139-P5-J94 C66 WC3
T106
0.07MPa GV67
0.07MPa
C35 T144 J75-T145-J76
PV5-
PV4-
PV3-
J77-T146
VAC
SV28 C19 VAC

T135
T348
0.07MPa
DP8 C53 PV2/GV58
T193
T136 J79-T137
T105
2.6mL
T143
T141 C18 T70
T192
C28 CV3
J91-T140-J92
T133
0.07MPa

VAC
HGB
T194
PV6/GV49
GV70
T210

T99
GV65 J65-T104-J66
T100
T132
T108
T109
PV5- T218
SV9 T107 T110 T111 C65
T142
C29 C55
J72-T126-P9
C54

0.07MPa
C27 PV5/GV55 C42 SV36

DP5
T209
J71-T125
1mL GV73 SV19

WC1-
T134
GV68
T205-J88-T206-J87-T207
PV4/GV56 J69-T98-J70
C33
P_SYRINGE
GV60
CV6
GV61
T124
2.5mL
T130
SV35 DP7
C24 J89-T208-J90 CV4
2mL
PV4-
T129 T128 T127 C32 SV21

T214 T213 T212 T211
C30 C31 T123
C25 C26
T186 WC1-
T97
SV20
T122 C43
T131 T121 T96
C34
Figure 3-17 Sample aspiration fluidic status under autoloading mode
Measurement process
The measurement process after sample is dispensed into SRV through whole blood syringe is
completely the same as the open vial whole blood measurement process;
SRV position
SRV is at the lower position when aspirating sample;
Measurement duration
Autoloading measurement mode realizes overall automatic functions like auto-loading and
auto-unloading of tubes and the auto-cycling of measurement process. The detection speed is
about 90 samples per hour.
3-24
Fluidic System
3.5 Sample Predilution Flowchart
3.5.1 Predilution Flowchart under Whole Blood Mode
Whole blood sample 120ul

(180ul in the autoloading mode)
Figure 3-18 Predilution flowchart under whole blood mode
3-25
Fluidic System
3.5.2 Dilution Flowchart under Predilute Mode
Figure 3-19 Dilution flowchart under predilute mode
3-26
4 Hardware System
According to function modules classification, the entire hardware system can be divided into
main board, signal processing board, driver board, touch screen control board, interface board,
indicator board, power board, pneumatic control board, pre-amplification board, laser control
board, volumetric board, etc. See Figure 4-1 for the block diagram of the entire hardware
system:
Inner Scanner Samples Feeding UART Laser Control Board Laser

Step Motors Board GPIO (3100-30-41194) Diode
GPIO
Position Sensors
(3100-30-41204) 5V A/D Indicator
TFT-LCD Light
BackLight UART GPIO Indicator Board
Inverter 12V Sample
(3100-30-41198)
GPIO GPIO Key
Pre-amplification LVDS Driver Board Step&DC Motors
Board(LAS) (3100-30-41186) Valves&Pumps
Laser (3100-30-41192)
Diode
051-000191-01 &Magnet&Heaters
Pre-amplification
Position&Liquid Sensors
Board(MAS)
(3100-30-41192) A/Ds
Temperature Sensors
RBC/PLT Signal Processing DSPI
Hole
HGB Board Main Board Gas Pressure
Pool GPIO
051-000192-00
(3100-30-41196) (3100-30-41182)
051-000197-00
Position Volumetric
Stop
Sensor Board GPIOs USB USB Devices
USB Interface
(3100-30-41196) Board RJ45 PC
TCP/IP
(3100-30-41200)
DB9 Fan
Touch Screen
UART
Touch Screen Control Board Compressor
5V Pneumatic Control
051-000202-00
(3100-30-41206)
Board Indication LED
Hard Disk FLEX-BUS (3100-30-41201)
AC Power
Power Board 5V&12V
5V&12V 5V&12V&24V
(3100-30-411881)
Figure 4-1 Block diagram of the hardware system
See below for the voltage distribution flow chart:
4-1
Hardware System
Figure 4-2 Voltage distribution flow chart
4-2
Hardware System
4.1 Main Board
4.1.1 Overview
In BC-5800 5-differential hematology analyzer, main board is the hardware platform of the
operation system and application software, it controls the operation of the whole system. It
offers some external interfaces, such as USB interface, TTL serial port, RS232 serial port, IDE
interface, network interface, SPI interface, difference display interface, etc.
Section 4.1 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the main board.
4.1.2 Board Composition

Function
Provides platform for the operation system and application software;
Realizes centralized management and overall coordination over all function boards.
Two RS232 serial ports and two TTL level serial ports;One LVDS level display
interface/one TFT LCD backlight interface;
One speed SPI interface with bit rate over 20Mbps;
One standard IDE data interface/one IDE hard disk power interface;
Four USB interfaces, meeting USB standard;
One 10/100Mbps network interface;
One BDM interface;
One JTAG interface of the FPGA;
One configured interface of the EPCS1.
See below Figure 4-3 for the block diagram of the main board:
4-3
Hardware System
Figure 4-3 Block diagram of the main board
Description
Provides platform for the operation system and application software;
CPU: MCF5474, running frequency is 266MHZ;

DDR: 128M, running frequency is 133MHZ;
FLASH: no less than 8M BYTE (storing initialization program and operation system)
IDE: no less than 40G;
Realizes centralized management and overall coordination over all function boards.
Sends commands to signal processing board through SPI interface and receives responses
and sampling information from the signal processing board simultaneously;
Sends control commands to driver board through serial port and receives responses from the
driver board simultaneously;
The main board can upgrades the hardware of signal processing board and driver board
respectively through serial port and GPIO interface;
Two TTL level serial ports and two RS232 serial ports;
The main board communicates with the driver board through TTL level serial port, sends
control commands to the driver board and receives its responses. Its communication
parameters are:
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Verification mode: even parity check
4-4
Hardware System
The other TTL level serial port is reserved

The main board receives touch information from the touch screen through a RS232 serial port,
the communication parameters are:
Baud rate: 19200/38400bps (depending on the control board of the touch screen)
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Verification mode: none
One serial port on the main board is led to the interface board to get connected with external
barcode reader. The communication parameters depend on the external barcode reader.
One LVDS level display interface/one TFT LCD backlight interface
Connects the 10.4-inch TFT LCD
One speed SPI interface with bit rate over 20Mbps
Communicates with and sends control commands to the signal processing board, and receive
its responses and sampling information simultaneously.
One standard IDE data interface/one IDE hard disk power interface
Connects the hard disk of the IDE interface. It supports 40G capacity and PIO mode. DMA
mode is not supported.
Four USB interfaces, meeting USB standard
Connected to the backboard of the analyzer enclosure from the interface board, the USB
interfaces connect the USB mouse, keyboard, barcode reader and memory (USB flash drive /
portable disk).
One 10/100Mbps network interface
Connected to the backboard of the analyzer enclosure from the interface board, the network
interface downloads program and uploads data.
One BDM interface
It is used when debugging main board for hardware examination, program downloading and
FLASH programming. It is not open to users.
One JTAG interface of the FPGA
It is used for FPGA debugging, not open to users.
One configured interface of the EPCS1
It is used for FPGA program downloading.
Interface Definition
The main board has 18 external interfaces with their number from J1-J18. Among the
interfaces, J7 is not to be used; J15 and J18 are reserved interfaces. The positions of all
interfaces on the board are portrayed as below Figure 4-4.
4-5
Hardware System
Figure 4-4 Interface layout of the main board
See Table 4-1 for the function of each interface.
Table 4-1 Interfaces on the main board
Interface Function Number of pins Description

J1 IDE interface 40 /
J2 LCD data wire interface 20 /
J3 Power interface 4 /
Interface to signal /
J4 20
processing board
Communication serial port TTL level
J5 5
2 (connects to driver board)
Communication serial port TTL level
J6 8
3 (spare)
J7 Device USB interface 5 Not to be used
Network interface to
J8 6
interface board
Communication serial port RS232 level
J9 0 (connects to barcode 6
reader)
Communication serial port RS232 level
J10 1 (connects to touch screen 8
controller)
J11 BDM interface of CPU 26 /
J12 JTAG interface of the FPGA 10 /
J13 EPCS1 configuration 10 /
4-6
Hardware System
interface
USB interface to interface /
J14 24
board
Spare communication serial RS232 level
J15 5
port
J16 LCD backlight interface 5 /
J17 IDE power interface 5 /
J18 Spare I/O interface 8 /
Definition of pins in J1 interface
J1 is a standard IDE interface; see Table 4-2 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-2 Definition of J1
PIN PIN
Definition Function Definition Function
No. No.
1 nRESET Reset 21 NA Reserved
2 GND Signal ground 22 GND Signal ground
3 DD7 Data bit 7 23 nDIOW Write signal
4 DD8 Data bit 8 24 GND Signal ground
5 DD6 Data bit 6 25 nDIOR Read signal
7 DD5 Data bit 5 27 NA Reserved
9 DD4 Data bit 4 29 NA Reserve
11 DD3 Data bit 3 31 INTRQ Interrupt request
13 DD2 Data bit 2 33 DA1 Register address 1
17 DD0 Data bit 0 37 nCS0 Chip selection 0
18 DD15 Data bit 15 38 nCS1 Chip selection 1
19 GND Signal ground 39 nDASP Sub-device effective
20 NA Reserved 40 GND Signal ground
J2 is the LVDS interface connecting to LCD, it has 20 pins. See Table 4-3 for its definition.
PIN No. Mark Function PIN No. Mark Function

1 +3.3V Power supply 11 RxIN2+ LVDS receiving
4-7
Hardware System
2 +3.3V Power supply 12 RxIN2+ channel 2

3 GND Ground 13 GND Ground
4 GND Ground 14 CKINn+
LVDS clock
5 RxIN0- LVDS 15 CKINn-
receiving
6 RxIN0+ 16 GND Ground
channel 0
8 RxIN1+ LVDS 18 NC No contact
receiving
9 RxIN1- 19 NC No contact
channel 1
10 GND Ground 20 NC No contact
J3 interface is the power input port of the entire main board. It provides +5V and +12V power
supply, see Table 4-4 for its pin distribution.
PIN No. Mark Function

1 VCC +5V power supply
2 P12V0 +12V power supply
GND Reference ground of +5V
3
power supply
PGND Reference ground of +12V
4
power supply
J4 interface is the external communication interface connecting the signal processing board.
See Table 4-5 for its definition.
PIN
PIN No. Definition Function No. Definition Function
1 SPIOUT Data wire 11 DSCK Clock
Reference Reference
2 GND ground 12 GND ground
Configuration
3 SPISCK Clock 13 CONF_DONE completes
4 SPIIN Data wire 14 NA Reserved
SPI chip
5 SPICS0 selection 0 15 nCONFIG Configuration
Reference
6 GND ground 16 nCE Enable
4-8
Hardware System
7 NA Reserved 17 DATA0 Data

Chip
8 NA Reserved 18 nCS0 selection
Configure to
9 CONFIG_ENA enable 19 ADS0 Data
Reference
10 NA Reserved 20 GND ground
J5 interface is the COM port 2 external interface connecting the driver board. See Table 4-6 for
definition of its pins.
Signal wire Definition Function I/O relation

1 TXD2 Sending data wire OUT
2 RXD2 Receiving data wire IN
3 GND Reference ground
4 ISP_PSEN Selection wire OUT
5 ISP_RST Reset wire OUT
J6 interface is reserved temporarily. See Table 4-7 for the definition of its pins.
PIN No. Definition Function I/O relation

Reference
1 GND ground
12V power OUT
2 12P0 supply
+5V power OUT
3 +5V0 supply
Sending data OUT
4 TXD3 wire
Reference
5 GND ground
Receiving data IN
6 RXD3 wire
Reference
7 GND ground
Reference
8 GND ground
4-9
Hardware System
J7 interface in not used in practice.
J8 interface the external network interface that is connected to the interface board. See Table
4-8 for its definition.
Serial No. Definition Function I/O relation

Positive end of OUT
1 ET_TP+
sending
Negative end of OUT
2 ET_TP-
sending
Positive end of IN
3 ET_RP+
receiving
Negative end of IN
4 ET_RP-
receiving
Virtual earth of
5 ET-NGR
receiving
6 PWFBOUT USB power supply OUT
J9 interface is the COM port 0 external interface connecting the barcode reader. See Table 4-9
for definition of its pins.
Pin Definition Function Pin Definition Function

Sending data Request
1 TXD2 wire 4 RTS transmission
Receiving Reference
2 RXD2 data wire 5 GND ground
Cancel
3 CTS transmission 6 +5V0 Power supply
J10 interface is the COM port 1 external interface connecting the touchscreen controller. See
Table 4-10 for definition of its pins.
4-10
Hardware System
PIN No. Definition Function I/O relation

Sending data OUT
1 TXD4 wire
Receiving data IN
2 RXD4 wire
Cancel IN
3 CTS transmission
Request OUT
4 RTS transmission
Reference
5 GND ground
6 +5V0 Power supply OUT
7 NA Reserved /
8 NA Reserved /
J11 interface is the BDM interface of CPU; it is not open to customers.
J12 interface is the JTAG interface of the FPGA; it is not open to customers.
J11 interface is the configured interface of the EPCS1; it is not open to customers.
J14 interface is the USB interface connecting the interface board. See Table4-11 for the
distribution of its pins.
Table4-11 Definition of J14
PIN PIN
Definition Function Definition Function
No. No.
NA Reserved GND Reference
13
1 ground
14
2 ground
15
3 ground
NA Reserved DP2 Data positive
16
4 (port 2)
DM4 Data negative GND Reference
17
5 (port 4) ground
4-11
Hardware System
GND Reference DM2 Data negative

18
6 ground (port 2)
DP4 Data positive GND Reference
19
7 (port 4) ground
VBUS3 Port 3 input VBUS2 Port 2 input
20
8 power supply power supply
VBUS4 Port 4 input VBUS1 Port 1 input
21
9 power supply power supply
DP3 Data positive GND Reference
22
10 (port 3) ground
GND Reference DM1 Data negative
11 23
ground (port 1)
DM3 Data negative DP1 Data positive
12 24
(port 3) (port 1)
J15 interface is a spare serial port; it is not to be used temporarily.
J16 interface is LCD backlight interface. See Table 4-12 for the distribution of its pins.
PIN No. Definition Function

1 12V +12V power supply
PGNA Reference ground of +12V
2
power supply
3 ENABLE LCD backlight enabling signal
4 VBRT LCD brightness control signal
5 NA Reserved
J17 is the power interface of IDE device. See Table 4-13 for the distribution of its pin.
PIN No. Definition Function

1 +12P0 +12V power supply
Reference ground of
2 Ground
+12V power supply
Reference ground of
3 Ground
+5V power supply
4 +5V0 +5V power supply
4-12
Hardware System
J18 is the external spare I/O interface; it is not to be used temporarily.
Assembly drawing
See Figure 4-5 for the assembly drawing of the main board.
Figure 4-5 Assembly drawing of the main board
4-13
Hardware System
4.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points

LED Function Definition
Table 4-14 Function definition of main board LED
Indicator Function
D2 Reserved temporarily.
D3 +5V power indicator, lights up when power is on
D4 IDE device effectiveness indicator, lights up when the device
is in effect.
D7 Network full duplex communication indicator, lights up when
it is in effect.
D8 Network Collision indicator, lights up when it is in effect.
D9 Activating 100M network communication indicator, lights up
when it is in effect.
D10 Network connection indicator, lights up when it is in effect.
D11 Activating 10M network communication indicator, lights up
when it is in effect.
D12 Power indicator of the second USB port, lights up when
power is on.
D13 Power indicator of the fourth USB port, lights up when power
is on.
D14 Power indicator of the third USB port, lights up when power
is on.
D15 Power indicator of the first USB port, lights up when power is
on.
D16 Reserved for software use.
D17 Reserved for now.
D19 Reserved for now.
D20 FPGA configuration completion indicator, lights up when
configuration completes.
Function Definition of Test Points

Table 4-15 Test point functions
Test Point Tested Signal Function

TP1 DDR_VREF DDR SRAM reference voltage
TP2 DDR_VTT DDR SRAM termination voltage.
TP3 VDD +3.3V power supply voltage.
TP4 VCC +5.0V power supply voltage.
4-14
Hardware System
TP5 VCCINT FPGA kernel operating voltage

TP6 IRQ2 Interrupt signal 2.
TP8 F_PLLVDD FPGA phase-lock loop voltage
TP9 2V5 +2.5V power supply voltage.
TP10 MCF_BWE1 BYTE selection signal 1.
TP12 FB_CS0 FlexBus chip selection signal 0.
TP13 MCF_TA Transmit response signal.
TP14 MCF_OE Output enabling signal.
TP16 ISP1561_CLK Input clock of the ISP1561
TP21 Not to be used /
TP22 MCF_TS Address latching signal.
TP23 CLKIN CPU input clock.
TP24 CPURSTI CPU reset signal
TP25 / ISP1561 interrupt signal 1.
TP26 / ISP1561 interrupt signal 12.
TP27 / ISP1561 signal SM1.
TP28 / ISP1561 signal A20OUT.
TP29 / ISP1561 signal PME.
TP30 MCF_RW FlexBus read and write signal.
TP32 LCD_CLK Input clock in FPGA for LCD.
TP33 FPGA_CLK Input clock for FPGA operation
TP35 L_CLK SN75LVDS83 input clock.
TP36 PGND Reference ground of +12V voltage.
S_WE Write enabling input signal of display
TP37
memory.
S_CKE Clock enabling input signal of display
TP38
memory.
S_OE Output enabling signal of display
TP39
memory.
S_CE Display memory chip selection signal
TP40
1.
TP41 S_CLK Display memory input clock.
TP42 S_BWA BYTE input signal.
TP43 GND Signal ground.
4-15
Hardware System

Key Definition
Table 4-16 Key Definition
Mark Function
S1 System manual reset
4.1.4 Replacement and Connection

Purpose
The main board is a critical part in the whole device. When board failure occurs due to various
reasons, the board needs to be replaced and repaired in time to ensure the normal operation
of the device. Please replace the main board according to below procedure.
Tool
107 cross-headed screwdriver
Disassembling
Disassembling and mounting main board is quite easy. After taking off the wires connected to it,
its front look is shown as Figure 4-4. See Figure 4-6 for disassembling and mounting of main
board.
z Please make sure power is off and the power cord is disconnected when
mounting and disassembling boards.
z Please also wear antistatic gloves when repairing and disassembling

boards.
4-16
Hardware System
Figure 4-6 Main board disassembling and mounting-2
1---Main board shielding cover 3---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6

(with lock washer)
2---Main board, signal processing 4---Main board
board support stand
Installation
Installation is the opposite operation of disassembling.
Verification
1 After powering on the device, D3 and D20 turn on;
2 After system initialization, indicator D12, D13, D14 and D15 turn on;
4-17
Hardware System
3 The display screen displays normally;

4 The mouse in the touch screen can be operated normally.
4.1.5 Troubleshooting
Table 4-17 below lists all common errors of the main board and their resolving methods from
hardware perspective. Software errors are excluded. But a lot of errors need to be checked
with software. Errors caused by CPU damage are not listed in Table 4-17.
Table 4-17 Main board error analysis and processing
Serial
Phenomenon Error analysis and processing
No.
1 Possible causes of the error: input power failure,
including power cords not well-connected,
3.3V/2.5V/1.5V/1.25V power supply voltage
abnormity, etc.; FLASH chip failure, operation system
cannot be imported into DDR SDRAM where it
operates; DDR SDRAM chip failure, the operation
system cannot run normally; system main clock
(CLKIN) abnormity.
2 Recommended action: press reset button to restart
the system, see whether the same error still exists;
1 System cannot start up check to see whether the power indicator D3 is on, or
measure input voltage with a multimeter to see
whether the input voltage is within normal range;
check whether the fuse F1 and F2 are burnt out;
Check whether the voltages of 3.3V/2.5V/1.5V/1.25V
power supply are within their normal operating range
with a multimeter; check whether the main clock
works normally with an oscilloscope; examine FLASH
or DDR with test software (Note: When testing
FLASH, the programs in it will be wiped off. Use this
method with extreme care.
1 Possible causes of the error: 12V power supply
does not supply power normally; the inverter is not
well connected; the enabling signal of pin 3 in J16
interface is low level (backlight on when the signal is
2 Blank screen
high level); FPGA does not return to original position
(system cannot start up); inverter failure, etc.
2 Recommended action: check with a multimeter and
oscilloscope.
1 Possible causes of the error: data wire is not well
Screen blur and color
3 connected; crystal oscillator X1/X6 does not work
cast
normally; FPAG configuration failure (indicator D20 is
4-18
Hardware System
off); FPGA failure; chip U9 and U4 fail.

2 Recommended action: observe or check with a
multimeter or oscilloscope.
1 Possible causes for the error: poor contact;
conversion chip U16/U17/U18 failure; UART of the
Abnormal UART
4 CPU fails.
communication
2 Recommended action: observe or check with an
oscilloscope.
1 Possible causes of the error: interface board failure;
input clock (TP16ISP1561_CLK) abnormity; Clock
X5 (12MHZ) abnormity; U24/U25 failure.
2 Recommended action: when solving the error,
USB device cannot be
5 please be observant. If short circuit occurs in the
recognized
interface board or over current happens due to other
reasons, indicators D12/D13/D14/D15 will turn off;
under other conditions, an oscilloscope can be used
for examination.
Possible causes of the error and the recommended
The clock does not action: If the clock does not display normally or
display normally, or accurately, check whether the RTC clock X3 is
6 2005-1-1 is displayed working normally or replace U22 and then perform
when the analyzer starts checking; If 2005-1-1 is displayed when starting up,
up check to see whether the batteries are in good contact
or are running down.
1 Possible causes of the error: the connection cords
are not well connected; the drive chip U34 fails; the
SPI module of the CPU fails.
SPI communication
7 2 Recommended action: there are a few components
failure
in SPI communication unit, so connections cords and
the drive chip U34 need to be check for abnormity
when error occurs.
1 Data wires or power cords are not connected or in
poor contact; error occurs to FPGA chip (configuration
fails, or the chip itself fails);
2 Recommended action: observe or check with a
IDE device does not multimeter to see whether the wires are in good
8
operate normally contact; see if D20 is on to judge whether the FPGA
configuration is successful; If the results are
error-free, that is to say FPGA has been reset; if
FPGA or the drive chip are suspected to be in trouble,
replace the related chip and then perform checking.
1 Possible causes of the error: connection wires are
Abnormal network
9 not well connected; the interface board fails; crystal
communication
oscillator X2 does not work normally; network chip
4-19
Hardware System
U21 fails;
2 Recommended action: check whether the wires are
well connected and the interface board works
normally; check whether clock X2 is functioning with
an oscilloscope; examine network chip
U21(RTL8201);
Note: Generally errors occur in the network unit need
to be tested with software.
4-20
Hardware System
4.2 Signal Processing Board

4.2.1 Introduction
The signal processing board of BC-5800 auto hematology analyzer drives the sensors,
amplifies/filters/adjusts the primary signals of sensors and converts them into digital signal
pulses, which are then identified and stored. Moreover, this board monitors the operating
voltage, aperture voltage and WBC blank voltage (for detecting lamp installation and
cleanliness of the flow cell), and controls aperture zapping, consistent current source of
aperture electrode, drive current of HGB LED, digital pot, etc.
Section 4.2 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the signal
processing board.

The signal processing board consists of the analog and digital parts. The analog part includes
the power supply, WBC/RBC/HGB signal channels and power monitoring channel. The digital
part deals with FPGA and its interface connection, and pulse signal identification.
Function
Amplifying and collecting (LAS,MAS) WBC signals
Amplifying and collecting RBC/PLT signals
Detecting and collecting HGB signal
Identifying Pulse signal
Storing cell information
Controlling each analog channel and configuring signal amplification
Communicating with SPI
Monitoring voltage (operating voltage, WBC/HGB blank voltage and RBC aperture
voltage)
Zapping the aperture
See below Figure 4-7 for the block diagram of the signal processing board:
4-21
Hardware System
Figure 4-7 Block diagram of the signal processing board
Description
Amplifying and collecting (LAS,MAS) WBC signals
The signal processing board first eliminates DC components from the WBC signals coming
from the pre-amplification board, and then amplifies, filters, buffers the signals, which are then
converted to digital signals, and sent to the FPGA for pulse identification.
Amplifying and collecting RBC/PLT signals
The signal processing board amplifies (low noise, 2nd level and gain), buffers and A/D
converts the RBC signals, and then input the digital signals to FPGA for pulse identification.
Detecting and collecting HGB signal
The signal processing board converts the current signals of the HGB reaction bath to voltage
signals, then amplifies and converts the voltage signals to digital signals, which are then input
to the FPGA for inquiry of the main board.
Identifying pulse signals and storing cell information
While converting analog signals to digital signals, the FPGA identifies pulse signals and stores
the identified cell signal peaks in the SRAM.
Controlling each analog channel and configuring signal amplification
Through the I/O interface of FPGA, the signal processing board controls several switches
(including consistent current source switch, zapping voltage switch, consistent current
source/zapping switch and HGB LED switch) and the volumetric board, and configures the
4-22
Hardware System
amplification of the WBC/RBC/PLT/HGB channels as required.
Communicating with SPI
Through the SPI interface, the main board can control the signal processing board and
sampling, set/search for parameters, read data, etc.
Monitoring voltage
The signal processing board monitors the operating voltage, WBC/HGB blank voltage and
RBC aperture voltage through the shared A/D with the HGB board.
Zapping the aperture
When the analyzer runs for a specific period of time or the RBC bath is blocked by foreign
matters, the signal processing board can zap the aperture, removing the dirty and foreign
matters.
There are 8 interfaces on the signal processing board, which are LAS, MAS, RBC/PLT, HGB,
POWER, JTAG, VMB and MCB, as shown in Figure 4-8.
4-23
Hardware System
Figure 4-8 Interface layout of the signal processing board
Table 4-18 Interfaces on the signal processing board

Powers the lower pre-amplification board /
J1 5
and introduces its signals
Powers the upper pre-amplification /
J2 5
board and introduces its signals
Drives LEDs with constant current and /
J3 4
introduces the light intensity signals
4-24
Hardware System
Drives the aperture with constant current /

J4 and introduces the RBC/PLT pulse 3
signals
For SPI communication and FPGA /
J5 20
downloading
Introduces the 5V and 12V power /
J6 6
supplies
J7 Not open to users 10 /
Powers the volumetric board and /
J8 6
introduces its signals
J9 Not open to users 40 /
J1 is a LAS signal interface; see Table 4-19 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-19 LAS signal interface definition
Pin No. Name Description Signal Type

1 P12V +12V analog power supply +12V
2 AGND-W WBC analog ground /
4 LAS LAS signal ANALOG
J2 is a MAS signal interface; see Table 4-20 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-20MAS signal interface definition

1 P12V +12V power supply +12V
4 MAS MAS signal ANALOG
J3 is a HGB signal interface; see Table 4-21 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
4-25
Hardware System
Table 4-21 HGB signal interface definition

1 HGB+ Positive end of HGB-LED ANALOG
2 HGB- Negative end of HGB-LED ANALOG
3 HGBIN HGB signal input ANALOG
4 AGND Analog ground/shielding /
ground
J4 is a RBC/PLT signal interface; see Table 4-22 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-22 RBC/PLT signal interface definition

1 SHELL Shielding ground /
2 RBC RBC/PLT signals ANALOG
3 AGND-R RBC analog ground /
J5 is an interface to the main board; see Table 4-23 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-23 Main board signal interface definition

1 SDI SPI data input LVTTL
2 GND Digital ground /
3 SCK SPI clock LVTTL
4 SDO SPI data output LVTTL
5 nCS SPI chip selection LVTTL
7 N.C. Null /
8 N.C. Null /
9 nPRG Program enabling /
10 N.C. Null /
11 DCLK Clock LVTTL
13 DONE Configuration completes LVTTL
14 VDD +3.3V digital power supply +3.3V
15 nCONFIG Start configuration LVTTL
16 nCE FPGA enabling LVTTL
17 DATA Configuration data output LVTTL
18 nCSO Configuration chip LVTTL
selection
19 ASDI Configuration data input LVTTL
4-26
Hardware System
J6 is a power interface; see Table 4-24 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-24 Power interface definition

1 5A0 +5V power input +5V
4 AGND Analog ground /
J7 is a JTAG debugging interface; see Table 4-25 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-25 JTAG debugging interface definition

1 TCK Clock LVTTL
3 TDO Data output LVTTL
5 TMS Mode selection LVTTL
7 N.C. Null /
8 N.C. Null /
9 TDI Data input LVTTL
J8 is an interface to the volumetric board; see Table 4-26 for the distribution and definition of its
pins.
Table 4-26 Volumetric board interface definition

1 P12V +12V analog power supply +12V
3 RES1 Reserved
4 nSTART Start counting LVTTL
5 nSTOP Stop counting LVTTL
6 nVMBLED Optical coupler control LVTTL
4-27
Hardware System
Assembly Drawing
See Figure 4-9 for the assembly drawing of the signal processing board.
Figure 4-9 Assembly of the signal processing board
4-28
Hardware System

All the adjustable parameters of the board can be adjusted by the main board. You can set
parameters in the software screen of the main board id necessary.

Table 4-27 LED function definition of the signal processing board
Indicator Function
D11 3.3V power supply indicator
D14 5V power supply indicator
D15 12V power supply indicator
D22 FPGA configuration completion indicator
D23 Communication status indicator
D24 WBC sampling control indicator
D25 RBC sampling control indicator
Function Definition of Test Points
Table 4-28 Test point definition
Test Description Test Point Description

Point
TP1 Low A/D reference voltage of the TP26 VDD 3.3V
LAS channel
TP2 High A/D reference voltage of TP27 VDDC 1.2V
the MAS channel
TP3 Crystal oscillator X1 clock output TP28 +12V
TP4 High A/D reference voltage of TP29 3.3V detection (through voltage
the LAS channel grading)
TP5 AGND TP30 +5V detection (through voltage
grading)
TP6 AGND TP31 +12V detection (through voltage
grading)
TP7 SRAM read/write clock TP32 +55V detection (through voltage
grading)
TP8 WBC sampling clock TP33 -5V detection (through voltage
grading)
TP9 Low A/D reference voltage of the TP34 Voltage of the HGB channel
MAS channel after I/V
TP10 A/D reference voltage of the TP35 Output of amplified HGB voltage
HGB channel
TP11 A/D sampling clock of the HGB TP36 HGB lamp switch control
channel
4-29
Hardware System
TP12 +99V TP37 A/D reference voltage of the

RBC channel
TP13 Zapping voltage TP38 A/D sampling clock of the RBC
channel
TP 14 Zapping control TP39 SRAM read/write signal
TP 15 RBC signals amplified for 1st TP40 Analog RBC signals input
level
TP 16 RBC signals amplified for 2nd TP41 LAS signals amplified
level
TP 17 RBC signals amplified for 3rd TP42 MAS signals amplified
level
TP 19 RBC signals filtered TP43 LAS signals output from the
pre-amplification board
TP 19 Aperture voltage TP44 MAS signals output from the
TP 20 Consistent current source TP45 Chip selection signals of the SPI
control signals communication interface
TP 21 Consistent current TP46 A/D signal input to MAS
source/zapping switch control
signals
TP 22 +55V TP47 Clock signals of the SPI
communication interface
TP 23 RBC signals buffered TP48 A/D signal input to LAS
TP 24 +5V TP49 LAS background voltage
(amplified)
TP 25 -5V / /
Note: see Figure 4-9 Assembly of the signal processing board for the position of each test
point.
Purpose
The signal processing board is a critical part in the whole device. When board failure occurs
due to various reasons, the board needs to be replaced and repaired in time to ensure the
normal operation of the device. Please replace the signal processing board according to below
procedure.
Tool
Pliers (spare)
4-30
Hardware System
Removal
To avoid damaging the board and other parts, follow this procedure to remove it:
1. Power off the analyzer and ensure power connection of all boards are off
2. Disconnect the cable from the J6 socket as per Figure 4-8 Interface layout of the
signal processing board
3. Remove the upper shielding cover using the screwdriver as per Figure 4-12
Removing the signal processing board-2
4. Unplug cables successively from the J8, J5, J2, J1, J3 and J4 sockets as per Figure
4-8
5. Loosen the 6 screws on the board using the screwdriver as per Figure 4-11 (remove
the lower shielding cover only when necessary)
6. Remove the signal processing board
z Please wear antistatic gloves when repairing and removing boards.
mounting and removing boards.
Installation
Follow this procedure strictly to install the signal processing board to the analyzer:
1. Install the lower shielding cover to the signal processing board as per Figure 4-10.
2. Fix the board to the analyzer using screws as per Figure 4-11.
3. Fix the upper shielding cover to the signal processing board as per Figure 4-12.
4. Connect other plugs/sockets to the signal processing board as per Figure 4-8.
Note: Before fixing the upper shielding cover, connect the RBC signal cable to the RBC socket
(J4).
Verification
After installation, power on the analyzer and check the signal processing board to see whether
the power indicator illuminates and the status indicator flashes normally. If yes, the verification
is passed (see Table 4-27).
4-31
Hardware System
Figure 4-10 Removing the lower shielding cover from the signal processing board
1---Cross-recessed panhead screw 3---Lower shielding cover

M3x6
2---Signal processing board
4-32
Hardware System
Figure 4-11 Removing the signal processing board-1
1---Main board, signal processing 3---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6

board support stand
2---Signal processing board
4-33
Hardware System
Figure 4-12 Removing the signal processing board-2
1---M3X8 mounting screw 3---Signal processing board

2---Main board shielding cover 4---Upper shielding cover of signal processing
board
5---Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3x6
Error Message Judging Criteria Cause and Solution
Measured value exceeds The 3.3v circuit is not jointed properly / The
3.3v power
the normal range earth impedance decreases / The power IC
supply failure
(3.2v-3.4v) and related A/D converter go wrong.
Measured value exceeds The +5v circuit is not jointed properly / The
+5v power
supply failure
(4.85-5.25v) and related A/D converter go wrong.
Measured value exceeds The -5v circuit is not jointed properly / The
-5v power
supply failure
(-4.85-5.25v) and related A/D converter go wrong.
+12v power Measured value exceeds The +12v circuit is not jointed properly / The
supply failure the normal range earth impedance decreases / The power IC
4-34
Hardware System
(11.4-12.6v) and related A/D converter go wrong.

The +55v circuit is not jointed properly / The
+55v power Measured value exceeds
earth impedance decreases / The power IC
supply failure the normal range (50-60v)
and related A/D converter go wrong.
Measured value exceeds NCONST signal is abnormal / The 55v
Aperture the normal range (10v-14v) voltage-regulator diode goes wrong / The relay
voltage (may need to be modified switch is wrongly switched on/off / The
abnormity according to the actual aperture is blocked / The related A/D converter
condition) goes wrong
The HGB LED or related A/D converter goes
HGB blank Measured value exceeds
wrong
voltage the normal range
Adjust the HGB gain and replace the A/D
abnormity (2.0v-2.4v)
converter.
The related A/D goes wrong. The flow cell is
LAS blank Measured value exceeds
dirty
voltage the normal range
Replace the A/D converter and clean the flow
abnormity (0-400mv)
cell
Volumetric Start/Stop signal delay Bubbles appear in the metering tube or the
board exceeds the normal range volumetric board goes wrong. Unclog the RBC
abnormity (9-11s) aperture and clean the fluidic system.
The main board receives
FIFO data void the special frame Send restart command to communicate again
"011111111110"
The main board receives
Communication The circuit or the signal processing board goes
the frame of check failure
error wrong.
(not "011111111110")
4-35
Hardware System
4.3 Driver Board

4.3.1 Introduction
The driver board of the BC-5800 controls/drives the power parts and monitors the system
status.
Section 4.3 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the driver board.

Function
Serial communication
Driving step motors
Controlling DC motors
Driving valves and pumps
Controlling temperature
Controlling the built-in scanner
Controlling the pneumatic unit, electromagnet, laser, buzzer and indicators
Monitoring system status parameters
Monitoring reagent status
See Figure 4-13 for the block diagram of the driver board:
Figure 4-13 Block diagram of the driver board
4-36
Hardware System
Description
Serial communication
The driver board consists of 6 MCUs (as shown in Figure 4-13) which include the mid
control unit (main MCU in Figure 4-13), sample transport unit, mix & pierce unit,
syringe unit, temperature control unit and other units.
The driver board communicates with the main board (UART) through the mid control
unit, receiving control instructions from and sending response instructions to the
main board. Its communication parameters are:
Baud rate: 38400bps
Start bit: 1bit
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
The mid control unit communicates with other 5 MCUs through the extended serial
ports of FPGA (EP1C3T144C8), sending control instructions to and receiving
response instructions from other MCUs. Its communication parameters are:
Start bit: 1bit
Baud rate: 19200bps
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
Driving step motors
The driver board drives the following 6 step motors:

Mix motor
Wipe block motor
Autoloader loading motor
Autoloader feeding motor (also acting as the unloading motor)
Whole blood aspiration motor
Sample injection motor
The step motors are driven by bipolar consistent current and are monitored by corresponding
position sensors.
Controlling DC motors
The driver board has 2 DC motor circuits to control the mixing in the DIFF and BASO baths.
The MCU sends control signals to the MCU on the sample testing board, which then controls
the DC motor drive chip to start/stop the motors. The photocoupler detects the pulse signals of
motor speed and sends it to the MCU of the drive board through sample testing board. The
MCU then calculates the rotation speed of the motors.
Driving valves and pumps
4-37
Hardware System
The driver board controls 96 pumps and valves. The mid control unit sends the control signals
of SV1-SV88 to the pump/valve buffer of FPGA. As the data in the valve/pump buffer changes,
the FPGA outputs the valve/pump signals to the deserialize chip 74HCT595 to control the drive
chip IRLML2502 of valves and pumps, thus realizing the opening and closing of the valves and
pumps. The control signals of SSV89-SV96 are passed to the deserialize chip 74HCT595 by
the sample transport unit, the drive circuit is the same as SV1-SV88.
Controlling temperature
The driver board controls the temperature of the 3 following parts:

Reagent preheating bath
Reaction bath
Laser diode
Comparing measured temperature with the target temperature, the MCU turns on/off the
heater via PID algorithm to control the temperature correctly.
Controlling the built-in scanner
The built-in scanner scans the barcodes of tubes and tube racks. The driver board controls the
built-in scanner via FPGA. FPGA communicates with the scanners (UART) via the extended
serial port.
Controlling the pneumatic unit, laser, buzzer and indicators
The pneumatic unit provides air force for the main unit and is driven by the pneumatic control
board. The driver board sends only the control signals of relay, which are converted and sent
to the pneumatic control board through the interface board
Lamp control circuit controls the laser on/off, monitors the feedback voltage and adjusts the
digital pot of the laser control board. The laser on/off signals are converted and sent to the
laser control board. The feedback voltage signals are amplifies and passed to the driver board,
which converts the signals to digital signals and then sent them to the MCU for calculation. The
driver board communicates with the laser control board via the SPI interface to control its
digital pot. The driver board sends data to the laser control board without getting response
from it.
The control signals of buzzer and indicators coming from the FPGA are converted and sent to
the indicator board to control the buzzer and indicators.
Monitoring system status parameters
The driver board detects system temperature, pressure and voltage; the main board sends
inquiry command to obtain corresponding system status parameters.
Temperature detection refers to the detection of ambient temperature and laser diode
temperature. The sensors of ambient temperature and laser diode temperature are mounted
on the interface board and laser control board respectively. The temperature signals coming
from the sensors are sent to the A/D converter after I/V conversion and amplification. The
digital signals are then passed to the MCU, which calculates the temperature value based on
the signals.
The pressure sensor is mounted on the pressure detection board. 5 pressure circuits measure
the pressure of the vacuum chamber (2 channels), pressure chamber (2 channels) and sheath
fluid (1 channel) respectively. The pressure signals coming from the pressure sensors are
4-38
Hardware System
converted to digital signals, which are then passed to the MCU.

The voltage circuit controls all power supplies (24V, 12V, 5V and 3.3V) on the driver board.
Monitoring reagent status
The driver board monitors the reagent status through the passive float switch with 15
monitoring channels.
There are 36 interfaces on the driver board. See Figure 4-14 for their respective positions.
Figure 4-14 Interface layout of the driver board
Table 4-29 Interfaces on the driver board

Used when
FPGA
parameters
FPGA configuration
J1 10 are
interface (AS mode)
downloaded
for the first
time
Connected to the power /
J2 4
board
J3 Connected to the main /
4-39
Hardware System
board
J4-J8 34 /
Connected to valves
J15,J47 20 /
Communication debugging
J12 4
interface Disabled
J14 5VDCoutput interface 2
Connected to the indicator /
J10 6
board
Connected to sample /
J11 8
transport motors
Connected to sample /
J13 20
transport sensors
Connected to sample mix /
J17 4
motors
Connected to wipe block /
J18 4
motors
Pressure detection /
J19 8
interface
Connected to mix & pierce /
J20 24
sensors
Connected to syringes, mix /
J21 20
motors and SRV sensors
Connected to the whole /
J22 4
blood aspiration motor
Connected to the WBC /
J24 4
injection syringe motor
Connected to sensors /
detecting the front door,
J27 12
open vial sampling and
wipe blocks
Connected to the /
J28 4
pneumatic control board
Connected to sensors /
J29 detecting the reagent and 20
laser box status
J30 Laser control interface 12 /
Connected to the mix /
J31 4
motors
Connected to the ambient /
J32 3
temperature sensor
Connected to the laser /
J33 3
diode temperature sensor
J35 Connected to the heater of 6 /
4-40
Hardware System
the preheat bath

Connected to the heater of /
J36 6
the reaction bath
Connected to the heater of /
J37 3
the laser diode
Connected to the internal /
J38 12
reagents
Connected to the fans of /
J43 5
the main unit
J44 Power supply interface 8 /
Connected to the /
J48 2
electromagnet

J1 is the configuration interface of FPGA (AS mode). See Table 4-30 for the distribution and
definition if its pins.
Table 4-30 Definition of FPGA configuration interface
Pin Name Pin Name

1 F_DCLK 2 AGND
3 F_CONFDONE 4 VDD
5 F_CONFIG 6 F_NCE
7 F_DATA 8 F_NCSC
9 F_ASDO 10 GND
Table 4-31 Power board interface definition
Pin Name Description

1 POWER_ON Power on signal
2 POWER_OFF Power off signal
3 GND Ground
4 STANDBY Standby signal
J3 is an interface to the main board. See Table 4-32 for the distribution and definition of its
pins.
Table 4-32 Main board interface definition

1 PC_RXD Signals received
2 PC_TXD Signals sent
4-41
Hardware System
3 GND GND
PSEN signals of the mid
4 PC_PSEN
control unit
Reset signals of the mid
5 PC_RESET
control unit
Definition of pins in J4, J5, J6, J7, J8 and J47
J4, J5, J6, J7, J8 and J47 are interfaces to pumps and valves. See Table 4-33-Table 4-38 for
the distribution and definition of its pins
Table 4-33 Definition of pump and valve interface - J4
Pin Name Description Pin Name Description

1 NC No contact 2 NC No contact
3 4 SV01 Valve1
5 6 SV02 Valve2
7 8 SV03 Valve3
9 10 SV04 Valve4
11 12 SV05 Valve5
13 14 SV06 Valve6
15 16 SV07 Valve7
17 18 SV08 Valve8
12V 12V power supply
19 20 SV09 Valve9
21 22 SV10 Valve10
23 24 SV11 Valve11
25 26 SV12 Valve12
27 28 SV13 Valve13
29 30 SV14 Valve14
31 32 SV15 Valve15
33 34 SV16 Valve16

12V power
1 12V 2 SV17 Valve17
supply
5 12V 12V power 6 SV18 Valve18
7 supply 8 SV19 Valve19
9 10 SV20 Valve20
11 12 SV21 Valve21
13 14 SV22 Valve22
15 16 SV23 Valve23
17 18 SV24 Valve24
19 20 SV25 Valve25
4-42
Hardware System
21 22 SV26 Valve26
23 24 SV27 Valve27
25 26 SV28 Valve28
27 28 SV29 Valve29
29 30 SV30 Valve30
31 32 SV31 Valve31
33 34 SV32 Valve32
1 2 SV33 Valve33
3 4 SV34 Valve34
7 8 SV35 Valve35
9 10 SV36 Valve36
11 12 SV37 Valve37
13 14 SV38 Valve38
15 16 SV39 Valve39
17 18 SV40 Valve40
19 20 SV41 Valve41
21 22 SV42 Valve42
23 24 SV43 Valve43
25 26 SV44 Valve44
27 28 SV45 Valve45
29 30 SV46 Valve46
31 32 SV47 Valve47
33 34 SV48 Valve48

1 2 SV49 Valve49
3 12V 12V power supply 4 SV50 Valve50

5 6 SV51 Valve51
11 12 SV53 Valve53
13 14 SV54 Valve54
15 16 SV55 Valve55
17 18 SV56 Valve56
4-43
Hardware System
19 20 SV57 Valve57
21 22 SV58 Valve58
23 24 SV59 Valve59
25 26 SV60 Valve60
27 28 SV61 Valve61
29 30 SV62 Valve62
31 32 SV63 Valve63
33 34 SV64 Valve64

1 2 SV65 Valve65
3 12V power 4 SV66 Valve66
12V
7 8 SV68 Valve68
11 12 SV69 Valve69
13 14 SV70 Valve70
15 16 SV71 Valve71
17 18 SV72 Valve72
19 20 SV73 Valve73
12V
25 26 SV76 Valve76
27 28 SV77 Valve77
29 30 SV78 Valve78
31 32 SV79 Valve79
33 34 SV80 Valve80

1 2 SV81 Valve81
3 4 SV82 Valve82
5 6 SV83 Valve83
12V
11 12 SV86 Valve86
13 14 SV87 Valve87
15 16 SV88 Valve88
4-44
Hardware System
J10 is an interface to the indicator board. See Table 4-39 for the distribution and definition of its
pins.
Table 4-39 Indicator board interface definition

1 VCC 5V power supply
2 GND Ground
3 POWER_ON Power on signal
4 BUZ Buzzer control signal
5 WORK_LED Indicator control signal1
6 STANDBY Indicator control signal2
J11 is the interface to the motors of sample transport unit. See Table 4-40 for the distribution
and definition of its pins.
Table 4-40 Definition of the interface to sample transport motors

B-phase winding of the autoloader
1 ASLX_BN
loading motor
BN-phase winding of the autoloader
2 ASLX_B
loading motor
A-phase winding of the autoloader
3 ASLX_AN
loading motor
AN-phase winding of the autoloader
4 ASLX_A
loading motor
BN-phase winding of the autoloader
5 ASY_BN
feeding motor
B-phase winding of the autoloader
6 ASY_B
feeding motor
AN-phase winding of the autoloader
7 ASY_AN
feeding motor
A-phase winding of the autoloader
8 ASY_A
feeding motor
J12 is used for communication debugging and is disabled on the analyzer.
4-45
Hardware System
J13 is the interface to the sensors in the sample transport unit (connecting to the sensors via
an adapter). See Table 4-41 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-41 Definition of the interface to sample transport sensors

Autoloader
YVALID_I Tube rack status
1 YLEFT_IN feeding sensor 2
N detection sensor
(left)
Autoloader
feeding Autoloader feeding
3 YRIGHT_IN 4 YRET_IN
photocoupler zero position sensor
(right)
Sensor detecting the
Reagent stop position of the
5 HAVE_IN 6 XL_E_IN
photocoupler autoloader loading
motor
Sample volume Sensor detecting the
SAMPLEQ_I detection start position of the
7 8 XL_S_IN
N sensor autoloader loading
(reserved) motor
+5V power
9 VCC 10 XUL_S_IN end of the unloader
supply
unit
+5V power
11 VCC 12 XUL_E_IN zero position of the
supply
unloader unit
Photocoupler
control terminal
13 TUBE_CTR 14 GND Ground
of tubes and
detector tubes
SCANNER_TRI Scanner trigger SCANNER_OU
15 16 Scanner output1
GGER signal T1
Signals sent by SCANNER_OU
17 SCANNER_TXD 18 Scanner output2
scanner T2
Signals
SCANNER_OU
19 SCANNER_RXD received by 20 Scanner output3
T2
scanner
4-46
Hardware System
Figure 4-15 Sensor layout of the sample transport unit
Serial No. Name Cable to be connected

1 Sensor detecting the full status of the S-FULL
unloader
2 Unloader reset sensor S-RST
3 Sensor detecting the start position of the S-YINT
autoloader feeding motor
4 Autoloader feeding sensor (left) S-LEFT
5 Fixed-type barcode scanner Sample transport board J6
6 Sensor detecting the presence of tubes S-TUBE
7 Autoloader feeding sensor (right) S-RIGHT
8 Sensor detecting the stop position of the S-XEND
autoloader loading motor
9 Sensitive switch for autoloader loading S-READY
10 Sample feeding motor M-ASY
11 Sensor detecting the start position of the S-XINT
autoloader loading motor
12 Sample loading motor M-ASLX
J14 is the output interface of 5V DC power supply and is disabled on the analyzer.
J15 is an interface connecting pumps and valves (mix & pierce unit). See Table 4-42 for the
distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-42 Definition of the interface connecting pumps and valves (mix & pierce unit)

3 4 SV90 Valve90
4-47
Hardware System
5 6 SV91 Valve91
7 8 SV92 Valve92
9 10 SV93 Valve93
11 12 SV94 Valve94
13 14 SV95 Valve95
15 16 SV96 Valve96
J17 is the interface to the motors of sample mix unit. See Table 4-43 for the distribution and
Table 4-43 Definition of the interface to sample mix motors

1 ASR_BN BN phase of the mix motor
2 ASR_B B phase of the mix motor
3 ASR_AN AN phase of the mix motor
4 ASR_A A phase of the mix motor
J18 is an interface connecting wipe block motors. See Table 4-44 for the distribution and
Table 4-44 Wipe block motor interface definition

BN phase of the wipe
1 MS_BN
block motor
B phase of the wipe block
2 MS_B
motor
AN phase of the wipe
3 MS_AN
block motor
A phase of the wipe block
4 MS_A
motor
J9 is a pressure detection interface; see Table 4-45 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-45 Pressure detection interface definition

250KPapressure detection
1 PRESSURE_1ST
signal
4-48
Hardware System
2 PRESSURE_2ST
signal
3 PRESSURE_3ST
signal
-40KPapressure detection
4 PRESSURE_4ST
signal
-85KPapressure detection
5 PRESSURE_5ST
signal
Reserved channel
6 PRESSURE_6ST
pressure detection
7 AVCC 5V analog power supply
8 AGND Analog ground
J20 is an interface connecting sensors (mix & pierce unit). See Table 4-46 for the distribution
Table 4-46 Definition of the interface connecting sensors (mix & pierce unit)

1 VCC +5V power supply 2 VCC +5V power supply
Pinch cylinder start Mix motor stop
5 SMUX_S_FS 6 ASR_E_FS
point sensor position sensor
Pinch cylinder end point Pierce position
11 SMUX_E_FS 12 PU_FS
sensor sensor
Elevation cylinder Mix motor start
17 SMUZ_UP_FS 18 ASR_S_FS
upper position sensor position sensor
Elevation cylinder lower Compartment door
23 SMUZ_D_FS 24 DR_SEN1
position sensor sensor
J21 is an interface connecting sensors (syringe unit). See

Table 4-47 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
4-49
Hardware System
Table 4-47 Definition of the interface connecting sensors (syringe unit)

Sensor detecting the Sensor detecting the
start position of start position of
5 SWB_FS 6 SWBC_SI
whole blood sample injection
aspiration syringe syringe
Sensor detecting Sensor detecting mix
11 SRV_FRONT front-end blood 12 DC_SEN1 motor speed of the
volume of SRV BASO bath
15 VCC +5V power supply 16 GND Ground
Sensor detecting mix
17 GND Ground 18 DC_SEN2 motor speed of the
DIFF bath
Sensor detecting
19 SRV_BACK back-end blood 20 VCC +5V power supply
volume of SRV
J22 is the interface to the motor of the whole blood aspiration syringe. See Table 4-48 for the
Table 4-48 Definition of the interface connecting to the whole blood aspiration motor

BN phase of the step motor of whole blood
1 SWB_BN
aspiration syringe
B phase of the step motor of whole blood
2 SWB_B
aspiration syringe
AN phase of the step motor of whole blood
3 SWB_AN
aspiration syringe
A phase of the step motor of whole blood
4 SWB_A
aspiration syringe
J24 is the interface to the motor of WBC sample injection syringe. See Table 4-49 for the
4-50
Hardware System
Table 4-49 Definition of the interface connecting the WBC sample injection syringe
motor

BN phase of the step motor of WBC sample
1 SWBC_SI_BN
injection syringe
B phase of the step motor of WBC sample
2 SWBC_SI_B
injection syringe
AN phase of the step motor of WBC sample
3 SWBC_SI_AN
injection syringe
A phase of the step motor of WBC sample
4 SWBC_SI_A
injection syringe
J27 is a sensor interface; see Table 4-50 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-50 Sensor interface definition

+5V power
1 VCC +5V power supply 2 VCC
supply
Sensor
detecting lower
5 SHELL_DOOR_FS status of the front 6 MS_D_FS
position of the
door
wipe block
Sensitive switch for
7 START_KEY manual sample 8 GND Ground
loading
J28 is the interface connecting the pneumatic control board; see Table 4-51 for the distribution
Table 4-51 Definition of pneumatic control board interface

Control signals of the
2 AIR_RELAY
pneumatic unit
3 12V0 12VDC
4 PGND Ground
4-51
Hardware System
J29 is a reagent sensor interface; see Table 4-52 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-52 Definition of reagent sensor interface

2 LIQ_SEN1 Float switch of the LEO(I) 1 GND
Ground
reagent container
4 LIQ_SEN2 LEO(II) float switch 3 GND Ground
6 LIQ_SEN3 Float switch of the WBC/BASO 5 GND
Ground
reagent container
8 LIQ_SEN4 Float switch of the diluent 7 GND
Ground
container
10 LIQ_SEN5 Float switch of the HGB lyse 9 GND
Ground
container
12 LIQ_SEN6 Float switch of the cleanser 11 GND
Ground
container
14 LIQ_SEN7 Backup float switch, with cable 13 GND
Ground
prepared
16 LIQ_SEN8 Float switch of the waste 15 GND
Ground
container
18 LIQ_SEN9 Backup float switch without 17 GND
Ground
cable
20 SEN_LASER Sensor detecting status of the 19 GND
Ground
laser box
J30 is a laser control interface. See Table 4-53 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-53 Definition of laser control interface

1 12V0 12V power supply
2 PGND Power ground
Feedback voltage of light intensity or light
3 LASER
power
4 GND Ground
5 SPI_CLK SPI communication clock signals
6 GND Ground
SPI communication signals sent by the
7 SPI_DIN
driver board to the laser control board
9 SPI_CS3 SPI communication gating signals
10 CONTROL Laser tube switch signals
11 NC No contact
4-52
Hardware System
12 NC No contact
J31 is an interface connecting DC motors. See Table 4-54 for the distribution and definition of
its pins.
Table 4-54 DC motor interface definition

1 DCM2_ON/ DIFF mix motor control signals
3 DCM1_ON/ BASO mix motor control signals
Definition of pins in J32, J33 and J34 interface
J32 and J33 are temperature sensor interfaces, see Table 4-55 and Table 4-56 for the
distribution and definition of their pins.
Table 4-55 Definition of J32- interface of the ambient temperature sensor

1 AMBINET_T_A Ambient temperature sensor
2 AVCC +5V power supply
3 GND Power supply ground
Table 4-56 Definition of J33- interface of the laser box temperature sensor

1 LD_T_A Laser diode temperature sensor
2 AVCC +5V power supply
3 GND Power supply ground
J35 is the interface connecting the heater of the preheating bath; see Table 4-57 for the
Table 4-57 Definition of the interface connecting the heater of preheating bath

1 24V0
1and4 connect the two ends of the heater
4 HT1
2 / 2and3 connect the two ends of the
3 / temperature switch
5 PRTD_REF Connecting the preheating temperature
6 PRTD_T1 sensor
4-53
Hardware System
J36 is the interface connecting the heater of the reaction bath; see Table 4-58 for the
Table 4-58 Definition of the interface connecting the heater of the reaction bath

1 24V0
4 HT2
5 PRTD_REF Connecting the temperature sensor of the
6 PRTD_T2 reaction bath.
J37 is a laser diode heater interface; see Table 4-59 for the distribution and definition of its
pins.
Table 4-59 Definition of the laser diode heater interface

1 24V0
4 HT3
5 PRTD_REF Connecting Laser diode temperature
6 PRTD_T3 sensor
J38 is the internal reagent interface. See Table 4-60 for the distribution and definition of its
pins.
Table 4-60 Internal reagent interface definition

2 LIQ_SEN10 1 GND Ground
4 LIQ_SEN11 Float switch of 3 GND
Ground
the FCM cistern
Ground
the E-Z cistern
the WC1 waste Ground
cistern
the WC2 waste Ground
cistern
4-54
Hardware System
12 LIQ_SEN15 Backup float 11 GND

switch without Ground
cable
J43 is the interface connecting fans of the main unit. See Table 4-61 for the distribution and
Table 4-61 Definition of the interface connecting fans of the main unit

1 +12V 12V power supply
2 PGND Power ground
3 NC No contact
4 +12V 12V power supply
5 PGND Power ground
Table 4-62 Power interface definition

1 5V 5V power supply 5 GND Ground
2 +12V 6 PGND Power ground
12V power supply
3 +12V 7 PGND Power ground
4 +24V 24V power supply 8 PGND Power ground
J48 is the electromagnet interface; see Table 4-63 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-63 Electromagnet interface definition

1 DR1_ON Electromagnet driving signals
Assembly Drawing
The assembly drawing of the driver board is shown in Figure 4-16.
4-55
Hardware System
Figure 4-16 Assembly drawing of the driver board
4-56
Hardware System

Table 4-64 LED function definition of the driver board
Indicator Description
D1 FPGA configuration status indicator, illuminates during FPGA configuration
D2 Mid control unit status indicator, flashes every 0.5s when the unit runs
normally
D3 Sample transport unit status indicator, flashes every 0.5s when the unit runs
normally
D12 FPGA status indicator, flashes every 0.5s when the FPGA runs normally
D13 Syringe unit status indicator, flashes every 0.5s when the unit runs normally
D14 Other units status indicator, flashes every 0.5s when the units runs normally
D16 Temperature control unit status indicator, flashes every 0.5s when the unit
runs normally
D17 5V analog power supply indicator, illuminates when the power supply is
normal.
D21 Indicates the working status of the preheating heater. It turns on during
heating, turns off when heating is stopped, and flashes during temperature
tuning.
D22 Indicates the working status of the reaction bath heater. It turns on during
heating, turns off when heating is stopped, and flashes during temperature
tuning.
D23 Indicates the working status of the laser diode heater.
D24 5V digital power supply indicator, illuminates when the power supply is
normal;
D25 12V power supply indicator, illuminates when the power supply is normal
D26 3.3V power supply indicator, illuminates when the power supply is normal
D27 24V power supply indicator, illuminates when the power supply is normal
Test point definition

Table 4-65 Test point definition of the driver board
Serial Name Pin Description

No.
1 TP1 PIN3 of X1 Clock output signals of the 16M crystal oscillator,
system clock
2 TP2 PIN1 of U76 Amplified voltage signals converted (I/V) from the
ambient temperature signals
4-57
Hardware System
laser diode temperature signals

laser diode temperature signals
5 TP5 PIN2 of U78 A/D reference voltage of temperature, pressure,
voltage and laser feedback voltage. The normal
reference voltage is 2.5V.
6 TP6 PIN2 of PS2 Signals (voltage) output by the 160KPa pressure
sensor
sensor
sensor
9 TP9 PIN2 of PS4 Signals (voltage) output by the -40KPa pressure
sensor
10 TP10 PIN2 of PS5 Signals (voltage) output by the -85KPa pressure
sensor
11 TP11 PIN2 of PS6 Signals (voltage) output by the reserved pressure
sensor (full range is 200KPa)
12 TP12 PIN7 of U77 Feedback signals (voltage) of laser intensity
13 TP13 PIN7 of 79 VCC(+5VDC) signals (30.15V) after grading
14 TP14 SIO_LATCH Data latch signals coming from the valve control
chip of the mid control unit
15 TP15 PIN7 of U80 24V0(+24VDC) voltage signals (30.15V) after
grading
16 TP16 PIN1 of U80 12V0(+12VDC) voltage signals (30.15V) after
grading
17 TP17 PIN1 of U79 AVCC(+5VDC) voltage signals (30.15V) after
grading
18 TP18 PIN1 of U31 Power signals (50.25V) of AVCC(+5VDC)
19 TP19 PIN3 of X2 Clock of 10M crystal oscillator
20 TP20 PIN2 of U31 Analog ground
21 TP21 GND Digital ground
22 TP22 VDD +3.3VDC voltage (3.30.15V0.15V)
23 TP23 1V5 +1.5VDC voltage (1.50.075V)
24 TP24 VCC +5VDC voltage (50.25V)
25 TP25 24V0 +24VDC voltage (241.2V)
26 TP26 12V0 +12VDC voltage (241.2V)
27 TP27 PGND Power ground
30 Enabling signals coming from the valve control
TP30 SIO_EN
31 TP31 SIO_IN Data input signals coming from the valve control
4-58
Hardware System
32 Clock signals coming from the valve control chip

TP32 SIO_CLK
of the mid control unit
33 Data input signals coming from the valve control
TP33 S_IN
chip of the mix & pierce unit
34 Clock signals coming from the valve control chip
TP34 T
of the mix & pierce control unit
35 Data latch signals coming from the valve control
TP35 LATCH
chip of the mix & pierce unit
36 Enabling signals coming from the valve control
TP36 EN
chip of the mix & pierce control unit
Basic voltage of the temperature collection
37 TP37 PRTD_REF
amplifier of the temperature control unit
38 Reference voltage of the temperature collection
TP38 AINN
39 Signals output from the temperature collection
TP39 AINP
40 TP40 ASR_REF Reference voltage of the mix motor control unit
41 Reference voltage of the wipe block motor control
TP41 MS_REF
unit
42 Reference voltage of the whole blood injection
TP42 SWB_REF
motor control unit
43 Reference voltage of the sample injection syringe
TP43 SWBC_REF
motor control unit
44 Reference voltage of the autoloader feeding
TP44 ASY_REF
motor control unit
45 Reference voltage of the autoloader loading
TP45 ASLX_REF
motor control unit
46 TP46 ASR_VCC Power supply voltage of the mix motor control unit
47 TP47 ASR_PGND Ground voltage of the mix motor control unit
48 Power supply voltage of the wipe block motor
TP48 MS_VCC
control unit
49 Ground voltage of the wipe block motor control
TP49 MS_PGND
unit
50 Power supply voltage of the whole blood injection
TP50 SWB_VCC
motor control unit
51 Ground voltage of the whole blood injection motor
TP51 SWB_PGND
control unit
52 Power supply voltage of the sample injection
TP52 SWBC_VCC
syringe motor control unit
53 Ground voltage of the sample injection syringe
TP53 SWBC_PGND
motor control unit
4-59
Hardware System
54 Power supply voltage of the autoloader feeding

TP54 ASY_VCC
motor control unit
55 Ground voltage of the autoloader feeding motor
TP55 ASY_PGND
control unit
56 Power supply voltage of the autoloader loading
TP56 ASLX_VCC
motor control unit
57 Ground voltage of the autoloader loading motor
TP57 ASLX_PGND
control unit
Key Definition
The reset switch S1 on the driver board is for manually resetting the driver board. Pressing the
reset switch can reset all MCUs and the FPGA.

Purpose
The driver board is a critical part in the whole device. When board failure occurs due to various
reasons, the board needs to be replaced and repaired in time to ensure the normal operation
of the device. Please replace the driver board according to below procedure.
Tool
107cross-headed screwdriver
Removal
Turn off the analyzer and disconnect all power cords;
Remove the left door and top cover (See Section 5.2.1 and Section 5.2.4 for the
detailed steps);
Use the PCB assembly stop bar to support the main board and signal processing
board assembly as per Figure 4-17;
Unplug all wires connected to the sockets of the driver board. See Table 4-66.
Loosen the 11 cross-recessed panhead screws -M3X6 with the screwdriver. See
Figure 4-17.
Remove the driver board.
4-60
Hardware System
Table 4-66 Socket-to-cable list of the driver board
Serial No. Socket label(on the driver board) Cable label(on cables)
1 J2 STANDBY C-J2/C41306
2 J3 CPU C-J3/C41288
4 J4 SV(01-16) C-J4/C000176
5 J5 SV(17-32) C-J5/C000177
6 J6 SV(33-48) C-J6/C41309
7 J7 SV(49-64) C-J7/C49000
8 J8 SV(65-80) C-J8/C000178
9 J10 INDICATION C-J10/C41305
10 J11 TTRF-MOTOR C-J11/C49020
11 J13 TTRF-SENSOR C-J13/C49020
12 J15 SV(89-96) C-J15/C49010
13 J17 M-ASR C-J17/C49006
14 J18 M-MS C-J18/C49007
15 J19 C-J19/C000440
16 J20 ASR-SENSOR C-J20/C49006
17 J21 SYRINGE-SENSOR C-J21/C49007
18 J22 M-SWB C-J22/C49007
19 J24 M-SWBC C-J24/C49007
20 J27 MS-SENSOR C-J27/ C49007
21 J28 AIR-CTRL C-J28/C49012
22 J29 REAGENT-SENSOR C-J29/C49027
23 J30 LASER C-J30/C49013
24 J31 DC-MOTOR C-J31/C49007
25 J32 TM1 C-J32/C49025
26 J34 TM3 C-J34/C49024
27 J35 HT-PRE C-J35/C49023
28 J36 HT-ACT C-J36/C49023
29 J38 REAGENT-INSIDE C-J38/C49027
30 J43 FAN C-J43/C41304
31 J44 POWER C-J44/C41303
32 J47 SV(81-88) C-J47/C49007
33 J48 DOOR C-J48/C41297
4-61
Hardware System
Figure 4-17 Removing the driver board
1---PCB assembly stop bar 3---Driver Board

2---Main board, signal processing board 4---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6
assembly
Installation
Install the driver board as the above-mentioned procedure in reverse order.
Verification
1. Check the driver board to ensure all connections are correct.
2. When the analyzer is off, connect the analyzer to the power supply and start it up.
3. Check whether the indicators D2, D3, D12, D13, D14 and D16 on the driver board
flash. You can also check the indicators by entering the self-test screen and
performing a self-test. If the self-test is passed, it indicates that the driver board is
replaced successfully; otherwise you must troubleshoot the board.
Error analysis and processing

Failures related to the driver board are identified and handled by the error codes, which are
reported to the host control software by the driver board. Some error codes are handled
automatically by the host control software, while some need to be judged manually by users
4-62
Hardware System
and service engineers. When an error is reported, the error No. and error name are provided
by host control software. The recommended action to remove the error may appear on the
corresponding screen as the software help information.
When checking an error, ensure the connection wires related to the error is properly connected.
For example, when "AL: load motor to start position failed" is reported, check whether the
connection between the sample transport assembly and the driver board is stable, whether the
plugs at ends are well connected (if improper connection is identified, shutdown the analyzer,
disconnect it from power supply, and then reconnect), whether the connection inside the
sample transport assembly is proper, whether the label on the sensor connecting wire
corresponds to the sensor position and whether the label on the motor connecting wire
corresponds to the motor position (disassemble the sample transport assembly to check, see
Chapter 5 Replacing the Sample Transmitting Assembly for the procedure).
After the improper connection possibility is excluded, remove errors according to the
recommended action in the following table. If an error remains after the cause is found and
components get replaced, you need to replace the driver board.
The following table shows the error codes, error names and the recommended actions to
remove errors.
Table 4-67 Error analysis and processing of the driver board
Code Error Cause and Recommended Action

Host software error or communication
Mid control board: function
0x00000001 interference. Try again or restart the
code error
analyzer.
Mid control board: address
code error
analyzer.
Mid control board: data
length error
analyzer.
Mid control board: command
ID error
analyzer.
Mid control board: verification
code error
analyzer.
Mid control board: end code
error
analyzer.
0x00000007 PDB: FPGA error Please replace the driver board.
MCB: valve command and
data len not match
analyzer.
Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x0000000A Priming and draining time is 0
again or restart the analyzer.
4-63
Hardware System
Last priming and draining Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x0000000B
haven't finished again or restart the analyzer.
1 Check whether there are enough
reagents;
Priming and draining do not 2 The float switch is damaged, replace
0x0000000E
finish in regular time it.
3 Disassemble the analyzer to check
for tubing leakage.
Transmit unit: function code
error
analyzer.
Transmit unit: address code
error
analyzer.
Transmit unit: data length
error
analyzer.
Transmit unit: command ID
error
analyzer.
Transmit unit: verification
code error
analyzer.
0x00000069 Transmit unit: end code error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
The autoloader loading start position
photocoupler is open-circuited. Possible
phenomena are: the autoloader loading
motor is at the start position or the
AL: load motor to start
0x0000006A autoloader loading motor hits the limit
position failed
point.
Autoloader loading motor failure. The
phenomenon is the autoloader load motor
does not move.
The autoloader load stop position
photocoupler or the contact switch is
open-circuited. Possible phenomena are:
the autoloader loading motor is at the stop
0x0000006B position or the autoloader loading motor
position failed
hits the limit point.
Autoloader loading motor failure. The
phenomenon is the autoloader load motor
does not move.
4-64
Hardware System
The autoloader feed reset photocoupler is

open-circuited: the autoloader feed motor
AL: feed motor to start
0x0000006C moves;
position failed
Autoloader feed motor failure: the
autoloader feed motor does not move.
The autoloader feed reset photocoupler is
open-circuited: the autoloader feed motor
AL: feed motor to stop
0x0000006D moves;
position failed
The unloader position photocoupler is
short-circuited: the autoloader feed motor
AL: unloader to start position
0x0000006E moves;
failed
1. The unloader position photocoupler is
short-circuited: the autoloader feed motor
AL: unloader to stop position
0x0000006F moves;
failed
Please replace the two photocouplers at
AL: loading unit photocoupler
0x00000070 the loading position of the sample transport
error
assembly.
Photocoupler failure or counting unit
0x00000071 AL: feeding unit counter error
failure.
Host software error or improper operation.
0x00000072 AL: loading is not allowed
Try again or restart the analyzer.
0x00000073 AL: unloading is not allowed
Please remove at least one tube rack from
0x00000074 AL: unloading tray is full
the utmost outside of the unload tray.
0x00000075 Autoloader is working
AL: feed motor is not Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x00000076
initialized again or restart the analyzer.
Barcode scanner failure. Enter the barcode
test screen to check whether the scanner
communication is normal. Replace the
0x00000077 Tube ID read error
scanner is necessary;
If problem remains after the action above,
replace the driver board.
Continue operation per the software
0x00000079 Rack(s) moved manually
prompt.
0x0000007A Scanner setup error Barcode scanner failure. Enter the barcode
4-65
Hardware System
test screen to check whether the scanner

communication is normal. Replace the
scanner is necessary;
If problem remains after the action above,
replace the driver board.
0x0000007C Tube barcode is too long Use barcodes less than 16 bits
Mix & pierce unit: function
0x000000C8 interference. Try again or restart the
code error
analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: address
0x000000C9 interference. Try again or restart the
code error
analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: data length
0x000000CA interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: command
0x000000CB interference. Try again or restart the
ID error
analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: verification
0x000000CC interference. Try again or restart the
code error
analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: end code
0x000000CD interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.
1 Check whether the sample compartment
door is blocked. The phenomenon is the
door is not open, yet the sound of
electromagnet movement can still be
heard;
Opening sample
0x000000CE 2 Photocoupler failure. The phenomenon is
compartment door failed
the sample compartment door can open;
3 Electromagnet is damaged or the
connection wire is not well connected. The
phenomenon is the sound of electromagnet
movement can not be heard.
Photocoupler failure: the pinch cylinder
moves normally;
The pneumatic unit is abnormal. The
MP: pinch cylinder front corresponding valve 89 of X direction
0x000000CF
photocoupler error cylinder is damaged or the connection wire
is not well connected. The phenomenon is
the X direction cylinder does not move or
move slowly.
0x000000D0 MP: pinch cylinder rear Photocoupler failure: the pinch cylinder
4-66
Hardware System
photocoupler error moves normally;

The pneumatic unit is abnormal. The
corresponding valve 89 of pinch cylinder is
damaged or the connection wire is not well
connected. The phenomenon is the X
direction cylinder does not move or move
slowly.
MP: pinch cylinder cannot go Host software error or improper operation.
0x000000D1
forward Try again or restart the analyzer.
MP: pinch cylinder cannot go Host software error or improper operation.
0x000000D2
backward Try again or restart the analyzer.
1 Photocoupler failure: the elevation
cylinder moves normally;
2 The pneumatic unit is abnormal. The
MP: elevation up corresponding valves 90 and 91 of
0x000000D3
photocoupler error elevation cylinder are damaged or the
connection wires are not well connected.
The phenomenon is the elevation cylinder
does not move or move slowly.
1 Photocoupler failure: the elevation
cylinder moves normally;
MP: elevation down corresponding valves 90 and 91 of
0x000000D4
photocoupler error elevation cylinder are damaged or the
connection wires are not well connected.
The phenomenon is the elevation cylinder
does not move or move slowly.
MP: elevation cylinder cannot Host software error or improper operation.
0x000000D5
go up Try again or restart the analyzer.
MP: elevation cylinder cannot Host software error or improper operation.
0x000000D6
go down Try again or restart the analyzer.
1 Photocoupler failure. The mix motor
MP: mix motor start pos. moves normally;
0x000000D7
photocoupler error 2 Mix motor failure. The mix motor does not
move or gets blocked.
1 Photocoupler failure. The mix motor
MP: mix motor stop pos. moves normally;
0x000000D8
photocoupler error 2 Mix motor failure. The mix motor does not
move or gets blocked.
1 Mix motor failure. The mix motor does not
move;
MP: mix motor to start
0x000000D9 2 Start position photocoupler failure or mix
position failed
motor gets blocked. The mix motor moves
normally.
4-67
Hardware System
1 Mix motor failure. The mix motor does not

move;
MP: mix motor to stop
0x000000DA 2 Start position photocoupler failure or mix
position failed
motor gets blocked. The mix motor moves
normally.
MP: mix motor rotation is not Host software error or improper operation.
0x000000DB
allowed Try again or restart the analyzer.
1 Photocoupler failure. The wipe block
Wipe block motor down motor moves normally;
0x000000DC
photocoupler failed 2 Wipe block motor failure. The wipe block
motor does not move.
1 Photocoupler failure. The wipe block is
Wipe block cannot go to up not at the down position;
0x000000DD
position 2 Wipe block motor failure. The wipe block
1 Photocoupler failure. The wipe block is at
Wipe block cannot go to the down position;
0x000000DE
down position 2 Wipe block motor failure. The wipe block
Opening Sample
0x000000DF compartment door not Initialize the fluidic system and try again.
allowed
Perform a self-test of the wipe block motor
0x000000E0 Wipe block motor is working
and try again.
Wipe block cannot go to up Perform a self-test of the wipe block motor
0x000000E1
position and try again.
corresponding valve 92 of pierce cylinder is
damaged; 2 The connection wire is not well
MP: cylinder
0x000000E2 connected. The pierce cylinder does not
piercing/photocoupler error
move;
3 Piercing position photocoupler failure.
The pierce cylinder moves normally;
1 Piercing position photocoupler failure;
MP: cylinder corresponding valve 92 of pierce cylinder is
0x000000E3
return/photocoupler error damaged; 3 The connection wire is not well
connected. The pierce cylinder does not
move when returning.
MP: pierce cylinder pierce is Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x000000E4
not allowed again or restart the analyzer.
MP: pierce cylinder return is Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x000000E5
not allowed again or restart the analyzer.
0x000000E9 MP: mix unit is not initialized Initialize the fluidic system and try again.
4-68
Hardware System
Pinch cylinder does not move. Check the

MP: pinch cylinder to front
0x000000EA pneumatic unit, valve 89 and the
pos. failed
connection.
Pinch cylinder does not move. Check the
MP: pinch cylinder to rear
0x000000EB pneumatic unit, valve 89 and the
pos. failed
connection.
Elevation cylinder does not move. Check
MP: elevation cylinder to up
0x000000EC the pneumatic unit, valve 90, 91 and the
pos. failed
connection.
Elevation cylinder does not move. Check
MP: elevation cylinder to
0x000000ED the pneumatic unit, valve 90, 91 and the
down pos. failed
connection.
Fluidic sequence or host software error. Try
0x000000EF Manipulator is working
again or restart the analyzer.
Syringe unit: function code
0x0000012C interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.
Syringe unit: address code
0x0000012D interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.
0x0000012E Syringe unit: data length error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
Syringe unit: command ID
0x0000012F interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.
Syringe unit: verification code
error
analyzer.
0x00000131 Syringe unit: end code error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
Perform a self-test of the sheath syringe
0x00000132 Sheath syringe is working.
and try again.
1 Sheath syringe photocoupler failure. The
Sheath syringe initialization sheath syringe motor moves.
0x00000133
failure 2 Sheath syringe motor error. The sheath
syringe motor does not move.
1 Sheath syringe photocoupler failure. The
Sheath syringe to start sheath syringe is at the start position;
0x00000134
position failed 2 Sheath syringe motor error. The sheath
syringe is not at the start position.
Sheath syringe to stop 1 Sheath syringe photocoupler failure. The
0x00000135
position failed sheath syringe is not at the start position;
4-69
Hardware System
2 Sheath syringe motor error. The sheath

syringe is at the start position.
Sheath syringe photocoupler Sheath syringe photocoupler failure. The
0x00000136
open-circuited sheath syringe is at the start position.
Sheath syringe photocoupler Sheath syringe photocoupler failure. The
0x00000137
short-circuited sheath syringe is not at the start position.
Sheath syringe aspirates too Perform a self-test of the sheath syringe
0x00000138
much. and try again.
Sheath syringe dispenses too Perform a self-test of the sheath syringe
0x00000139
much. and try again.
Sheath syringe works too Perform a self-test of the sheath syringe
0x0000013A
fast. and try again.
Sheath syringe assembly failure. Please
0x0000013B Sheath syringe timeout check whether the resistance of the syringe
is too great.
Perform a self-test of the pump syringe and
0x0000013C Pump syringe is working.
try again.
1 Pump syringe photocoupler error. The
Pump syringe initialization pump syringe motor moves;
0x0000013D
failure 2 Pump syringe motor error. The pump
syringe motor does not move.
Pump syringe to start position pump syringe is at the start position;
0x0000013E
failed 2 Pump syringe motor error. The pump
syringe is not at the start position.
Pump syringe to stop position pump syringe is not at the start position;
0x0000013F
failed 2 Pump syringe motor error. The pump
syringe is at the start position.
Pump syringe photocoupler 1 Pump syringe photocoupler error. 2 The
0x00000140
open-circuited pump syringe is at the start position.
Pump syringe photocoupler Pump syringe photocoupler error. The
0x00000141
short-circuited pump syringe is not at the start position.
Pump syringe aspirates too Perform a self-test of the pump syringe and
0x00000142
much. try again.
Pump syringe dispenses too Perform a self-test of the pump syringe and
0x00000143
much. try again.
Perform a self-test of the pump syringe and
0x00000144 Pump syringe works too fast.
try again.
Pump syringe assembly failure. Please
0x00000145 Pump syringe timeout check whether the resistance of the syringe
is too great.
Temp. unit: function code Host software error or communication
0x00000190
error interference. Try again or restart the
4-70
Hardware System
analyzer.
Temp. unit: address code
error
analyzer.
0x00000192 Temp. unit: data length error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
Temp. unit: command ID
error
analyzer.
Temp. unit: verification code
error
analyzer.
0x00000195 Temp. unit: end code error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
1 If D25 is not on, check the 12VDC power
supply;
2 If the D25 is on, check whether the beads
in the AD circuit module or other
components are not welded completely;
0x00000196 PDB: ADS1210 error
3 Check whether the crystal oscillator X2 is
short-circuited.
4 If none of the above problems is found,
ADS1210 is damaged. Please replace the
driver board.
1 Check whether the preheat temperature
sensor is well connected;
Heater: preheat bath temp. 2 Check whether the +12V power supply
0x00000197
sensor error on the driver board works normally;
3 If error remains when the sensor is
connected, the sensor is damaged.
1 Check whether the reaction temperature
sensor is well connected;
Heater: reaction bath temp. 2 Check whether the +12V power supply
0x00000198
sensor error on the driver board works normally;
3 If error remains when the sensor is
connected, the sensor is damaged.
1 Check whether the laser diode
temperature sensor is well connected;
Laser diode temp. sensor 2 Check whether the +12V power supply
0x00000199
error on the driver board works normally;
3 If no problem is found in the above
procedure and the error remains, the
4-71
Hardware System
sensor is damaged.
1 Check whether any component in the
EEPROM circuit is not welded, such as L7
and R3; check whether the pins of
EEPROM are short-circuited or welded
0x0000019B PDB: EEPROM error
incorrectly.
2 If none of problems above is found and
the error remains, the EEPROM is
damaged.
Other unit: function code
0x000001F4 interference. Try again or restart the
error
analyzer.
Other unit: address code
error
analyzer.
0x000001F6 Other unit: data length error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
0x000001F7 Other unit: command ID error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
Other unit: verification code
error
analyzer.
0x000001F9 Other unit: end code error interference. Try again or restart the
analyzer.
1 Check whether the +12V power supply of
the driver board is normal;
2 Check whether the voltage of PIN5
0x000001FA PDB: U74(AD7928) error (AVDD) on U74 is normal. The normal
voltage is +5V5% ;
3 If neither problem is found, U74
(AD7928) is damaged.
1 Check whether the +12V power supply of
the driver board is normal;
2 Check whether the voltage of PIN5
0x000001FB PDB: U75(AD7928) error (AVDD) on U75 is normal. The normal
voltage is +5V5%;
3 If neither problem is found, U75
(AD7928) is damaged.
Troubleshooting special errors

Troubleshooting the feeding unit counter error
4-72
Hardware System
"AL: feeding unit counter error" is reported when feeding motor feeds twice consecutively yet
the readings of the left and right counter of the feeding unit do not change. When this error is
reported, troubleshoot it according to the steps that follow.
1. Check whether tube racks on the loader tray enter the feeding flow line after they are
loaded in position. Some racks may not enter the flow line since they are so long that
the claw can not get them. In case of this, install racks of appropriate size and start
the autoloading flow again according to the prompt on the software screen.
2. Check whether tube racks get blocked in the feeding flow line. This may be reported if
autoloader feeding motor cannot push the racks due to distorted racks or wrongly
assembled sample transport assembly. In case of this, turn off the analyzer,
disconnect all the power cords and pull the racks manually on the flow line to judge
the possible causes. If it results from distorted racks, install appropriate racks. If it
results from wrongly assembled assembly, remove and repair the assembly.
3. Check whether tube racks get blocked and the autoloader feeding motor cannot push
the racks due to other racks tilted on the unloader tray or improper tray manufacture.
Check whether the rack length is qualified and whether the sheet-metal near the
unloader unit is correctly fabricated.
4. If the current rack is not unloaded and the unloader assembly stops the movement
while previous racks were moved to the unloader tray and the tray is not full, do as the
prompt on the software screen: stop the autoloader, remove all racks on the unloader
tray, place a rack on the loader tray and then start the autoloader. If this is successful,
the cause is the same with that listed in step 3. If this error is still reported, turn of the
analyzer, remove the sample transport assembly, replace the left and right
photocouplers in the autoloader feeding position and check whether the baffles can
work normally.
5. If the AL: feeding unit counter error cannot be removed by the process above,
the error occurs due to the failure of driver board components. Replace the driver
board.
Troubleshooting the abnormal pneumatic pressure:
1. If all vacuum and pressure of the system are zero, check the connection between the
pressure board and the driver board/pneumatic tubing, and whether the pneumatic
unit starts normally;
2. If all vacuum and pressure of the system are abnormal and with the too high or too
low pressure value at the same time, check whether the air compressor can work
normally. See Chapter XX for a reference of the troubleshooting method;
3. If only one pressure value is abnormal, check the related regulator and airway for
leakage.
4. If the airway system is normal, the error is due to the pressure sensor failure in the
driver board. Replace the driver board.
5. See the following table for the output voltage and pressure of the pressure sensor:
4-73
Hardware System
Pressure Pressure Test Relation between sensor output Mid-point

Note
channel range Point voltage and pressure value voltage
200 - P represents
250kPa TP8 P = Vout / 0.0045 44.4 25 1.325
300kPa pressure, and
128 - its unit is KPa;
160kPa TP6 3.8
188kPa P = Vout / 0.0225 8.89 5 Vout
70kPa 55 - 81kPa TP7 1.775 represents the
-40kPa -46 - -30kPa TP9 2 voltage of the
P = Vout / 0.045 + 4.44 2.5 test point, and
-85kPa -97 - 58kPa TP10 4.025
its unit is V.
Troubleshooting the abnormal mechanism action
For the abnormal actions of system mechanism, service engineer needs to observe and
troubleshoot them. In case of these errors, troubleshoot them according to the recommended
actions listed in the table above and the procedure below.
1. Check whether the related units (such as motors and cylinders) can move. If the units
do not move, the error is due to the executive component problems, such as
disconnected motor, airway leakage or the failure of corresponding air valve to
cylinder. If the errors mentioned above are excluded, the errors occurs due to the
driver board failure. Replace the driver board.
2. If the units can move, check whether the movement is in position and whether units
are blocked by lines or other units during the movement. For transmissive
photocoupler, if the baffle enters 2/3 or above of the photocoupler, it is baffled and the
movement is in position.
3. For the cylinder movement, check whether the movement is too slow. Abnormal
0.25MPa pressure or oversized throttle in the airway connecting the cylinder may
lead to abnormal movement of cylinder and cause failure.
4. If errors remain after unit movement problems are excluded, consider photocoupler
failure. Replace the photocoupler.
If errors still exist after the photocoupler is replaced, the cause is failure of components on the
4-74
Hardware System
4.4 Power Board

4.4.1 Introduction
The power board of the BC-5800 hematology analyzer provides stable and reliable DC power
source for the equipment, including 5V, 12V and 24V.
Section 4.4 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the power board.
Function
The 3100 power board provides stable and reliable DC power source all the functional blocks
of the BC-5800 hematology analyzer and for the equipment itself, including 5V, 12V and 24V.
See below Figure 4-18 for the functional block diagram of the power board.
AC input PFC
EMI circuit and Power board
circuit 051-000159-00
rectifier circuit
Vcc 390V
5B Standby VDD
Active clamp 24V DC/DC 12V
circuit normal wave 12V circuit output
circuit
Control and DC/DC 5V output

protective 5V circuit
circuit
24V output
On/off
signals
Figure 4-18Block Diagram of the power board
Description
The power board operates under 90V-264V AC input voltage (50/60Hz).
When the AC power switch is ON, only the standby circuit works. The 24V, 12V and 5V are
output only when the power button is ON.
Circuit loads of the power board are described in Table 4-68 below:
4-75
Hardware System
Table 4-68 Circuit loads of the power board
Voltage Maximum Range of Voltage Load

current output adjustment adjustment
voltage rate rate
+5V 8.0A 4.85-5.25V 1 -3%~5%
+12V 12.0A 11.75-12.25V 1 -3%~5%
+24V 8.0A 23.5-25V 1 -3%~5%
The power board has 6 external interfaces numbered from J1-J18. The positions of all
Figure 4-19 Interface layout of the power board
4-76
Hardware System
See below table for the function of each interface.
Table 4-69 Power board external port list

J1 AC input 3 /
Power supply of the main /
J2 4
board
Power supply of the signal /
J3 6
processing board
Power supply of the driver /
J4 8
board
J5 Power button control 4 /
J6 Power supply of the fans 6 /
J1 is the AC input interface; see Table 4-70 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-70 AC input interface definition

1 L Live wire
2 NC No contact
3 N Neutral wire
J2 is the output power interface of the main board; see Table 4-71 for the distribution and
Table 4-71Definition of the main board power output interface

Second
1 5V 5V power output 2 SGND
ground
12V power Second
3 12V 4 SGND
output ground
J3 is the output power interface of the signal processing board; see Table 4-72 for the
Table 4-72Definition of signal processing board output power interface

Second
ground
4-77
Hardware System
Second
ground
12V power Second
5 12V 6 SGND
output ground
J4 is the output power interface of the driver board; see Table 4-73 for the distribution and
Table 4-73 Definition of the driver board output power interface

24V power Second
1 24V 2 SGND
output ground
12V power Second
3 12V 4 SGND
output ground
12V power Second
5 12V 6 SGND
output ground
Second
ground
J5 is the signal control interface of the power button. See Table 4-74 for the distribution and
Table 4-74 Definition of the power button signal control interface

Signal of the Signal of the
1 ON 2 OFF
power button power button
3 SGND Second ground 4 LED Standby signal
J6 is the 12V fan power interface of the power box; see Table 4-75 for the distribution and
Table 4-75 Definitions of the 12V fan power interface of the power box

12V fan power
1 12V 2 SGND Second ground
source
12V fan power
3 12V source 4 SGND Second ground
5 12V 12V fan power 6 SGND Second ground
4-78
Hardware System
source
Assembly Drawing
Figure 4-20 Assembly drawing of the power board
4-79
Hardware System
Table 4-76 Function definition of power board LED
LED1 5B indicator
LED2 5V indicator
LED3 12V indicator
LED4 24V indicator

Serial String Pin Function Reference

No. value
1 TP1 Q101.2 Measures the switching /
waveform of Q101
2 TP2 Q101.1 Measures the driving /
waveform of Q101
3 TP3 C114.+ Measures the DC output 39020V
voltage
4 TP4 U101.9 Measures the reference 7.5V
output voltage of U101
5 TP5 U101.14 Measures the oscillating /
waveform of U101
6 TP6 C126.+ Measures VCC voltage 181V
7 TP7 C204.+ Measures VDD voltage 13.51V
8 TP8 C223.+ Measures the supply 121V
voltage of U201
waveform of Q201
waveform of Q201
11 TP11 Q201.3 Measures the current /
waveform of Q201
12 TP12 U201.8 Measures the reference 5V
voltage of U201
13 TP13 U201.4 Measures the oscillating /
voltage waveform of U201
14 TP14 C234.+ Measures the output 50.5V
voltage and ripple voltage
of 5B
4-80
Hardware System
waveform of Q301
waveform of Q301
waveform of Q302
waveform of Q302
19 TP19 Q302.3 Measures the current /
waveform of Q302
20 TP20 C324.+ Measures the output 241V
voltage of 24V1
21 TP21 D305.1 Measures the voltage /
waveform of the rectifier
and the fly-wheel diode
22 TP22 U301.4 Measures the reference 5V
voltage of U301
waveform of Q401
waveform of Q402
waveform of Q402
of 12V1
27 TP27 U401.11 Measures the 10V 10V
reference voltage of U401
waveform of Q411
waveform of Q412
30 TP30 Q412.1 Measures the driving
waveform of Q412
of 5V1
32 TP32 U411.11 Measures the 10V 10V
reference voltage of U411

Purpose
The power board is a critical part in the whole device. When board failure occurs due to
4-81
Hardware System
various reasons, the board needs to be replaced and repaired in time to ensure normal
operation of the device. Please replace the power board according to below procedure.
Tool
Multimeter
Removal
1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect AC power cords;
2. Remove all connections from the power output terminal. Then refer to Section 6.3 of
Chapter 6 to remove the fixing screws to take out the power assembly from the main
unit enclosure;
3. Refer to Section 6.3 of Chapter 6 to dismantle the power box. Unplug the AC
connection cables on the power board. Then remove the nine fixing screws on the
power board to take out the power board from the power box.
Installation
Install the driver board as the above-mentioned procedure in reverse order.
Verification
1. Verify whether the ground wire of AC input socket is well connected to the main unit
enclosure (the conductive part);
2. Connect power cord, switch on the AC control switch, the 5B indicator on the power
board illuminates; switch on the power button, the power fans start to run.
z During installation, ensure that the AC plug and fan plug on the power box
are connected to the power board, and then fix the upper cover of the power
box.
z Ensure that the power assembly and the main unit enclosure are firmly
connected with screws.
4-82
Hardware System
Errors of the power board can be checked out according to the procedure in Figure 4-21.
Figure 4-21 Power board troubleshooting flow chart
Ensure that the power assembly and the main unit enclosure are firmly connected with screws.
4-83
Hardware System
4.5 Interface Board

4.5.1 Introduction
The interface board of BC-5800 hematology analyzer provides proper electricity connection for
external equipments to get connected with the main unit.
Section 4.5 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the interface
board.
Function
The interface board provides electricity connection between the hematology analyzer and the
external equipments.
Description
The interface board provides the following interfaces for the external equipments:
J2: network interface (RJ45);
J4: pneumatic interface;
J11: serial port (RS232)
J6-J9: 4-channel USB interface
The interface board has 11 external interfaces numbered from J1-J11.The positions of all
4-84
Hardware System
Figure 4-22 Interface layout of the interface board
Table 4-78 Interface board external port list
Number
Interface Function Description
of pins
Network interface (connected to the /
J1 6
main board)
Network interface RJ45 (connected to /
J2 8
the external equipments)
Pneumatic control input interface /
J3 4
(connected to the driver board)
Pneumatic control output interface /
J4 9
(connected to the pneumatic board)
J5 USB data wire interface 20 /
USB interface Standard USB
J6 4
interface
J7 4
interface
J8 4
interface
J9 4
interface
External scanner interface RS232 electrical
J10 6
(connected to the main board) level
J11 External scanner interface 9 /
4-85
Hardware System
(connected to the scanner)
J1 is a network interface of the main board; see Table 4-79 for the distribution and definition of
its pins.
Table 4-79 Main board network interface definition

Sending end of network signals
1 TPTX+
(difference signals)
2 TPTX-
Receiving end of network signals
3 TPRX+
4 TPRX+
5 GND Ground
Power signals of the network
6 PWFBOUT
interface
J2 is a network interface of the main board; see Table 4-80 for the distribution and definition of
its pins.
Table 4-80 Definition of the network interface RJ45

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 NC /
5 NC /
6 RX-
7 NC /
8 NC /
J3 is a pneumatic control interface. See Table 4-81 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-81 Definition of pneumatic control input interface
4-86
Hardware System
1 VCC 5V power supply signals

2 RELAY Pneumatic control signals
3 12V0 12V power supply signals
4 AGND Ground
J4 is a pneumatic control output interface. See Table 4-82 for the distribution and definition of
its pins.
Table 4-82 Definition of pneumatic control output interface

2 RELAY Relay control signals
3
12V0 12V power supply
4
5
6 NC No contact
7
AGND Ground
8
AGND Ground signals
9
J5 is an USB interface of the main board, see Table 4-83 for the distribution and definition of its
pins.
Table 4-83 Main board USB interface definition

1 DM4 USB4 data signals (difference signals)
2 GND /
3 DP4 USB4 data signals (difference signals)
4 VBUS3 USB3 power supply
7 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /
11 GND /
13 GND /
15 GND /
4-87
Hardware System
18 GND /
Definition of pins in J6-J9 interfaces
J6-J9 are standard USB interfaces, see Table 4-84 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-84 USB interface definition

1 VCC 5V power supply signals
2 DM USB data signals (difference signals)
3 DP USB data signals (difference signals)
4 GND Ground
J10 is the external scanner interface connecting with the main board. It is not used presently.
J11 is the external scanner interface connecting with the scanner. It is not used presently.
Assembly Drawing
See Figure 4-23 for the assembly drawing of the interface board
(a) Top (b) Bottom
Figure 4-23 Assembly drawing of the interface board
4-88
Hardware System

Purpose
The interface board is a critical part in the communication between the analyzer and the
external equipments. Please follow below procedure to replace the interface board.
Tool
Removal
1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect all power cords.
2. Disconnect all external equipments from the interface board.
3. Remove the left door (Fro details, refer to Section 6.2.1 of Chapter 6).
4. Remove the wires connected to J1, J3, J5 and J10.
5. Loosen the 4 screws on the interface board with screwdriver.
6. Remove the interface board.
Installation
Install the interface board as the above-mentioned procedure in reverse order.
Verification
1. Connect the power cord. Switch on the power switch to start the hematology analyzer.
2. Insert a USB mouse to any of the interfaces on the interface board, move the mouse
to see if cursor is moving on the display. If yes, the interface board is working normally;
if no, please check the connection between the interface board and the USB signal
wire of the main board.
4-89
Hardware System
4.6 Indicator Board

4.6.1 Introduction
The indicator board in BC-5800 hematology analyzer indicates the working status of the main
unit and switches on the power through the power button.
Section 4.6 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the indicator
board.

Function
Indicating the operating status of the main unit;
Switching on the power through the power button.
Description
Indicating the operating status of the main unit
The indicator board indicates the operating status of the equipment through a yellow/green
indicator and a buzzer. When the system is in standby status, the indicator is turns yellow;
when the system works normally, the indicator turns green; When error occurs to the system,
the indicator is green and flashes at 1Hz frequency. When the system works normally, the
buzzer does not make a sound; when error occurs to the system, the buzzer buzzes.
Switching on the power through the power button.
Power on: when the power cord is connected and the power switch is ON, the system is in
standby status (the yellow/green indicator turns yellow), the power system is OFF. When the
power button on the indicator board is pressed, the power system is ON. The equipment starts
to operate and the indicator turns green.
The indicator board is configured with only one external interface. Its definition is as follows.
J1 is the interface of the indicator board. See Table 4-85 for the distribution and definition of its
pins.
Table 4-85 Indicator board interface definition

1 VCC +5V power supply
2 GND Analog ground
3 KEY Key signal
4 BUZ Buzzer control signal
4-90
Hardware System
5 WOKE_LED Green indicator signal

6 STAND_BY Yellow indicator signal
Assembly Drawing
See Figure 4-24 for the assembly drawing of the indicator board
Figure 4-24 Indicator board assembly drawing

Purpose
Please replace the indicator board according to below procedure.
Tool
Removal
1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect all power cords.
2. Open the upper part of the front cover and fix it with the stop bar.
3. Unplug the connection wire.
4. Remove the touchscreen assembly (for details, see Section 6.4).
5. Loosen the 2 screws on the indicator board with screwdriver.
6. Remove the indicator board.
Installation
Install the interface board as the above-mentioned procedure in reverse order.
4-91
Hardware System
Verification
Connect the power cord. Switch on the power switch. The yellow/green indicator should turn
yellow.
Press down the power button to start the system. The indicator should turn green.
Troubleshooting
Indicator failure
Description: When the system is in standby or normal working status, the yellow/green
indicator does not illuminate.
Possible cause: the connection wire on the indicator board is not in good contact with the
indicator socket J1. Or the indicator is damaged.
Solution:
1. Check whether the connection wire on the indicator board is reliably connected with
J1. If not, disconnect the wire and re-plug it into J1.
2. Re-power on the system. Observe whether the indicator is on. If yes, the problem is
solved. If not, replace the indicator board.
4-92
Hardware System
4.7 Touchscreen Control Board

4.7.1 Introduction
The touchscreen control board of the BC-5800 hematology analyzer receives the touch
information sent by the touchscreen and then transmits it to the main board through the serial
port.
Section 4.7 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the touchscreen
control board.

Function
The touchscreen control board receives touch information from the screen and sends it to the
main board through serial port (051-000197-00).
Figure 4-25 shows the functional block diagram of the touchscreen control board.
Figure 4-25 Block diagram of touchscreen control board
Description
The touchscreen control board is connected to the 4-line touchscreen through J4. It provides
voltage to the electrode of the touchscreen and receives information of touch points;
The board is connected to the main board through J5. It sends information of touch points to
the main board through RS232 level serial port.
The touchscreen control board is configured with three external interfaces.
J1 is the interface configured for CPLD on the touchscreen control board; see Table 4-86 for
the distribution and definition of its pins.
4-93
Hardware System
Table 4-86 Definitions of the interface configured for CPLD on the touchscreen control
board

1 TCK Configured clock input
2 GND GND
3 TDO Data output
4 VDD VDD
5 TMS Mode selection
6 NC NC
7 NC NC
8 NC NC
9 TDI Data input
10 GND GND
J4 is the interface for the touch screen; see Table 4-87 for the distribution and definition of its
pins.
Table 4-87 Touchscreen interface definition

1 Y- Y-coordinate negative
2 X- X-coordinate negative
3 Y+ Y-coordinate positive
4 X+ X-coordinate positive
J5 is the interface of the main board; see Table 4-88 for the distribution and definition of its
pins.
Table 4-88 Main board interface definition

1 TXD Transmitting through the serial port
2 RXD Receiving through the serial port
Sending requests (reserved; not in
3 RTS
use temporarily)
Sending cleared (reserved; not in use
4 CTS
temporarily)
5 POWER Power of the touchscreen (+5V)
6 GND GND
Assembly Drawing
The assembly drawing of the touchscreen control board is shown in Figure 4-26.
4-94
Hardware System
(a) Top
(b) Bottom
Figure 4-26 The assembly drawing of the touchscreen control board
Table 4-89 Adjustment and test points on the touchscreen control board

TP1 GND Digital ground
TOUCH_DIN Sampling input data of the
TP2
touchscreen controller
TP3 TOUCH_NPENIRQ Interrupted signal of touch inspection
TP4 LR X+ electrode
WIPER Touch point voltage of the 5-line
TP5
touchscreen
4-95
Hardware System

Purpose
Please replace the touchscreen control board according to below procedure.
Tool
Removal
1. Switch off the hematology analyzer and unplug the power cord.
2. Open the upper part of the front cover (for details, see Section 5.2.3 of Chapter 5).
3. Take off the plugs on J4 and J5
4. Use the screwdriver to loosen the two cross-recessed panhead screws (with lock
washer) on the fixing plate of the touchscreen controller and remove the fixing plate.
5. Use the screwdriver to loosen the two M3x6 cross-recessed panhead screws (with
lock washer) on the touchscreen control board.
6. Remove the touchscreen control board.
Installation
Install the board per the above-mentioned procedure in reverse order.
Verification
1. Connect the power cord. Switch on the power switch to start the hematology analyzer.
2. Press the touchscreen to see whether the cursor moves with the finger.
Table 4-90 Error analysis and processing of the touchscreen control board
Description Possible cause Recommended action

No response is generated The touchscreen control Re-connect the line /replace
when pressing the board fails /the touchscreen the touchscreen control
4-96
Hardware System
touchscreen fails /the connection line gets board or the touchscreen

loose.
The cursor can only move The connection line between Re-connect the line /observe
horizontally or vertically when the touchscreen control whether there is any crack on
the touchscreen is pressed board and the touchscreen the touchscreen. If yes,
gets loose /the touchscreen is replace the touchscreen
broken
The cursor fails to reach the The touchscreen is not Recalibrate the touchscreen
desired place calibrated or is broken /Observe whether there is
any crack on the
touchscreen. If yes, replace
the touchscreen
4.8 Pneumatic Control Board

4.8.1 Introduction
The pneumatic control board in BC-5800 hematology analyzer provides the pneumatic fan
indicator (pneumatic control relay) with a 12V power supply, which is controlled by the main
unit. This board also provides other control circuits for the pneumatic unit.
Section 4.8 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the pneumatic
board.

Function
The pneumatic control board in BC-5800 hematology analyzer provides the pneumatic fan
indicator (pneumatic control relay) with a 12V power supply, which is controlled by the main
unit. This board also provides other control circuits for the pneumatic unit.
See Figure 4-27 for the functional block diagram of the pneumatic control board.
4-97
Hardware System
Figure 4-27 Block Diagram of the pneumatic control board
4.8.3 Description
The power board operates under 90V-264V AC input voltage (50/60Hz).
When the control signal is low level and the output power is 12V, the indicator illuminates, the
fan works, the relay is closed, and the pneumatic unit starts running.
4.8.4 Interface Definition

The pneumatic board has 6 external interfaces numbered from J1-J6. The positions of all
Figure 4-28 Interface layout of the pneumatic control board
4-98
Hardware System
Table 4-91 External ports of the pneumatic control board

J1 Switch control signal 6 /
J2 Indicator output 2 /
J3 Fan output 5 /
J4 AC input socket 3 /
Output of the compensating /
J5 4
capacitor of pneumatic unit
Connected to the /
J6 temperature protection 2
switch
J1 is the switch control interface. See Table 4-92 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-92 Definition of J1 pins
Pin No. Signal I/O Description

1 NC - No contact
Receives main unit control signal via
2 CTRL I
serial port
3 NC - No contact
4 NC - No contact
5 GND I
serial port
6 GND I
serial port
J2 is the indicator output interface. See Table 4-93 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-93 Definition of pins in J2 interface

1 12V0 O Indicator +
2 GND O Indicator -
J3 is the fan output interface. See Table 4-94 for the distribution and definition of its pins.

1 12V0 O Fan 1+
2 GND O Fan 1-
3 NC - No contact
4-99
Hardware System
4 12V0 O Fan 2+
5 GND O Fan 2-
J4 is the AC input interface, see Table 4-95 for the distribution and definition of its pins.

1 L I AC input live wire
2 NC - No contact
3 N I AC input neutral wire
J5 is the output interface of the pneumatic compensating capacitor; see Table 4-96 for the

AC output live wire of the compensating
1 N O capacitor (pin 1 and 2 are
interchangeable)
AC output neutral wire of the
2 L1 O compensating capacitor (pin 1 and 2 are
interchangeable)
J6 is the output interface of the temperature protection switch. See Table 4-97 for the

Connected to one end of the
1 L O temperature protection switch (pin 1 and
2 are interchangeable)
Connected to one end of the
2 L1 O temperature protection switch (pin 1 and
2 are interchangeable)
4-100
Hardware System
Assembly Drawing
Figure 4-29 Assembly drawing of the pneumatic control board

Purpose
Please replace the pneumatic control board according to below procedure.
Tool
Removal
1. Switch off the pneumatic unit and unplug the AC power cord.
4-101
Hardware System
2. Remove the pneumatic cover, remove all plug-ins from the pneumatic control board,
loosen the screws fixing the board, and then remove the board from the pneumatic
unit.
Figure 4-30 Location of the pneumatic control board
Installation
Verification
1. Connect the power cord and switch on the AC control switch.
2. Enter the maintenance screen. When the pneumatic unit is turned on, the green
indicator lights on, the fan works, and the pneumatic unit starts working (with
vibration).
You can service the pneumatic control board taking it as a single-end backward circuit. The
parts to be considered include protective tube, switch tube Q4, sampling resistor R18 and
control chip U1. In addition, when servicing the board, you should short circuit the two pins of
J6 and connect them to the power supply and then test the board.
4-102
Hardware System
z Care must be taken to avoid electric shock when servicing the pneumatic
control board.
4.9 Pre-amplification Board, Laser Control Board and

Volumetric Board
4.9.1 Introduction
In BC-5800 Auto Hematology Analyzer, the pre-amplification board is used for photoelectric
conversion and signal amplification for two channels of scattered lights (LAS low angle;
MAS high angle) from the flow cell. The laser control board enables the laser tube to emit
stable laser with adequate intensity. The volumetric board determines the measuring time for
RBC/PLT count.
Section 4.9 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the
pre-amplification board, laser control board and volumetric board.

Function
Pre-amplification board
The pre-amplification board consists of low angle board (LAS) and high angle board (MAS).
The LAS board converts the forward light signal to electric signal, and then amplifies it. The
MAS board converts the lateral light signal to electric signal, and then amplifies it. There is
positive / negative voltage converting circuit on the pre-amplification board.
Laser control board
The laser control board mainly drives the laser semiconductor. It is required that the laser
output is between 3mW and 5mW, the laser power is stable, and the intensity is adjustable.
Volumetric board
The volumetric board determines the measuring time for RBC/PLT count. That is, the board
provides the signals of count starting and count ending.
Description
Refer to Section 5.9.2 for function description of the three boards.
The functions of pre-amplification board, laser control board and volumetric board are not so
extensive, so there are only a few interfaces on the boards. See Figure 4-31 - Figure 4-33 for
the position of the interfaces.
4-103
Hardware System
Figure 4-31 Interface layout of the pre-amplification board
Figure 4-32 Interface layout of the laser control board
Figure 4-33 Interface layout of volumetric board
There is one interface between the pre-amplification board and the signal processing board, its
definition is shown in Table 4-98.
Table 4-98 The interface between the pre-amplification board and signal processing
board (J1)
Pin Signal I/O Description Electrical level

1 AVCC I Analog positive power +12V
2 AGND / Analog power ground /
4 OUT O Pre-amplification output 100-1000mV
4-104
Hardware System

The laser control board is configured with 2 interfaces. See Table 4-99 - Table 4-100 for the
detailed definitions.
Table 4-99 The interface between the laser control board and driver board
(J1--PWR-SIG)
Pin Signal I/O Description Electrical

level
1 AVCC I 12V analog power supply 12V
2 GND / Ground /
3 LASER O Laser intensity or laser Analog signal
power feedback
4 GND / Ground /
5 NC / / /
6 GND / Ground /
7 NC / / /
8 VCC I 5V analog power supply 5V
9 NC / / /
10 NCONTROL I Laser on/off control TTL
11 NC / / /
12 NC / / /
Table 4-100 The interface between the laser control board and the laser semiconductor
(J2--LASER DIODE)
Pin Signal I/O Description Electrical level

1 LDC O LD- 0-12V
2 PDA O PD /
3 LDA O LD+(PD-) 0-12V
There is one interface J1 between the volumetric board and the signal processing board, its
definition is shown in Table 4-101.
Table 4-101 The interface between the volumetric board and signal processing board
(J1)
Pin Name I/O Description Electrical

level
1 AVCC I 12V analog power Maximum
100mA
2 GND / Ground /
4-105
Hardware System
3 GND / Ground /
4 START O Count-starting signal TTL
5 STOP O Count-ending signal TTL
6 NVMBLED I On/Off control of constant-current TTL
source
Assembly Drawing
See Figure 4-34 for the assembly drawing of the pre-amplification board.
Figure 4-34 Assembly drawing of the pre-amplification board
See Figure 4-35 for the assembly drawing of the laser control board.
Figure 4-35 Assembly drawing of the laser control board
4-106
Hardware System
See Figure 4-36 for the assembly drawing of the volumetric board.
Figure 4-36 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board

There is no adjustable component; test points are shown in Table 4-102, and their positions
4-107
Hardware System
are shown in Figure 4-34.
Table 4-102 Test points definition of the pre-amplification board

+12V analog power from the driver
+12V AVCC
board
-12V analog power generated by the
-12V AVSS
on-board chip U1
AGND AGND Ground
Output signal of the pre-amplification
OUT OUT
board
Laser control board
If the sliding variable resistor VR1 is adjusted clockwise, the resistance of VR1 in the circuit
increases, the voltage of the test point TP2VREF and the laser intensity also increases; if the
VR1 is adjusted counterclockwise, the resistance of VR1 in the circuit, the voltage of the test
point TP2VREF and the laser intensity all decreases.
The voltage of TP2VREF should be between 4.0 and 4.1V. Then the voltage at the point of
TPILD is between 0.8 and 2.0V (this happens only when the laser semiconductor is
connected).
z The laser semiconductor cannot be connected or disconnected before the

power is turned off; otherwise the laser semiconductor may be damaged.
z Whether the sliding variable resistor VR1 or the digital potentiometer U4 is

adopted, the adjustment shall be performed from small value to big value.
Refer to Table 4-103 for test points and Figure 4-35 for positions.
Table 4-103 Test points on the laser control board

+12V AVCC +12V power from the driver board
-12V AVSS -12V voltage output from the board
TPGND GND Ground
2.5V reference power generated by the
TPVREF VREF
on-board chip U1
Twice the ground voltage of the sliding end of
the variable resistor (VR1) or the digital
TP2VREF 2VREF potentiometer (U4); This voltage is used to
control the intensity of the laser. The higher the
voltage, the greater the intensity of the laser.
4-108
Hardware System
The voltage drop generated in R1 or R21 or

R1//R21 by the feedback current of
TPIPD PDA
photoelectric reception unit of the laser
semiconductor.
The extracted signal of the working current of
light-emitting tube of the laser semiconductor; it
reflects the working current of the light-emitting
TPILD LASER
tube via the voltage at the point of TPILD, which
indicates whether the laser semiconductor
works in desired status.
Volumetric board
3. Adjusting component: VR4 (adjusting START signal)
Under background condition (without volumetric tube), adjust VR4 to turn the voltage of TP2 to
2.55-2.65V. Then install volumetric board and check whether the voltage of TP2 is 2.90V.
4. Adjusting component: VR3 (adjusting STOP signal)
Under background condition (without volumetric tube), adjust VR3 to turn the voltage of TP3 to
2.55-2.65V. Then install volumetric board and check whether the voltage of TP3 is 2.90V.
Refer to Table 4-104 for test points and Figure 4-36 for positions.
Table 4-104 Test points of the volumetric board
Test Tested Function

Point Signal
TPPWR AVCC 12V analog power from the signal processing board
TPGND GND Ground
TP1 / 2.5V reference voltage generated by the on-board chip U4
(used for comparator reference signal)
TP2 / Comparator negative input signal in START circuit
TP3 / Comparator negative input signal in STOP circuit
TP7 / 2.5V reference power generated by the on-board chip U3
(used for photocoupler)
TP8 START Count-starting signal START
TP9 STOP Count-ending signal STOP

Purpose
The pre-amplification board, laser control board and volumetric board are all key components
concerning technical parameters. When board failure occurs due to various reasons, the board
needs to be replaced and repaired in time to ensure the normal operation of the device.
4-109
Hardware System
Tool
Removal
The operation of removal is performed as per the reverse operation of installation described in
4.9.4 .
Installation
Refer to Figure 4-37 and Figure 4-38 for the position of the pre-amplification board in the
analyzer and information of its assemblies. To ensure that the board is correctly installed in the
analyzer, please do strictly as instructed below:
1. 2 ) with the PD
Align the photo detector on the pre-amplification board (Figure 4-38,
1 ), then place the pre-amplification board onto the support, and
sheath (Figure 4-38,
4 ).
then secure the fixing screws (Figure 4-38,
2. Shield the pre-amplification board using the shielding cover (Figure 4-38,
3 ) and
secure the fixing screws (Figure 4-38, ) to finish the PD installation. The two steps
above apply to the high angle board and low angle board.
3. Place the high angle PD assembly and low angle PD assembly onto the optical
system support (Figure 4-37,
1 ) as Figure 4-37 and
2 shown in
3 ; secure the
fixing screws.
4. Connect the plugs to the sockets correctly as shown in Figure 4-31.
5. Recover the protective cover of the optical system.
Figure 4-37 Assembly drawing of the pre-amplification board (1)
1----Optical system support 3----High angle PD assembly

2----Low angle PD assembly
4-110
Hardware System
Figure 4-38 Assembly drawing of the pre-amplification board (2)
1----PD sheath 4----Fixing screw (M3x6) of

2----Pre-amplification board 5----Fixing screw (M3x6) of shielding
cover
3----Shielding cover
Laser control board
Refer to Figure 4-39 and Figure 4-40 for the position of the laser control board in the analyzer
and information of its assemblies. To ensure that the board is correctly installed in the analyzer,
please do strictly as instructed below:
1. According to the direction shown in Figure 4-40, place the laser control board (Figure
3 ) and then secure the fixing
4-40, ) onto the control board support (Figure 4-40,
screws (Figure 4-40, ).
2. After step 1, place the control board support onto the optical system support (Figure
4-39, ) and secure the fixing screws (Figure 4-39, ).
4. Recover the big shielding box of the laser assembly.
4-111
Hardware System
Figure 4-39 Assembly drawing of the laser control board (1)
1----Optical system support 2----Control board support
Figure 4-40 Assembly drawing of the laser control board (2)
1----Support 4----Laser control board

2----Fixing screws of the laser control 5----Fixing screw of
board support (M3x8) pre-amplification board (M3x6)
3----Control board support
Volumetric board
Refer to Figure 4-41 for the position of the volumetric board in the analyzer and information of
its assemblies. To ensure that the board is correctly installed in the analyzer, please do strictly
as instructed below:
1. 4 ) on the support (Figure 4-41,

Put the volumetric tube (Figure 4-41, 2 ), and adjust
it in place.
2. Put the volumetric board (Figure 4-41,

3 ) on the corresponding position of the
4-112
Hardware System
enclosure (Figure 4-41,

1 ), and align the positioning holes at four corners.
3. Put the assemblies of step (1) on the volumetric board, and adjust the positioning
holes as well. That is, the four positioning holes of the enclosure, volumetric board
and support shall coincide. Fix them with screws (Figure 4-41,
5 ).
Figure 4-41 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board
1----enclosure 4----volumetric tube

2----two-way self-retention valve 5----Cross-recessed panhead
screw M3X6
3----volumetric tube 6----three-way self-retention
valve
Verification
1. Install the pre-amplification board in the analyzer correctly (Remember: cover the
laser assembly with the shielding box).
2. Perform a standard sample analysis and then check the scattergram. Normal
scattergram indicates that you have replaced the pre-amplification board successfully.
4-113
Hardware System
Laser control board
3. Install the laser control board in the analyzer by fixing the screws and connecting the
laser tube and temperature sensor to the board properly. Start up the analyzer.
4. Perform a background count. Enter "Main""Service""Status""Vol. & Cur."

screen successively, and check whether the laser tube current is within the normal
range.
Volumetric board
1. Install the volumetric board in the analyzer by fixing the screws and connecting cables
to the board properly. Start up the analyzer.
2. Perform a sample analysis and check the status of the indicators on the volumetric
board. When the metering tube is empty, the indicators are off; when the liquid in the
metering tube passes through the photocoupler, the corresponding indicator
illuminate (OP1 to D1, OP2 to D2).
4-114
Hardware System
4.9.6 Error analysis and processing
Table 4-105 Error analysis and processing of the pre-amplification board
Serial Judging Error

Error Type Causes of the error Recommended action
No. criteria Probability
The voltage at The connection cable with the driver board is
Medium Replug or replace the cable.
the test point improperly connected or the cable is broken.
+12V is not equal See the troubleshooting
Error of 12V System The power of the main unit is erroneous or 12V
1 to 12V0.6V; Low sections of the driver board
power error power from the driver board is erroneous.
ripple noise is and power board.
greater than Dry joint in L1 - L2 or C25 - C29, or their values Re-joint or replace the
Low
50mV. are erroneous. components.
The voltage at
the test point
U1 is of dry joint or erroneous; capacitor C1-C5,
Error of -12V Board -12V is below Re-joint or replace the
2 C22-C24, or L22 are of dry joint, or their values Low
power error 10V; ripple noise components.
are erroneous.
is greater than
50mV.
Non-expected Board error The output signal The low angle board is mistakenly installed in
Low Install the right board.
value output (the error of of the high angle the position of the high angle board.
wrongly board is too small
installed (suppose it is due R2, R4 or R6 resistance is erroneous or of dry Re-joint or replace the
Low
board is a to circuit problem joint. components.
system error) only)
4-115
Hardware System
The output signal The high angle board is mistakenly installed in

Low Install the right board.
of the low angle the position of the low angle board.
board is too big
(suppose it is due R2, R7 or R8 resistance is erroneous or of dry Re-joint or replace the
Low
to circuit problem joint. components.
only)
The output signal
The photo diode D1 is erroneous; or R1 is of dry Re-joint or replace the
of the Low
joint or its value is erroneous. components.
pre-amplification
board (high angle
or low angle) is
almost zero or
Re-joint or replace the
too small U3 or U4 is of dry joint or erroneous. Low
components.
(suppose it is due
to circuit problem
only).
The output signal
of the
pre-amplification
board (high angle
or low angle) is The operational amplifier of U2 or U3 is
Low Replace the component
saturated (close damaged
to the voltage of
the positive
power or the
negative power)
4-116
Hardware System
The width of the

High angle: R2, R7 or R8, C13, C21-C22 is of
pre-amplification
dry joint or value is erroneous; low angle: R2, R4 Re-joint or replace the
board (high angle Low
or R6, C13, C21-C22 is of dry joint or value is components.
or low angle) is
erroneous.
erroneous.
Laser control board
Table 4-106 Error analysis and processing of the laser control board
Serial Error Error

Error Judging criteria Causes of the error Recommended action
No. Type Probability
The connection cable with the driver
board is improperly connected or the Medium Replug or replace the cable.
cable is broken.
The voltage at the test
Error of +12V System The power of the main unit is erroneous See the troubleshooting
1 point +12V is not
power error or 12V power from the driver board is Low sections of the driver board
12V0.6V.
erroneous. and power board.
Something is wrong with the on-board Check the U4, U7 and
Medium
power control circuit circuits around.
Something is wrong with the on-board Check the U4, U5, U7, U8
Medium
The voltage at the test power control circuit and circuits around.
Error of -12V
2 Board error point -12V is not less Check the connection, power
power Something is wrong with the +12V
than -8V. Medium from the driver board, U4, U7
power.
and circuits around.
4-117
Hardware System

Error of 5V System The voltage of the pin 8 cable is broken.
2
power error in J1 is not 5V0.25V The power of the main unit is erroneous See the troubleshooting
or 12V power from the driver board is Low sections of the driver board
erroneous. and power board.
In normal operation, the
Control signal System voltage of the
3 cable is broken.
error error NCONTROL signal is no
The control signal from the driver board See the troubleshooting
greater than 0.8V. Low
is erroneous. section of the driver board.
S3 is spot welded, but

Change the jumper welding
S1 and S2 are not spot Error made by the outsourcing supplier Low
4 Jumper error Board error per the theoretical value
welded. This is the
methods adopted.
Reference The voltage at TPVREF

5 Board error Chip U1 is of dry joint or erroneous. Low Re-joint or replace U1.
voltage error is not 2.5V0.1V
The voltage at the test The sliding variable resistor VR1 is of Re-joint or replace the
The reference point TP2VREF is not at dry joint or is erroneous, or the jumper is component or weld the
Low
voltage its normal working value erroneous (the control method adopted jumper per the theoretical
6 controlling Board error (its voltage should be currently). value.
laser intensity between 4V to 4.1V U2 is of dry joint or erroneous; R13 or
is erroneous under current R14 is of dry joint or their values are Low
components.
adjustment condition) erroneous.
4-118
Hardware System
U3 is of dry joint or erroneous; R3-R6 or

R18-R20 are of dry joint or their values Low
components.
Board error are erroneous.
Non-expected The voltage at the test
(error of the The laser tube is damaged or Re-connect or replace the
value of laser point TPILD is not
laser tube or connection cable is erroneous (bad Medium connection cable; or replace
7 intensity between 0.8 and 2.0V
connection connection or short-circuit). the laser tube.
control signal (under current
is system Error of 5V power Low See No.2 above.
TPILD output adjustment condition)
error) U2, Q1 is of dry joint or erroneous; R15,
R16, R1, R21, R7, R8, R10, or R11 is of Low
components.
dry joint, or their values are not correct.
Volumetric board
Table 4-107 Error analysis and processing of the volumetric board
Serial Error Judging

Error Causes of the error Probability Recommended action
No. Type criteria
The connection cable with the signal board is
Medium Replug or replace the cable.
The voltage at the improperly connected or the cable is broken.
Error of 12V System
1 test point TPPWR See the troubleshooting
power error The power of the main unit is erroneous or 12V
is not 12V0.6V. Low sections of the signal board
power from the signal board is erroneous.
and power board.
The voltage
Error of 5V Board between the two U5 is damaged (or of dry joint); or C6 or C7 is Replace or re-joint the
2 Low
power error ends of C7 is not erroneous (or of dry joint). component.
5V0.25V.
4-119
Hardware System
Error of The output voltage Something is wrong with the 5V power. Low See No.2 above.
Board
3 comparator of TP1 is not
error Chip U4 is of dry joint or erroneous. Low Replace or re-joint U4.
reference power 2.5V0.05V
The connection cable with the signal board is
The voltage of Medium Replug or replace the cable.
improperly connected or the cable is broken.
Control signal System NVMBLED signal
4
error error is no less than The control signal from the signal processing Refer to the troubleshooting
Low
0.8V. board is erroneous. section of the signal board.
Control signal error. Medium See No.4 above.

Error of
The reference Error of control circuit (Q1 or Q2 is erroneous or
constant-current Board
5 voltage of TP7 is of dry joint; R28, R29, R30, R31, R32, and R8 is Replace or re-joint the
source of error Medium
not 2.5V0.05V. of dry joint or their resistance values are component.
photocoupler
erroneous).
Adjust the VR4 or VR3 to turn
The VR4 or VR3 is not properly adjusted. Medium
TP2 or TP3 to 2.55-2.65V.
Non-expected The voltage at test
Board The photocoupler OP1 or OP2 is erroneous (or Replace or re-joint the
6 value of TP2 or point TP2 or TP3 Low
error of dry joint). component.
TP3 voltage is not 2.55-2.65V
Error of constant-current source of photocoupler. Medium See No.5 above.
Error of 5V power Low See No.2 above.
7 The indicators Board Indicator D1 or D2 D1 or D2 is damaged (or of dry joint). Low Replace or re-joint D1 or D2.
do not work error is not on when Error of 5V power Low See No.2 above.
normally liquid passes TP1 reference power is erroneous. Low See No.3 above.
4-120
Hardware System
through the
volumetric tube; or
the indicator is on The voltage at test point TP2 or TP3 is not
Medium See No.6 above.
although there is 2.55-2.65V.
no liquid in the
volumetric tube.
4-121
Hardware System
4.10 Sample Transport Board

4.10.1 Introduction
The sample transport board of BC-5800 realizes the transferring function of the motors and
scanners in the sample transport unit, the driving function of sensors and the signal detecting
function.
Section 1.2 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the sample
transport board.

Function
Transferring the connection wire between the X direction loading motor and the Y direction
feeding motor;
Transferring the scanner connection wire;
Driving sensors, receiving, amplifying, shaping and outputting signals;
Description
For motors and scanners, only the corresponding sockets are provided for the electricity
connection of motors/scanners.
There are 10 sensors in the sample transport unit, which include 7 position detection
photocouplers, 1 position detection sensitive switch, 1 tube detection photocoupler and 1
reserved sample detection photocoupler. The sample transport board drives the 10 sensor,
receives and amplifies signals, and upload status signals (high/low electrical level) to the
upper control unit via interfaces.
The position of sample transport interface on the board is shown in Figure 4-42.
4-122
Hardware System
Figure 4-42 Interface layout of the sample transport board
There is 1 interface between the board and each sensor of the sample transport unit; see
Table 4-108 for their definitions.
Table 4-108 The interface between the sample transport board and each sensor of the
sample transport unit (J1)
Electrical Electrical
level level
Positive end
of the
+5V power light-emitting 5VDC
1 VCC 2 ANODE_TUBE
supply tube of tube 10mA
detection
5VDC photocoupler
50mA Negative end
of the
light-emitting 2.5VDC
3 GND Ground 4 CATHODE_TUBE
tube of tube 10mA
detection
photocoupler
4-123
Hardware System
Start
position
signal of
+5V power 5VDC
5 XL_S_FS the X 6 VCC
supply 50mA
direction
loading
motor
Tube
+5V power
7 VCC 8 HAVE detection
supply 5VDC
signal
50mA
+5V power
9 GND Ground 10 VCC
supply
Stop
position
signal of
5VDC
11 XL_E_FS the X 12 GND Ground
50mA
direction
loading
motor
+5V power +5V power
13 VCC 14 VCC
supply supply
5VDC Sample
50mA volume
15 GND Ground 16 SAMPLEQ
detection
signal
Start
position
signal of
+5V power
17 YRET_FS the Y 18 VCC
supply
direction
5VDC
feeding
50mA
motor
+5V power
19 VCC 20 GND Ground
supply 5VDC
50mA +5V power
21 GND Ground 22 VCC
supply
Signal of
the right
position of Unloader
23 YRIGHT_FS 24 XUL_S
Y direction reset signal
feeding
motor
+5V power 5VDC +5V power 5VDC
25 VCC 26 VCC
supply 50mA supply 50mA
4-124
Hardware System

Signal of
the left Signal alerting
position of that the
29 YLEFT_FS 30 XUL_E_FS
Y direction unloading tray
feeding is full
motor
31 GND Ground 32 No contact
Signal
indicating
5VDC
that X No
33 YVALID_FS 50mA 34
direction contact
loading is
in place
There are 2 interfaces between the sample transport board and the X direction and Y
direction step motors of the sample transport unit. See Table 4-109 - Table 4-110.
Table 4-109 Interfaces between the sample transport board and the X direction and Y
direction step motors of the sample transport unit (J3)
Electrical
level
Connecting the BN
1 ASLX-BN phase of the X
direction motor
Connecting the B
2 ASLX-B phase of the X
direction motor
24VDC/1A
Connecting the AN
3 ASLX-AN phase of the X
direction motor
Connecting the A
4 ASLX-A phase of the X
direction motor
Table 4-110 Interfaces between the sample transport board and the X direction and Y
direction step motors of the sample transport unit (J4)
Electrical
level
4-125
Hardware System
Connecting the BN
1 ASY-BN phase of the Y
direction motor
Connecting the B
2 ASY-B phase of the Y
direction motor
3 No contact No connection 24VDC/1A
Connecting the AN
4 ASY-AN phase of the Y
direction motor
Connecting the A
5 ASY-A phase of the Y
direction motor
There are 3 interfaces between the sample transport board and the driver board. See Table
4-111 - Table 4-113.
Table 4-111 Interfaces between the sample transport board and the sample
transporting sensors of the driver board (J2)
Pin Name Description Electrical level

Signal output of the left position of Y
1 YLEFT_OUT 5VDC/50mA
direction feeding motor
Signal output indicating that X

2 YVALID_OUT 5VDC/50mA
direction loading is in place
Signal output of the right position of
3 YRIGHT_OUT 5VDC/50mA
Y direction feeding motor
Start position signal output of the Y
4 YRET_OUT 5VDC/50mA
direction feeding motor
5 HAVE_OUT Tube detection signal output 5VDC/50mA

Stop position signal output of the X
6 XL_E_OUT 5VDC/50mA
direction loading motor
Sample volume detection signal
7 SAMPLEQ_OUT 5VDC/50mA
output (cancelled temporarily)
Start position signal output of the X

8 XL_S_OUT 5VDC/50mA
direction loading motor
911 VCC 5V power supply 5VDC/800mA
4-126
Hardware System
Signal output alerting that the

10 XUL_S_OUT 5VDC/50mA
unloading tray is full
12 XUL_E_OUT Unloader reset signal output 5VDC/50mA
TUBE_CTR The constant current source control
13 signal of tube detection 5VDC/50mA
photocoupler
14 GND Ground /
15 SCANNER_TRIGGER Scanner TRIGGER signal 5VDC/1mA
16 SCANNER_OUT1 Scanner output signal 1 5VDC/10mA

17 SCANNER_TXD Scanner data output signal 5VDC/100mA
19 SCANNER_RXD Scanner data input signal 5VDC/100mA

Table 4-112 Interfaces between the sample transport board and the sample
transporting motors of the driver board (J5)
Electrical
level
Connecting the BN phase control terminal of the X direction
1 ASLX-BN
motors
Connecting the B phase control terminal of the X direction
2 ASLX-B
motors
Connecting the AN phase control terminal of the X direction

3 ASLX-AN
motors
Connecting the A phase control terminal of the X direction
4 ASLX-A
motors
24VDC/1A
Connecting the BN phase control terminal of the Y direction
5 ASY-BN
motors
Connecting the B phase control terminal of the Y direction

6 ASY-B
motors
Connecting the AN phase control terminal of the Y direction
7 ASY-AN
motors
Connecting the A phase control terminal of the Y direction
8 ASY-A
motors
4-127
Hardware System
Table 4-113 Interfaces between sample transport board and the scanner of the driver
board (J6)
Pin Name Description Electrical level

1 VCC 5V power supply 5VDC/260mA
Scanner data output
2 SCANNER_TXD 5VDC/100mA
signal
3 SCANNER_RXD Scanner data input signal 5VDC/100mA
4 GND Ground /
Scanner TRIGGER
9 SCANNER_TRIGGER 5VDC/1mA
signal

5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 13, NC Empty pin
15
Assembly Drawing
The assembly drawing of the sample transport board is shown in Figure 4-43.
4-128
Hardware System
Figure 4-43 Assembly drawing of the sample transport board

There is no adjustable component; test points are shown in Table 4-114, and their positions
are shown in Figure 4-43.
Table 4-114 Test points definition of the sample transport board

+5V analog power from the driver
TP6 VCC
board
Detection signal of the unloader reset
TP1 XUL_S photocoupler in the sample transport
unit
TP2 HAVE Detection signal of the tube detection
4-129
Hardware System
photocoupler; when tubes are

available, the voltage is less than
0.75V, while without tubes, the voltage
is greater than 0.75V
Detection signal of sample volume
TP3 SAMPLEQ detection photocoupler (reserved, not
in use)
The voltage of the constant current
TP4 CATHODE_TUBE source of tube detection photocoupler
is 2.5V0.1V
Tube detection signal; when tubes are
TP5 HAVE_OUT available, the electrical level is high,
without tubes, the electrical level is low

Purpose
Please replace the sample transport board according to below procedure.
Tool
Removal
Installation
Verification
1. Install the sample transport board in the analyzer by fixing the screws and
connecting cables to the board properly. Start up the analyzer.
2. Select autoloader mode and start counting, check if any errors concerning the
autoloader unit are reported.
4.10.6 Error analysis and processing

As the main function of the sample transport board is to transfer the connection wires among
scanners, motors and the driver board, it does not process any electrical signal, so when
errors in scanners or X/Y direction motor are reported, check whether the sample transport
board is securely connected to the sample transport unit and the driver board.
After the possibility of poor connection is excluded, errors of scanners and motors can be
cleared according to the troubleshooting method of the driver board.
4-130
Hardware System
The table below introduces the circuit problems concerning sensors in the sample transport
unit and the ways to troubleshoot them.
4-131
Hardware System
Table 4-115 Error analysis and processing of the sample transport board
Serial Judging Causes Recommended

Error Type Probability
No. criteria of the error action
The
connection
cable with the
driver board Replug or replace
Medium
is improperly the cable.
The voltage connected or
at the test the cable is
Error of 5V System
1 point TP6 is broken.
power error
not The power of
5V0.25V; the main unit See the
is erroneous troubleshooting
or 5V power Low sections of the driver
from the board and the power
driver board board.
is erroneous.
U3 or U2 is
When tubes damaged (or
Board
are of dry joint);
error
available, the or R29 and
(suppose
Undetected voltage of R30 are Re-joint or replace
2 it is due Low
tubes TP2 is less erroneous the components.
to circuit
than 0.75V, (incorrect
problem
while the resistance
only)
voltage of value or dry
TP5 is of low joint).
electrical Pin 5 of J2 is
level short-circuited Low Replug the cable
to the ground
When tubes The
are resistance Replace the
Low
available, the value of R8 is component.
voltage of incorrect
TP2 is The tube
greater then detection Replace the
Medium
0.75V photocoupler component.
is erroneous
4-132
Hardware System
The output
current of the
constant
current
source is too
great; the
Replace the
voltage of U5 Low
component
is above 2.6V
or the
resistance
value of R16
is below 265
ohm.
U3 or U2 is
damaged (or
Board When tubes
of dry joint);
error are not
or R29 and
(suppose available, the
Over-detected R30 are Re-joint or replace
3 it is due voltage of Low
tubes erroneous the components.
to circuit TP2 is above
(incorrect
problem 0.75V, while
resistance
only) the voltage
value or dry
of TP5 is of
joint).
high
Pin 5 of J2 is
electrical
short-circuited
level Low Replug the cable
to the power
supply
When tubes The
are not resistance
Re-joint or replace
available, the value of R8 is Low
the component.
voltage of erroneous or
TP2 is less it is of dry joint
than 0.75V The tube
detection Replace the
Medium
photocoupler component.
is erroneous
4-133
Hardware System
The output
current of the
constant
current
source is too
small; the
Replace the
voltage of U5 Low
component
(TP4) is
below 2.4V or
the resistance
value of R16
is above 275
ohm.
U5 is
erroneous, or
The the resistance
reference values of R11,
Replace the
voltage of U5 R13, R14 and Low
component
(TP4) is not R16 are
2.4-2.6V erroneous, or
Q2 is
erroneous
Pin 13 of J2 is
short-circuited
Low Replug the cable
to the power
Reference
supply
voltage of the
Control signal
constant Board
4 output from
current error
the driver See the
source is
The board is troubleshooting
incorrect Low
reference erroneous section of the driver
voltage of U5 (output high board
(TP4) is electrical
almost zero level)
or too small Q1 or Q2 is
erroneous (or
of dry joint),
or R11, R13, Re-joint or replace
Low
R14 and R16 the component.
are erroneous
(or of dry
joint)
4-134
Hardware System
Board
error Pin 8 of J2 R6 and R20
Start position
(suppose outputs are erroneous
circuit error Re-joint or replace
5 it is due abnormal or U1 is Low
the X direction the component.
to circuit electrical erroneous (or
loading motor
problem level of dry joint)
only)
Board
Stop position
circuit error of Re-joint or replace
the X direction the component.
loading motor
only)
Board
Start position
circuit error Re-joint or replace
the Y direction the component.
feeding motor
only)
Board
Right position
feeding motor
only)
Board
Left position
feeding motor
only)
Board
X direction (suppose outputs are erroneous
Re-joint or replace
10 loading circuit it is due abnormal or U1 is Low
the component.
error to circuit electrical erroneous (or
only)
4-135
Hardware System
Board
Unloader
reset Re-joint or replace
detection the component.
circuit error
only)
Pin 10 of J2
outputs high
electrical
U3 or U2 is
level while
damaged (or
Board the voltage
of dry joint);
error of TP1 is
or R27 and
Unloader tray (suppose less than
R28 are Re-joint or replace
12 detection it is due 0.2V; or pin Low
erroneous the component.
circuit error to circuit 10 of J2
(incorrect
problem outputs low
resistance
only) electrical
value or dry
level while
joint).
the voltage
of TP1 is
above 0.3V
Pin 7 of J2
outputs high
electrical U4 or U2 is
level while damaged (or
Board
the voltage of dry joint);
error
Sample of TP1 is or R31 and
(suppose
volume less than R32 are Re-joint or replace
13 it is due Low
detection 0.2V; or pin 7 erroneous the component.
to circuit
circuit error of J2 outputs (incorrect
problem
low electrical resistance
only)
level while value or dry
the voltage joint).
of TP1 is
above 0.3V
4-136
Hardware System
4.11 Sample Detecting Board

4.11.1 Introduction
In BC-5800 five-part differential hematology analyzer, the sample detecting board mainly
controls the on/off and rotation speed of the DIFF and BASO DC stirring motors and detects
whether the aspirating volume meets the test requirement in the course of autoloading test.
The principle of DC motor on/off and rotation speed control is the detecting of motor on/off
control signal from the driver board by MCU. If motor start signal is detected, the motors will
start up, otherwise they will stop. When the motors are rotating, the MCU detects the speed
pulse signals from motor sensors instantly; the rotation speed of the motors can be obtained
by MCU calculation. And then the duty ratio of the motor driving voltage can be adjusted
according to the rotation speed to realize control over the range of the rotation speed.
The principle of aspirating volume detection is the sample detecting board finishes de-bounce
and level converting of the signals detected by the sensors, and finally send out the LVTTL
level signal which meets the need of the input signal of the driver board.
Section 4.11 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the sample
detecting board.

The sample detecting board consists of sample detecting circuit and closed loop control circuit
of motors.
The sample detecting circuit includes the circuit which obtains the current signals of sensors,
I-V converting circuit and level converting circuit;
The closed loop control circuit of motors includes the circuit which obtains the rotation speed
pulse of motors, MCU control unit and motor driving circuit.
Function
DIFF and BASO DC stirring motor on/off and speed control;
Sample signal detection during piercing and aspiration (pre-blood);
Interface connecting and compatibility.
See Figure 4-44 for the functional block diagram of the sample detecting board.
4-137
Hardware System
Figure 4-44 Block diagram of the sample detecting board
4.11.3 Description
Motor on/off control:
The sample detecting board monitors the motor on/off signal from the driver board, when start
signal is detected, the motor driving circuit turns on, otherwise it is off.
Motor speed control:
The sample detecting board divides the signals sent from the motor speed detecting
photocoupler into two paths. One is sent to the driver board for the monitoring of motor speed;
the other is sent to the MCU on the sample detecting board for closed loop control of motor
speed: the MCU can calculate motor speed using its internal timer, judge motor speed range,
and adjust the control signal duty ratio of the motor driving circuit, so that the duty ratio of
motor driving voltage can be adjusted and the rotation speed of motors can be stabilized.
Detecting and converting pre-blood signals
The sample detecting board finishes the I-V converting, voltage following and level converting
of the signals sent from the pre-blood sample detecting sensors, and finally sends the signals
to the driver board.

The board has 3 interface sockets, which are J1, J2 and J3. Their positions on the board are
shown in Figure 4-45.
4-138
Hardware System
J8 J7 J6 J1
J4
J5
J3
J9
J2
Figure 4-45 Interface layout of the sample detecting board
Table 4-116 External interfaces on the sample detecting board

Connecting the sensors of
The interface
J1 the syringe unit and stirring 20
is not in use
motors
J2 Connecting sample sensors 8 /
Connecting the driver board Output to the
J3 20
driver board
Connecting the sensors of
J4 the syringe unit and stirring 24 /
motors
Interface of the motor on/ff Input from the
J5 4
control signal driver board
The interface
J6 5V DC motor interface 4
is not in use
J7 12V DC motor interface 4 /
J8 12V power supply interface 2 /
Interface of MCU program
J9 downloading and 5 /
debugging
4-139
Hardware System
The interface is not used in BC-5800
J2 is connected to sample detecting sensors. It provides power supply and signal input for the
sensor. See Table 4-117 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Pin No. Name I/O Description

1 / / /
2 / / /
3 / / /
4 / / /
Pre-blood sensor
It is connected with the white line of the
5 receiver tube collector O
pre-blood sensor. The level is 5V5%.
connecting line
Pre-blood sensor
It is connected with the green line of
6 receiver tube emitter I
the pre-blood sensor.
connecting line
Pre-blood sensor LED
It is connected with the red line of the
7 positive end O
pre-blood sensor.
connecting line
Pre-blood sensor LED
It is connected with the black line of the
8 negative end -
pre-blood sensor.
connecting line
J3 is connected to the J21 of the driver board. It provides voltage for the sample detecting
board and outputs the detecting signal. The distribution and definition of its pins are the same
as those of J21 on the driver board, which is illustrated in 4.3.2 of this manual.
J4 is connected to sensors of the syringe unit and stirring motors. It provides power supply and
signal input for the syringe position sensor and the stirring motor speed sensor. See Table
4-118 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Pin No. Name I/O Pin No. Name I/O

The power supply end of The power supply end of
the sensor detecting the the sensor detecting the
1 O 2 O
start position of whole start position of sample
blood aspiration syringe injection syringe
3 Digital ground / 4 Digital ground /
4-140
Hardware System

The signal input end of the The signal input end of the
sensor detecting the start sensor detecting the start
9 I 10 I
position of whole blood position of sample
aspiration syringe injection syringe
The power supply end of
the sensor detecting
11 / / 12 O
stirring motor speed of the
BASO bath
13 / / 14 Digital ground /
The signal input end of the
sensor detecting stirring
15 / / 16 I
motor speed of the BASO
bath
The power supply end of
the sensor detecting
17 / / 18 O
stirring motor speed of the
DIFF bath
19 / / 20 Digital ground /
The signal input end of the
sensor detecting stirring
21 / / 22 I
motor speed of the DIFF
bath
23 / / 24 / /
J5 is the on/ff control signal input end of the stirring motor, it is connected to J31 on
the driver board. See Table 4-119 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Table 4-119 Definition of pins in J5
Signal
Pin No. Name Description
Type
DCM2_IN DIFF stirring motor on/off control
1 TTL
signals
2 VCC \ +5V
DCM1_IN BASO stirring motor on/off
3 TTL
control signals
4 VCC \ +5V
J6 is the driving interface of 5V DC motor; it is not used in BC-5800.
4-141
Hardware System
J7 is the driving interface of 12V DC motor; it is connected with DIFF and BASO stirring motors.
See Table 4-120 for the distribution and definition of its pins.
Signal
Type
DCM2_ON DIFF stirring motor driving
1 \
signals
2 12V0 \ +12V
DCM1_ON BASO stirring motor driving
3 \
signals
4 12V0 \ +12V
J8 is the 12V power input end of the sample detecting board. It provides power supply to the
12V motor and is connected to J4 on the power board. See Table 4-121 for the distribution and
Signal
Type
Power
1 \ \
ground
2 12V0 \ +12V
J9 is the interface for program downloading and debugging of the MCU on the sample
detecting board. It is not connected with any other boards. See Table 4-122 for the distribution
Description Signal
Pin No. Name
Type
Receiving end of serial
1 PC_RX ports of the upper control TTL
unit
Sending end of serial
2 PC_TX ports of the upper control TTL
unit
3 DGND Digital ground /
4 PSEN Program enabling end TTL
4-142
Hardware System
(not in use)
Reset end (low level
5 RESET TTL
reset)
Assembly Drawing
See Figure 4-46 for the assembly drawing of the sample detecting board.
Figure 4-46 Assembly drawing of the sample detecting board

Table 4-123 LED function definition of the driver board
D2 3.3V power indicator
D8 MCU working status indicator, flashes every 0.5s when the mid control
unit runs normally

Serial Name Description

No.
Pre-blood sensor input signal (before level
1 TP1
conversion)
2 TP3 3.3V power supply
3 TP4 Digital ground
4 TP5 5V power input
Negative end of the MCU working status indicator
5 TP6
D8
4-143
Hardware System
6 TP7 5V power supply

7 TP9 Control end of the MCU working status indicator
8 TP12 DIFF stirring motor on/off control signals
9 TP13 BASO stirring motor on/off control signals
10 TP14 BASO stirring motor PWM control signals
11 TP15 DIFF stirring motor PWM control signals
12 TP16 Input signals of BASO stirring motor sensor
13 TP17 Input signals of DIFF stirring motor sensor
Pre-blood sensor input signal (after level
14 FRONT
conversion)

Purpose
The sample detecting board is a pre-set part in the whole device. When board failure occurs
normal operation of the device. Please replace the sample detecting board according to below
procedures.
Tool
Removal
1. Open the top cover (refer to Section 5.2.4 for details);
2. Loosen and remove the two small panhead screws (M4X8) which fix the main board
and the signal board assembly with 107 cross-headed screwdriver;
3. Turn up the main board and the signal board assemblies and support them with the
PCB assembly stop bar;
4. Pull out the three electric plugs on the sample detecting board;
5. Loosen the 4 cross-recessed panhead screws (M2X6) (They are used to fix the
sample detecting board) with 101 cross-headed screwdriver and remove the sample
detecting board (Figure 4-47);
4-144
Hardware System
Figure 4-47 Removing the sample detecting board
1----Fixing board of the sample detecting 3----Cross-recessed panhead screw M2X6

board
2----Sample detecting board 4----Front cover
Installation
Installation is the opposite operation of removal.
Note:
1. If the pipe is scratched when it is installed, please replace it;
Verification
1. Inspect whether all components are installed and fixed well;
2. Inspect whether the electric plugs are connected correctly.
3. Inspect whether the pipes are connected correctly.
4. In auto-sampling mode, conduct one normal sample test and one blank background
test successively. If "Insufficient aspiration" are not prompted for the normal sample,
but "Abnormal sample" or "Insufficient aspiration" can be prompted in background test,
then the replacement is successful.
5. If abnormal speed of stirring motors were reported before the replacement and the
error disappears after the replacement, that means the replacement is successful.
4-145
Hardware System
Table 4-125 Error analysis and processing of the sample detecting board
Serial
Description Error analysis and processing
No.
1 Possible causes: There is something wrong
with the input voltage +5V; Pre-blood sample
detecting sensor cannot work well; The optical
path of the pre-blood sample sensor is abnormal.
2 Solutions: Measure the voltage of TP7 with
multimeter. If the voltage is within the range of
+5V0.25V, then it is not the problem of the power
supply. If the input voltage exceeds the above range,
then inspect J21.13 and connection cables of the
driver board and solve the error of the power supply.
When there is no blood in If the +5V power supply works well, inspect whether
1 pre-blood detecting tube, the optical path of the pre-blood sample detecting
VTP1<1.5V sensor is covered by dirt. If yes, eliminate the dirt
and restore the optical path. Otherwise there is no
problem with the optical path. If the power supply
and optical path both work well, then let air into the
pre-blood detecting tube, and adjust the variable
resistance VR1. If we can make VTP11.5V, then
after VTP11.5V, fix the variable resistance VR1, and
the error of the pre-blood sensor can be eliminated.
If after adjustment of VR1, it cannot be 1.5V, then the
pre-blood sensor is damaged and needs to be
replaced.
1 Possible causes: R6 is open-circuited; D1 is
When there is no blood in
open-circuited; Q1 is damaged
the pre-blood detecting
2 2 Solutions: Measure R6 or D1 with multimeter. If
tube and VTP1 1.5V,
there are not open-circuited, then Q1 is damaged
then VFRONT>0.8V
and needs to be replaced.
1 Possible causes: The optical path of the sensor
is abnormal; The pre-blood sensor is damaged.
When the pre-blood 2 Solutions: Inspect the installation of the pre-blood
3 detecting tube is full of sensor. If it is installed correctly, then the optical path
blood, VTP2 1.5V is normal. Otherwise install it correctly. If the optical
path is normal, then the pre-blood sensor is
damaged and needs to be replaced.
4-146
Hardware System
Troubleshooting special errors

Troubleshooting rotation speed abnormity of the stirring motors
First check whether the abnormities in BASO and DIFF stirring motors are reported at the
same time. If yes, check whether J3, J4, J5, J7, J8 and J21 are properly connected with cables.
If the cables are well connected, check whether MCU indicator D8 on the sample detecting
board flashes. If it flashes normally, that means there is no problem with the power supply. If
D8 is always on, then the MCU U2 is damaged, the sample detecting board needs to be
replaced. If D2 is off, check the voltage of TP5 with a multimeter to see if it is within the range
of+5V0.25V. If it not within the range, that means something is wrong with the input power
supply, please check its connection cable with the driver board; if the voltage of TP5 is normal,
then the power conversion chip U6 is damaged, the sample detecting board needs to be
replaced.
If speed abnormity is only reported for BASO (or DIFF) stirring motors, please view the speed
of BASO (or DIFF) motors on the self-test screen, if its speed is less than 1200 turns per
second, that means the motors are damaged and need to be replaced. If the speed of BASO
(or DIFF) motors is zero, but they can rotate normally, that means something is wrong with the
photocoupler in BASO (or DIFF) channel. Please check if the photocoupler is covered by dirt, if
yes, clear the dirt. If the error persists after the above operation, that means the photocoupler
is damaged and needs to be replace. If the speed of the motors is zero, and motors do not
move, the BASO (or DIFF) motor driving circuit is damaged, the sample detecting board needs
to be replaced.
4-147
Hardware System
4.12 Pressure Detecting Board

4.12.1 Introduction
In BC-5800 hematology analyzer, the pressure detection board has 5 pressure circuits which
measure the pressure of the vacuum chamber (2 channels), pressure chamber (2 channels)
and sheath fluid (1 channel) respectively.
Section 4.12 of this manual is the servicing and troubleshooting guideline of the pressure
detecting board.

Pressure detecting board consists of pressure detecting circuit and output interfaces.
Function
Detecting pressure of the vacuum chamber, the pressure chamber and the sheath fluid.
See Figure 4-48 Block diagram of the pressure detecting board for the functional block
diagram of the pressure detecting board.
250KPa
160KPa
70KPa J1 J19
-40KPa
Pressure
-85KPa
detecting Driver
board board
Figure 4-48 Block diagram of the pressure detecting board
4.12.3 Description
The pressure detecting board converts pressure into voltage signals via 5 channels of
pressure detecting chips, and then outputs the voltage signals to the driver board, which
collects and calculates the voltage signals.

There is only 1 interface on the pressure detecting board. See Figure 4-49 for position of the
interface.
4-148
Hardware System
Figure 4-49 Interface layout of the pressure detecting board
J1 is the only external interface on the pressure detecting board. It has 8 pins. See below for
definitions of the pins:
Table 4-126 Definition of J1 pins
Signal
Type
PSC_1 Signal output of 250Kpa channel Analog
1
pressure detection signal
2
3
PSC_4 Signal output of -40Kpa channel Analog
4
PSC_5 Signal output of -85KPa channel Analog
5
6 PSC_6 Reserved channel (not in use) /
7 AVCC 5V power input /
Assembly Drawing
See Figure 4-50 for the assembly drawing of the pressure detecting board.
4-149
Hardware System
Figure 4-50 Assembly drawing of the pressure detecting board

Table 4-127 Test points definition of the pressure detecting board
Serial Name Description

No.
Signal output of 250Kpa channel pressure
1 TP1
detection
2 TP2
detection
3 TP3
detection
Signal output of -40Kpa channel pressure
4 TP4
detection
Signal output of -85KPa channel pressure
5 TP5
detection

Purpose
The pressure detecting board is a pre-set part in the whole device. When board failure occurs
normal operation of the device. Please replace the pressure detecting board according to
below procedures.
4-150
Hardware System
Tool
Removal
4. Pull out the electric plug on the pressure detecting board;
5. Loosen and remove the two small panhead screws (M4X8) which fix the pressure
detecting board assembly with 107 cross-headed screwdriver;
6. Unplug the 5 pneumatic tubes connected to the pressure detecting board and remove
the board assembly;
7. Loosen the 4 cross-recessed panhead screws (M2X6) (They are used to fix the
pressure detecting board) with 101 cross-headed screwdriver and remove the board.
Installation
Note:
1. If the pipe is scratched when it is installed, please replace it;
Verification
1. Inspect whether all components are installed and fixed well;
2. Inspect whether the electric plugs are connected correctly.
3. Inspect whether the pneumatic tubes are correctly connected with the board and
whether there is air leakage.
4. Check whether the pressures of the 5 channels displayed on the self-test screen is
within the ranges listed in below table:
Pressure
Pressure range
channel
250kPa 225kPa-275kPa
160kPa 155kPa-165kPa
70kPa 65kPa-75Kpa
-40kPa -43kPa-37kPa
-85kPa -82kPa-88kPa
4-151
Hardware System
5. If the pressures of the 5 channels are within above ranges, that means the pressure
detecting board is replaced successfully, otherwise troubleshooting it required.
Troubleshooting abnormal pneumatic pressure
1. If all vacuum and pressure of the system are zero, check the connection between the
pressure detecting board and the driver board/pneumatic tubing, and whether the
pneumatic unit starts normally;
2. If all vacuum and pressure of the system are abnormal and with the too high or too
low pressure value at the same time, check whether the air compressor works
normally. See Chapter 5 (pneumatic system troubleshooting) for a reference of the
method;
3. If only one pressure value is abnormal, check the related regulator and airway for
leakage.
4. If the airway system is normal, the error is due to the pressure sensor failure on the
See the following table for the output voltage and pressure of the pressure sensors:
Pressure Test Relation between sensor output Mid-point
Description
channel Point voltage and pressure value voltage
P represents
250kPa TP1 P = Vout / 0.0045 44.4 25 1.325
pressure, and
160kPa TP2 3.8 its unit is kPa;
P = Vout / 0.0225 8.89 5
70kPa TP3 1.775 Vout represents
-40kPa TP4 2 the voltage of
P = Vout / 0.045 + 4.44 2.5 the test point,
-85kPa TP5 4.025
and its unit is V.
4.12.8 Pressure Calibration

After replace pressure detecting board, the pressure sensors need to be calibrated.
If a barometer is available (the measuring range of the barometer should at less be 270kPa),
perform calibration per below procedure:
1. When the analyzer is on, connect the 5 pneumatic tubes that are connected with the
pressure detecting board to barometers respectively. Measure the voltages of the 5 channels
and record them, for example, the pressures of PS1-PS5 are A, B, C, D and E;
2. Enter software screens "Service""Self-test""T&P Cal.". See Figure 4-51:
4-152
Hardware System
Figure 4-51 Temperature and pressure calibrate screen
3. Select one pressure channel from the "Pressure" tab, e.g. PS (250), the PS1 pressure
calibrate dialog box will pop up;
Figure 4-52 Pressure calibrate screen
4. Fill the A pressure of PS1 channel measured by barometer into "Apparatus", and then
select "Calc.", calibration factor K will be displayed in "New fac.". Click "Save K" without
record the calibration factor, the PS1 pressure calibrate screen will close automatically. PS1
pressure calibration is done.
5. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to calibrate other 4 channels. After calibrate all channels, the
calibration job required after replacing the pressure detecting board is completed.
If a barometer is not available, calibrate per below procedure:
4-153
Hardware System
1. Do not adjust pressure valve randomly before error of the pressure detecting board is
confirmed;
2. After replace the board, enter software screens "Service""Status""Temp. &Pres.". See
below figure:
Figure 4-53 Temperature and pressure status screen
3. Check whether the deviations between the values of the 5 channels and the standard value
are greater than 10%. If yes, that means something is wrong with the pressure system, the
pneumatic unit and pressure valves need to be checked and calibration cannot be performed.
If no, go to Step 4 - pressure calibration.
4. Select "Self-test""T&P Cal.". See Figure 4-51.
5. Select one pressure channel from the "Pressure" tab, e.g. PS1(250), the PS1 pressure
calibrate dialog box will pop up; see Figure 4-52. Enter 250 into "Apparatus", click "Calc.",
and then click "Save K" to finish calibration of the channel.
6. Repeat Step 5 to calibrate other 4 channels. Enter 160, 70, -40 and -85 in to the
"Apparatus" of PS2, PS3, PS4 and PS5 on the calibrate dialog box, and then click "Calc."
and "Save K".
7. After calibrate the pressures of the 5 channels, the calibration job required after replacing
the pressure detecting board is completed.
4.13 SATA and IDE Signal Conversion Board

4.13.1 Introduction
In BC-5800 hematology analyzer, SATA and IDE signal conversion board converts IDE
4-154
Hardware System
interface to SATA interface, meeting the product requirement of using hard disk of SATA
interface.

Function
Convert IDE interface protocol to SATA interface protocol.
J1 is the SATA interface on the board; its definition is as follow:
Figure 4-54 SATA interface
J2 is the power supply interface, its definition is as follow:
4-155
Hardware System
Figure 4-55 Power supply interface
J3 is the IDE interface on the board, its definition is as follow:
Figure 4-56 IDE interface
4.13.3 Assembly Drawing
Figure 4-57 Assembly drawing of the SATA and IDE signal conversion board
4-156
Hardware System

Purpose
Please replace the signal conversion board according to below procedure.
Tool
Removal
4. Unplug hardware data wire and power wire of the hard disk, remove the 4 M4X8
screws from the hard disk assembly; see Figure 4-58;
5. Take off the two 3X8 screws fixing the conversion board to the hard disk.
4-157
Hardware System
Figure 4-58 Removing the hard disk assembly

1----PCB assembly stop bar 2----Cross-headed screws M4X8
Installation
Verification
Connect the power cord and switch on power switch, if the analyzer starts and runs normally,
that means the hard disk is visited correctly.
Troubleshooting
Error description:
The hard disk cannot be visited during starting up, the analyzer fails to start.
Possible causes:
Invalid connection. Connection of the power cord, IDE socket or the SATA interface to the hard
disk is loose; the hard disk is broken; or the SATA and IDE signal conversion board or main
board is broken.
Solutions:
1. Turn off power supply, replug the above connectors and fix them properly. Turn on
power supply to check if the analyzer restores normal status;
2. Turn off power supply, replace the SATA and IDE signal conversion board or main
board, and fix them properly. Turn on power supply to check if the analyzer restores
normal status;
3. Turn off power supply, replace the hard disk and fix it properly. Turn on power supply
to check if the analyzer restores normal status.
4-158
Servicing
5 Servicing
5.1 General
You can service the BC-5800 as per Section 5.2 5.16. For the repairing with verification, you
must follow the procedures strictly to verify the maintenance.
5-1
Servicing
5.2 Disassembling the Panels

5.2.1 Removing the Left Door
Purpose
To disassemble the pneumatic/electric/fluidic parts, etc. inside the analyzer, follow the
procedures to remove the left door.
Tools
Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M4X8 screws as per Figure 5-1.
3. Pull the left door backwards to make it unlocked from the front plate and bottom plate,
and then remove the left door as per Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1 Removing the left door
1-----Front plate 2-----Bottom plate

3-----Left door 4-----Extension bolt
Installation
5-2
Servicing
Install the left door according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
5.2.2 Removing the Right Door

Purpose
Follow the procedures to remove the right door to disassemble the fluidic parts inside the
analyzer.
Tools
Removal
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M4X8 screws as per Figure 5-2.
3. Pull the right door backwards to make it unlocked from the front plate and bottom
plate, then remove the right door as Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Removing the right door
1----Front plate 2----Bottom plate

3----Right door 4----Extension bolt
Installation
Install the right door according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
5-3
Servicing
5.2.3 Opening the Upper Cover

Purpose
Follow the procedures to open the upper cover to disassemble the components on the front
plate.
Removal
Open the upper cover and support it with the stop bar as per
Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 Opening the upper cover
1----Upper cover 2----Hinge

3----Stop bar 4----Front plate
5----Lower cover
Installation
Lift up the upper cover, release the stop bar and then put down the upper cover.
5.2.4 Removing the Top Cover

Purpose
5-4
Servicing
Follow the procedures to remove the top cover to disassemble the optical components, boards,
cables and connectors.
Tools
Removal
2. Open the upper cover as per Section 5.2.3.
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 5 M4X8 screws, 3 on the back plate and 2 on
the front plate (see Figure 5-4).
4. Pull the top cover backwards for 10-30mm, then remove it up from the main unit as
Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 Removing the top cover
1----Panhead screw M4X8 2----Top cover

3----Upper cover 4----Front plate
Installation
Install the top cover according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
5.2.5 Removing the Lower Cover

Purpose
5-5
Servicing
Follow the procedures to remove the lower cover to disassemble the syringe assembly, mixing
& piercing assembly, START switch assembly and reagent preheating assembly.
Tools
Removal
Due to different configurations, you can follow these three procedures to remove the lower
cover.
To remove the lower cover from the analyzer with sample transport unit
2. Remove the left door as per Section 5.2.1.
3. Remove the right door as per Section 5.2.2.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M3X8 screws fixing the protective cover, then
remove the protective cover as Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Removing the lower cover (with autoloader)-1
1----Sample transport unit 2----Protective cover

3----Panhead screw M3X8 4----Lower cover
5-6
Servicing
z When transporting the analyzer, combine the sample transport unit with the
protective cover by fixing 2 M3X8 screws shown in the two circles in Figure
5-5. However, you need not install the two screws when installing the
analyzer.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the sample transport
unit, then move the transport unit outwards and pull out the connecting cables as
show in Figure 5-6.
1----Sample transport unit 2----Panhead screw M4X8

3----Connection board
7. Unplug J2 and J5 connectors from the adapter as shown in Figure 5-7, and then
remove the sample transport unit.
5-7
Servicing
1----Lower cover 2----Sample transport unit

3----Adapter
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 screws fixing the lower cover, 4 M4X8
screws in the middle and 2 M4X12 screws on each side, as shown in Figure 5-8.
5-8
Servicing
1----Front plate 2----Lower cover

3----Cross-recessed countersunk screw 4----Panhead screw M4X8
M4X12
9. Remove the lower cover.
To remove the lower cover from the analyzer with only open vial sampler
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the enclosure of the
closed tube sampler, then remove the enclosure as Figure 5-9.
5-9
Servicing
Figure 5-9 Removing the lower cover (with open vial sampler)-1
1----Lower cover 2----Enclosure of closed tube sampler

3----Panhead screw M3X8
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 screws fixing the lower cover, 4 M4X8
screws in the middle and 2 M4X12 screws on each side, as shown in Figure 5-10.
5-10
Servicing
Figure 5-10 Removing the lower cover (with open vial sampler)-2
1----Front plate 2----Lower cover

3----Cross-recessed countersunk screw 4----Panhead screw M4X8
M4X12
7. Remove the lower cover.
Installation
Install the lower cover according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
5-11
Servicing
5.3 Replacing the Power Supply Assembly

5.3.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the power supply assembly as needed.
5.3.2 Tools
100mm monkey wrench
5.3.3 Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the power supply assembly.
To remove the power supply assembly from the main unit:
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the waterproof cover, and
then remove the waterproof cover as Figure 5-11.
5-12
Servicing
4 3 2 1
Figure 5-11 Removing the power supply assembly-1
1----Waterproof cover 2----Power supply assembly

3----Bottom plate 4----Panhead screw M4X8
4. Unplug J2, J3, J4 and J5 connectors from the power board as Figure 5-12.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 4 M4X8 screws fixing the power supply
assembly, and then remove the power supply assembly as Figure 5-11
To disassemble the power supply assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the power supply
housing as shown in Figure 5-12.
2. Unplug J6 from the power board and remove the power supply housing as Figure
5-12.
3. Use the 107 screwdriver and 100mm monkey wrench to loosen the M4X20 screws
and M4 nuts fixing the fans, then remove the fans as Figure 5-12.
4. Unplug connector from J1 of the power board. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew
the 9 M3X8 screws fixing the power board, and then remove the power board as
5-13
Servicing
Figure 5-12.
5. Disconnect the electric connectors from the power switch terminals. Use the 107
screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the earth wire as Figure 5-12.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the 3516 socket, then
remove the socket as Figure 5-12.
7. Take out the power switch as Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12 Disassembling the power supply assembly
1----Power switch 2----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8

(with washer)
3----Cable protection ring 4----Bottom plate of the power board
5----Power board 6----Cable clamp
7----Nut GB6170 M4 8----Fans and cables
9---- Cross-recessed panhead screw 10----Waterproof cover
M4X20
11----Power supply housing
5.3.4 Installation
Install the power supply assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
5-14
Servicing
1. Connect the switch terminals to cables as Figure 5-13.
Brown indicates the live wire and blue for the neutral wire.
Connect the upper connector of the - terminal to the live wire of the power board
and the lower connector to the neutral wire.
Connect the upper connector of the O terminal to the live wire of the power socket
and the lower connecter to the neutral wire.
Make sure to connect the two upper connectors to the brown wires and the two lower
connectors to the blue wires.
Figure 5-13 Connections of the power switch
2. Direct the earth terminal of the 3516 power socket downwards as Figure 5-13.
3. Install the fans with the text side facing the outside and in the same direction.
5.3.5 Verification
1. Check whether all components are installed and fixed in place.
2. Check whether the power switch connections, the 3516 power socket and fan
direction meet the requirements.
3. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacement.
5-15
Servicing
5.4 Replacing the Touchscreen Assembly

5.4.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the touchscreen assembly.
5.4.2 Tools
5.4.3 Removal
Follow these three procedures to disassemble the touchscreen assembly.
To remove the touchscreen assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug the connector from J1 of the indicator board and the connectors from J5 of the
touch screen control board as Figure 5-14.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the screen ground wire, as
Figure 5-14.
5. Remove the top cover (See Section 5.2.4).
6. Remove the top cover (See Section 5.2.1).
7. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3X6 screws fixing the main board
shielding cover to remove the main board shielding cover as Figure 5-14.
8. Unplug the connecter connecting the J2 and J16 of the main board, remove the
grounding screw and then remove the signal cable of the TFT displayer and the
power cord of the TFT screen converter as Figure 5-14.
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the six PT3X10 screws fixing the touchscreen
assembly to remove the touchscreen assembly as Figure 5-14.
5-16
Servicing
Figure 5-14 Removing the touchscreen assembly (AU screen)
1----Upper cover 2----Cross-recessed panhead screw M4X8

3----Touchscreen assembly 4----Shielding cover of the control board
5----Touchscreen control board 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6
(with lock washer)
7----Tapping screw PT3X10
Remove the touchscreen
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 6 PT3X10 tapping screws fixing the upper
pressure plate and lower pressure plate. Remove the pressure plates with sponge
pads, as shown in Figure 5-15.
2. Remove the touchscreen and buffer pads.
5-17
Servicing
Figure 5-15 Removing the touchscreen
1----Upper cover 2----Upper pressure plate of the

touchscreen
3----Tapping screw PT3X10 4----Touchscreen
5----Buffer pad 6----Lower pressure plate of the
touchscreen
To disassemble the touchscreen:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to remove the 2 M3X6 cross-recessed panhead screws
fixing the touchscreen control board, and then remove the touchscreen control board,
as shown in Figure 5-16;
fixing the converter shielding box, and then remove the shielding box, as shown in
Figure 5-16;
3. Remove the 2 connectors connecting the converter. Use the 101 screwdriver to
remove the 2 M2X4 cross-recessed panhead screws fixing the converter, and then
remove the converter, as shown in Figure 5-16;
fixing the LCD screen and the 2 plain washer, and then remove the LCD screen, as
shown in Figure 5-16;
5. Disassemble the rest parts as shown in Figure 5-16.
5-18
Servicing
Figure 5-16 Disassembling the touchscreen (AU screen)
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw M2X8 2----Plain washer 2

3----Screen mounting plate 4----LCD screen
5----Touchscreen control board 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw M2X4
7----Insulating strip of backlight board 8----Converter
9----Converter shielding box 10----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X6 (with washer)
5.4.4 Installation
Follow these three procedures to install the touchscreen assembly
To assemble the touchscreen:
Assemble the touchscreen according to the steps stated above in the reverse order.
To install the touchscreen:
1. Put the touchscreen in the locating frame of the front cover;
5-19
Servicing
Figure 5-17 Installing the touchscreen
1----Front cover 2----Touchscreen
2. Fix the upper and lower pressure plates with sponge pads on the cover by securing
the 6 PT3X10 tapping screws using the 107 screwdriver, as shown in Figure 5-17;
3. Affix two buffer pads to the left and right of the touchscreen, and cut off the parts
extending over the edges of the touchscreen.
To install the touchscreen assembly to the cover:
1. Put the FPC cable of the touchscreen through the hole in the screen mounting plate,
and then secure the 6 PT3X10 tapping screws using the 107 screwdriver, as shown in
Figure 5-14;
2. Connect the FPC cable to the touchscreen control board;
3. Fix the shielding cover of the control board to the screen mounting plate by securing 3
M3X6 cross-recessed panhead screws using the 107 screwdriver.
Notes of the touchscreen installation:
Do not press the touchscreen against the locating frame during installation, or the
touchscreen may be cracked. Check the position of the touchscreen after securing
the upper and lower pressure plate, and make sure it is right inside the locating
frame.
Crop the buffer pads to make sure they do not extend over the edges of the
touchscreen.
5-20
Servicing
The insulating strip of the backlight board can be removed for reuse.
5.4.5 Verification
2. Check whether the cables are connected correctly.
3. Start up the analyzer and check the touching and displaying of the screen.
5-21
Servicing
5.5 Replacing the Fluidic Components

5.5.1 Replacing the Air Valve Assembly
Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the gas valve assembly. Refer to Figure 5-18 for the gas
valves and junction board on the gas valve assembly.
Figure 5-18 Layout of the gas valve assembly
1----Valve bracket 2----Three-way Mindray valve

3----Two-way Mindray valve 4----Five-way gas valve 010-4E1
5----Solenoid valve GA010E1 6----Solenoid valve GA010E1-11-
7----Manifold G010M11A 8----Manifold G010M6A
Tools
100mm monkey wrench
5-22
Servicing
Removal
Follow these five procedures to disassemble the gas valve assembly.
To remove the gas valve assembly from the main unit:
3. Disconnect the electric connectors from all gas valves.
4. Unplug all pneumatics lines connected to the gas valve assembly.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 4 M4X8 screws fixing the gas valve assembly,
and then remove the gas valve assembly. The screws are indicated in black circles in
Figure 5-19.
Figure 5-19 Removing the gas valve assembly-1
1----Gas valve assembly 2----Panhead screws M4X8
To remove the Mindray valve:
3. Use the 101 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X12 screws fixing the valve.
4. Disconnect all the tubes connected to the valve and remove the valve as shown in
Figure 5-20.
5-23
Servicing
1----Valve bracket 2----Mindray valve

3----Cross-recessed panhead screw 4----Five-way gas valve GV92
M3X12
5----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6 6---- Cross-recessed panhead screw
(with washer) M3X20
7----Screw of the cover plate 8----Choke plug
9----Choke plug washer 10----Cover plate
11----Connector M3 12----Gas valve
13----Screw of the gas valve 14----Connector M5
To remove the five-way gas valves:
You can follow the procedures to remove the five-way gas valve GV92 from the gas valve
assembly as shown in Figure 5-18.
3. Disconnect the GV92 valves electric connector.
4. Unplug the three pneumatic lines from the GV92 valve.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the GV92 valve, and
then remove the valve as shown in Figure 5-20.
6. Use the 100mm wrench to unscrew the 3 LC-0425-M3 connectors on the GV92 valve
as Figure 5-20.
To remove the gas valves on the manifold:
There are 2 manifolds on the gas valve assembly as shown in Figure 5-18. All valves on the
manifolds can be installed and removed in the same way.
5-24
Servicing
3. Disconnect the electric connector from the valve.
4. Use the 101 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M2X16 screws fixing the valve, and then
remove the valve as per Figure 5-20.
To remove the manifolds
There are 2 manifolds on the gas valve assembly as shown in Figure 5-18. Each manifold can
be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the manifold 2 is described below.
3. Disconnect the electric connectors from manifold 2.
4. Unplug all pneumatic lines connected from manifold 2.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X20 screws fixing the manifold 2, then
remove the manifold as per Figure 5-20.
6. Use the 101 screwdriver and 100mm wrench to disassemble the manifold 2 as per
Figure 5-21.
5-25
Servicing
1----Connector X420-1 2----Connector SPA4-M5

3----Insulation washer 4----Sealing washer
5----Fixing block 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw M2X4
7----Gas valve 8----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M2x16
9----Manifold 2 10----Choke plug
11----Connector LC-0425-M3
Installation
Install the gas valve assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect all gas valves electric connectors according to the labels.
2. Connect the tubing as per Appendix E.
Verification
3. Check whether the pneumatic lines are connected correctly.
5-26
Servicing
5.5.2 Replacing the Regulating Valve Assembly

Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the regulating valve assembly.
Tools
104S-#1(38) cross-headed screwdriver
150mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the regulating valve assembly.
To remove the regulating valve assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug the 6 pneumatic lines from the regulating valve assembly.
4. Use the 104S-#1(38) screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M4X12 screws fixing the
regulating valve assembly, and then remove the assembly as per Figure 5-22.
5-27
Servicing
Figure 5-22 Removing the regulating valve assembly
1----Back plate 2----Panhead screw M4X8

3----Regulating valve assembly 4----Power board bracket
To disassemble the regulating valve assembly:
1. Loosen the cap and remove the vacuum regulating valve as per Figure 5-23.
2. Loosen the stem and stem locking nut of the precision regulating valve as per Figure
5-23.
3. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the valve locking nut, then remove the precision
regulating valve as per Figure 5-23.
4. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the L-shape and Y-shape connectors from the
vacuum regulating valve and precision regulating valve as per Figure 5-23.
5-28
Servicing
3
4
Figure 5-23 Disassembling the regulating valve assembly
1----Regulating valve bracket 2----Cap of vacuum regulating valve

3----Valve locking nut of precision 4---- Stem of vacuum regulating valve
regulating valve
5----Y-shape connector SQU4-01 6----Stem of precision regulating valve
7----L-shape connector SQL6-01
Installation
Install the regulating valve assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Power on the analyzer, adjust the three regulating valves as required, then lock the
regulating valves by:
2. Pressing the knob on the vacuum regulating valve.
5-29
Servicing
3. Fixing the stem locking nut of the precision regulating valve. Secure the regulating
valve with the wrench shown in Figure 5-24.
Wrench for the

regulating valve
Figure 5-24 Securing the precision regulating valve
4. Connect the lines as per Appendix E.
Verification
2. Check whether the pneumatic lines are connected correctly.
5.5.3 Replacing the Pinch Valve Assembly

Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the pinch valve assembly.
Tools
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the pinch valve assembly.
To remove the pinch valve assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug all pneumatic lines from the pinch valve assembly.
4. Unplug all fluidic lines from the pinch valve assembly.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the pinch valve assembly,
and then remove the pinch valve assembly as per Figure 5-25.
5-30
Servicing
1 2 3
Figure 5-25 Removing the pinch valve assembly
1----Bottom plate 2----Pinch valve assembly

To disassemble the pinch valve assembly:
Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the pinch valve assembly as per Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 Disassembling the pinch valve assembly
1----8mm pinch valve 1 2----Pinch valve bracket

3----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6 4----Protective ring SB-0710
(with washer)
5-31
Servicing
Installation
Install the pinch valve assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
Connect the tubing as per Appendix E.
Verification
2. Check whether the pneumatic/fluidic lines are connected correctly.
5.5.4 Replacing the Valve/Pump Assembly

Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the valve/pump assembly.
Tools
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the valve/pump assembly.
To remove the valve/pump assembly from the main unit:
1. Start up the analyzer and empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug
the power cord from the wall outlet.
3. Unplug all fluidic/pneumatic lines connected to the valve/pump assembly.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 6 M4X8 screws fixing the valve/pump
assembly, then move out the valve/pump assembly. The screws are indicated in black
circles in Figure 5-27.
5-32
Servicing
Figure 5-27 Removing the valve/pump assembly-1
1----Valve/pump assembly 2----Panhead screw M4X8
5. Disconnect all solenoid valves electric connectors.
6. Remove the valve/pump assembly.
To remove the Mindray valves:
There are 17 two-way and 9 three-way Mindray valves on the valve/pump assembly. Each of
the valves can be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the three-way valve
SV24 is described below.
3. Unplug the 2 fluidic lines from the SV24 valve.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X12 screws fixing the SV24 valve, and
then move out the valve as per Figure 5-28.
5-33
Servicing
1----Cross-recessed screw M4X8 2----ASCO valve

3----Valve/Pump bracket 4----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X12 (with washer)
5----Mindray valve 6----Drainage valve
7----Metering pump
5. Disconnect the electric connector from the SV24 valve.
z Make sure the cables of the solenoid valves do not fall behind the holes in
the valve bracket.
6. Remove the SV24 valve.
To remove the metering pumps
There are one 0.32mL, three 1mL, three 2mL and one 3mL metering pumps on the valve/pump
5-34
Servicing
assembly. Each of the pumps can be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the
3ml pump is described below.
3. Unplug the fluid line and pneumatic line from the 3mL metering pump.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the 3mL metering
pump, then remove the pump together with the mounting plate as per Figure 5-28.
5. Use a 2.5mm hexagon wrench to unscrew the 2 M3X12 screws fixing the 3mL
metering pump, then remove the metering pump as per Figure 5-29.
1----3mL metering pump 2----Mounting plate

3----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X12 (with washer)
Installation
Install the valve/pump assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect all solenoid valves electric connectors according to the labels.
5-35
Servicing
Verification
2. Check whether the cables of the solenoid valves are connected correctly.
5.5.5 Replacing the Syringe Assembly

Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the 100l and 2.5mL syringe assemblies, which can be
removed in the same way except for two fluidic connectors of the 100l one. Removal of the
100l syringe assembly is described below.
Tools
102 flat-headed screwdriver
2mm hexagon wrench
2.5mm hexagon wrench
150mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the 100l syringe assembly.
To remove the 100l syringe assembly from the main unit:
2. Remove the lower cover as per Section 5.2.5.
3. Unplug the optical sensor and motor connectors from the 100l syringe assembly.
4. Unplug the two fluidic lines from the 100l syringe assembly. (Note: Theres only one
fluidic line connected to the 2.5mL syringe assembly)
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X10 screws fixing the 100l syringe
assembly, and then remove the 100l syringe assembly and four rubber rings as per
Figure 5-30.
5-36
Servicing
Figure 5-30 Removing the syringe assembly
1----Front plate 2----100l syringe assembly

3----2.5mL syringe assembly 4----Rubber ring
5----Bottom plate 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X10 (with washer)
To disassemble the 100l syringe assembly:
1. Use the 2mm wrench to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the motor rod, and then
remove the motor rod as per Figure 5-31.
z Make sure to insert the retaining screw into the hole on the motor rod, and
apply some lock glue to the threads.
2. Use the 102 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the 100l syringe unit as
per Figure 5-31.
5-37
Servicing
3. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M3X16 screws fixing the 100l syringe unit,
and then remove the fixing block and the 100l syringe unit as per Figure 5-31.
Figure 5-31 Disassembling the syringe assembly-1
1----Slider 2----Socket head screw with cup point

M4X8
3----Special screw M4X8 4----100l syringe unit
5----Fixing block 6----Socket cap screw M3X16
7----Bracket assembly 8----Motor rod
4. Use the 150mm wrench to disassemble the 100l syringe as per Figure 5-32.
z Apply some sealing glue to the screw threads. Dont proceed to the next
step until the glue is dry.
5-38
Servicing
1----100l syringe 2----Washer

3----Syringe connector 4----Connector X420-1
5. Use the 2mm wrench to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing the guiding rod, then remove
the guiding rod and the slider as per Figure 5-33.
z Make sure to attach the retaining screw to the surface of the guide rod, and
apply some lock glue to the threads.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X10 screw fixing the optical sensor, and
then remove the sensor as per Figure 5-33.
7. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the linear step motor,
and then remove the motor as per Figure 5-33.
5-39
Servicing
z Install the motor and the optical sensor with their connecting lines to the
same direction.
8. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X10 screws fixing the guiding plate, then
remove the guiding plate as per Figure 5-33.
1----Guiding plate 2----Socket cap screw M3X10

3----Motor bracket 4----Socket cap screw M3X8
5----Linear step motor 43F4K-05-010 6----Optical sensor GP1A05A
7----Cross-recessed panhead screw 8----Slider unit
M4X10
9----Socket head screw with cup point 10----Guiding rod
M4X8
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the slider unit as per Figure 5-34.
5-40
Servicing
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6 2----Slider

3----Baffle plate 4----Linear bearing SDM-8
5----Spacer ring
Installation
Install the syringe assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect the step motors and optical sensors to the cables indicated below:
No. Assembly Component Cables to be

connected
1 100l syringe assembly Linear step motor M-SWBC
2 100l syringe assembly Optical sensor S-SWBC
3 2.5mL syringe assembly Linear step motor M-SWB
4 2.5mL syringe assembly Optical sensor S-SWB
Verification
3. Check whether the fluidic lines are connected correctly.
4. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacing.
5-41
Servicing
5.5.6 Replacing the Cistern Assembly

Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the cleanser, FCM and DIL cistern assemblies, which can be
removed in the same way. Removal of the cleanser cistern assembly is described below.
Tools
150mm monkey wrench
Tweezers
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the cleanser cistern assembly.
To remove the cleanser cistern assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug the liquid-level sensor connector on the cleanser cistern assembly.
4. Unplug the pneumatic line and 2 fluidic lines connected to the cleanser cistern
assembly.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the cleanser cistern
assembly, and then remove the assembly as per Figure 5-35.
5-42
Servicing
Figure 5-35 Removing the cistern assembly
1----Panhead screw M4X8 2----Cleanser cistern assembly

3----DIL cistern assembly 4----WC2 assembly
5----WC1 assembly 6----FCM cistern assembly
7----Back plate
To disassemble the cleanser cistern assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws fixing the waste cistern cap,
and then remove the cap and the liquid-level sensor as per Figure 5-36.
2. Use the tweezers to unplug the two connectors on the liquid-level sensor, then use
the 150mm wrench to unscrew the liquid-level sensor as per Figure 5-36.
5-43
Servicing
Figure 5-36 Disassembling the cistern assembly-
1----WC2 2----Bracket 2
3----Liquid-level sensor BGRF-F 4----Charging tube
5----Waste cistern cap 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X12 (with washer)
7----Vacuum cupule 8----O ring 48.7x1.8
9----O ring 9.5x1.8 10----Sealing surface
Installation
Install the cistern assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect the liquid-level sensors to the cables indicated below:
No. Assembly Component Cables to be connected

1 Cleanser cistern assembly Liquid-level sensor E-Z
2 FCM cistern assembly Liquid-level sensor FCM
3 DIL cistern assembly Liquid-level sensor DIL
5-44
Servicing
Verification
2. Check whether the liquid-level sensors electric connectors are connected correctly.
4. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacing (including the airtightness test)
z If there is a back flow from the cisterns and the pneumatic unit is down,
there may be reagent left in the tubings between the vacuum sensors and
the vacuum side of the pump, inside the isolation chamber, vacuum relief
valve and pump, In this case, the service personnel shall manually drain the
tubings and the isolation chamber, remove and clear the vacuum relief
valve, check if the pump can operate properly, disassemble and clean the
pump to remove the reagent.
5.5.7 Replacing the WC1 Assembly

Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the WC1 assembly.
Tools
150mm monkey wrench
Tweezers
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the WC1 assembly.
To remove the WC1 assembly from the main unit:
3. Unplug the liquid-level sensor connector on the WC1 assembly.
4. Unplug the pneumatic line and four fluidic lines connected to the WC1 assembly.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the WC1 assembly, and
then remove the WC1 assembly as per Figure 5-37.
5-45
Servicing
Figure 5-37 Removing the WC1 assembly
1----Cleanser cistern assembly 2----DIL cistern assembly

3----WC2 assembly 4----Back plate
5----Panhead screw M4X8 6----WC1 assembly
7----FCM cistern assembly
To disassemble the WC1 assembly:
1. Unplug the pneumatic line connecting the waste cistern cap to the anti-back-flow
cistern cap.
5-46
Servicing
the 150mm wrench to unscrew the extension bar and the liquid-level sensor as per
Figure 5-38.
4. Loosen the anti-back-flow cistern manually as per Figure 5-38.
5. Take out manually the big floater fallen into the anti-back-flow cistern.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws fixing the anti-back-flow
cistern cap, and then remove the anti-back-flow cistern cap as per Figure 5-38.
7. Remove the vacuum cupule installed on the anti-back-flow cistern cap.
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws fixing the 8mm pinch valve,
then remove the pinch valve as per Figure 5-38.
Figure 5-38 Disassembling the WC1 assembly-2
1----WC2 2----Bracket 1
3----Liquid-level sensor RF-OV1 4----Charging tube
5----O ring 9.5x1.8 6----Waste cistern cap
5-47
Servicing
7----Cross-recessed panhead screw 8----O ring 48.7x1.8

M3X12 (with washer)
9----8mm pinch valve 10----Insertion tube
11----Anti-back-flow cistern cap 12----O ring 28X2.5
13----Vacuum cupule 14----Panhead screw M3X8
15----Sealing surface 16----Big floater
17----Anti-back-flow cistern
Installation
Install the WC1 assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect the liquid-level sensor to the cable indicated below:
No. Component Cable to be connected

1 Liquid-level sensor WC1
Verification
2. Check whether the liquid-level sensors electric connector is connected correctly.
4. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacing (including the airtightness test).
5.5.8 Replacing the WC2 Assembly

Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the WC2 assembly.
Tools
150mm monkey wrench
Tweezers
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the WC2 assembly.
To remove the WC2 assembly from the main unit:
5-48
Servicing
3. Unplug the liquid-level sensor connector on the WC2 assembly.
4. Unplug the three fluidic lines connected to the WC2 assembly.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the WC2 assembly, and
then remove the WC2 assembly as per Figure 5-39.
Figure 5-39 Removing the WC2 assembly
1----Panhead screw M4X8 2----Cleanser cistern assembly

3----DIL cistern assembly 4----WC2 assembly
5----FCM cistern assembly 6----WC1 assembly
7----Back plate
To disassemble the WC2 assembly:
5-49
Servicing
the 150mm wrench to unscrew the extension bar and the liquid-level sensor as per
Figure 5-40.
Figure 5-40 Disassembling the WC2 assembly
1----WC2 2----O ring 9.5x1.8

3----O ring 48.7x1.8 4----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X12 (with washer)
5----Waste cistern cap 6----Extension bar 1
7----Liquid-level sensor RF-OV1 8----Bracket 2
Installation
Install the WC2 assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect the liquid-level sensor to the cable indicated below:

1 Liquid-level sensor WC1
5-50
Servicing
Verification
2. Check whether the liquid-level sensors electric connector is connected correctly.
4. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacing.
5.5.9 Replacing the Metering Tube Assembly

Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the metering tube assembly.
Tools
Removal
Follow these three procedures to disassemble the metering tube assembly.
To remove the metering tube assembly from the main unit:
2. Remove the lower cover as per Section 5.2.5.
3. Remove baffle plate 2 as per Section 5.6.1.
4. Lift up the main board and signal processing board, lower down the stop bar, then
place down the two boards.
6. Unplug J1 connector from the volumetric board.
7. Disconnect the electric connectors of the 6 solenoid valves.
8. Unplug the 6 fluidic lines connected to the metering tube assembly.
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 4 M4X8 screws fixing the metering tube
assembly, and then remove the metering tube assembly as per Figure 5-41.
5-51
Servicing
Figure 5-41 Removing the metering tube assembly-1
1----Panhead screw M4X8 2----Front plate

3----Metering tube assembly
To remove the metering tube
3. Remove the baffle plate 2 as per Section 5.6.1.
4. Unplug the J1 connector from the volumetric board.
5. Unplug the 3 fluidic lines connected to the metering tube.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X6 screws fixing the volumetric board,
5-52
Servicing
then remove the volumetric board and the metering tube as per Figure 5-42
Figure 5-42 Removing the metering tube assembly-2
1----Metering tube support 2----Volumetric board

3----Two-way solenoid valve 4----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X12 (with washer)
5----Metering tube 6----Rubber ring
7----Bracket 8----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6
(with washer)
7. Remove the bracket and rubber rings as per Figure 5-42.
8. Refer to the following procedures for removal of solenoid valves. Use the 107
screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X12 screws fixing the solenoid valve, and then
remove the valve as per Figure 5-42.
5-53
Servicing
Figure 5-43 Removing the metering tube assembly -3
1----Metering tube 2----Bracket

3----Rubber ring
To remove the solenoid valves
There are 5 two-way and 1 three-way Mindray valves on the metering tube assembly. Each of
the valves can be installed and removed in the same way. Removal of the SV36 valve is
described below.
3. Remove the baffle plate 2 as per Section 5.6.1.
4. Unplug the 2 fluidic lines connected to the SV36 valve.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the SV36 valve as per
Figure 5-42.
6. Disconnect the electric connector from the SV36 valve.
7. Remove the SV36 valve.
Installation
Install the metering tube assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect all solenoid valves electric connectors according to the labels.
2. Connect the cable H-J1/C41302-A to the J1 slot on the volumetric board.
5-54
Servicing
Verification
5-55
Servicing
5.6 Replacing the RBC Assembly
5.6.1 Replacing the RBC Bath Assembly
Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the RBC bath assembly.
Tools
150mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these six procedures to disassemble the RBC bath assembly.
To remove the outer shielding box:
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M4X8 screws fixing the outer shielding box,
then remove the box (Figure 5-44).
4. Unscrew the retaining screw and remove the door of the outer shielding box (Figure
5-44).
4
3
2
1
Figure 5-44 Removing the RBC bath assembly-1
5-56
Servicing
1----Front plate 2----Outer shielding box

3----Retaining screw 4----Outer shielding box door
To remove the inner shielding box
Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X5 screws fixing the inner shielding box, then
remove the box (Figure 5-45).
1----Front plate 2----Inner shielding box

3----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8
To remove the baffle plate 1:
2. Remove the top cover as per Section 5.2.4.
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X8 screw fixing baffle plate 1 (Figure
5-46).
4. Release the upper cover as per Section 5.2.3.
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the main board/signal
processing board assembly (Figure 5-46).
5-57
Servicing
1----Panhead screw M4X8 2----Main board/signal processing board

assembly
3----Baffle plate 1
6. Lift up the main board/signal processing board assembly, then support it with the stop
bar (Figure 5-47).
7. Remove the baffle plate 1 (Figure 5-47).
5-58
Servicing
1----Main board/signal processing board 2----Baffle plate 1

assembly
3----Front plate 4----Panhead screw M4X8
To disconnect the RBC/PLT cable connector:
1. Lift up the main board/signal processing board assembly, and release the stop bar to
put down the board assembly.
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws securing the main board
shielding cover, and then remove the cover (Figure 5-48).
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws securing the upper shielding
cover of the signal processing board, and then remove the cover (Figure 5-48).
4. Disconnect the RBC/PLT cable connector. Refer to Section 4.2.2 for the slot
positions.
5-59
Servicing
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6 2----Upper shielding cover of the signal

(with washer) processing board
3----Signal processing board 4----Main board shielding cover
To disassemble the front/back bath assembly and the isolation chamber:
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M3X6 screw fixing the RBC/PLT earth
terminal (Figure 5-49).
3. Disconnect the three fluidic lines from the RBC bath cap.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X12 screws fixing the RBC bath cap,
and then remove the cap (Figure 5-49).
5-60
Servicing
1----Isolation chamber 2----Front bath clamp

3----Front/back bath assembly 4----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6
(with washer)
5----Clamp 6----O ring 20x1.8
7----RBC bath cap 8----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X12 (with washer)
5. Disconnect other fluidic lines from the front/back bath assembly, then remove the
assembly (Figure 5-50).
6. Disconnect the fluidic and pneumatic lines from the isolation chamber, then remove
the chamber (Figure 5-50).
1----Isolation chamber 2----Clamp

3----Front/back bath assembly 4----Clamp
5----RBC shielding plate
7. . Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the front/back bath assembly (Figure 5-51).
5-61
Servicing
Figure 5-51 Disassembling the RBC bath assembly
1----Tapping screw PT3X10 2----Front bath

3----Front bath washer 4----Ruby Red Cell Counter 70um
5----Fluoro-rubber asher 6----Back bath
Installation
Install the RBC bath assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions
Verification
2. Check whether the RBC/PLT cables are connected correctly.
5-62
Servicing
5.6.2 Replacing the Premix Bath Assembly

Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the premix bath assembly.
Tools
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the premix bath assembly.
To remove the premix bath assembly from the main unit:
3. Unscrew the connector as shown in Figure 5-52.
4. Disconnect the two fluidic lines from the premix bath cap.
5. Unplug the fluidic line connecting the premix bath to the isolation chamber.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws securing the premix bath
assembly, and then remove the assembly (Figure 5-52).
7. Disconnect the fluidic/pneumatic lines from the isolation chamber, and then remove
the chamber (Figure 5-52).
Figure 5-52 Removing the premix bath assembly
1----Isolation chamber 2----Clamp

3----Connector 4----Premix bath assembly
5-63
Servicing

7----Stopper
To disassemble the premix bath assembly:
Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the premix bath assembly (Figure 5-53).
Figure 5-53 Disassembling the premix bath assembly
1----HGB bracket 2----Connector

3----Premix bath 4----O ring 25X1.8
5----Premix bath cap 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X12
7----Fluidic line connector 8----Stopper
Installation
Install the premix bath assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
5-64
Servicing
Precautions
Verification
5-65
Servicing
5.7 Replacing the HGB Bath Assembly
5.7.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the HGB bath assembly.
5.7.2 Tools
5.7.3 Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the HGB bath assembly.
To remove the HGB bath assembly from the main unit:
3. Remove the outer shielding box of RBC unit as per To remove the outer shielding
box under Section 5.6.1.
4. Remove baffle plate 1 and 2 as per To remove the baffle plate 1 and 2 under
Section 5.6.1.
5. Remove the main board shielding cover as per To disconnect the RBC/PLT cable
connector under Section 5.6.1.
6. Disconnect the HGB cable connector. Refer to Section 4.2.2 for the connector
positions.
8. Disconnect the three fluidic lines from the HGB bath cap.
9. Unplug the fluidic line connecting the HGB bath to the isolation chamber.
10. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 2 M4X8 screws fixing the HGB bath assembly,
and then remove the assembly (Figure 5-54).
11. Disconnect the fluidic and pneumatic lines from the isolation chamber, and then
remove the chamber (Figure 5-54).
5-66
Servicing
Figure 5-54 Removing the HGB bath assembly

3----HGB bath assembly 4----Clamp
5----Isolation chamber
To disassemble the HGB bath assembly:
1. Use the 101 screwdriver to unscrew the ST2.2X10 screw securing the bracket
assembly, and then remove the assembly (Figure 5-55).
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M3X12 screws fixing the HGB cap, then
remove the cap and bath (Figure 5-55).
5-67
Servicing
Figure 5-55 Disassembling the HGB bath assembly
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw 2----HGB bath cap

M3X12
3----O ring 25X1.8 4----HGB bath
5----Bracket 6----O ring 6X1
7----Bracket assembly 8----Cross-recessed panhead tapping
screw ST2.2X10
5.7.4 Installation
Install the HGB bath assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
5-68
Servicing
5.7.5 Verification
2. Check whether the HGB cable is connected correctly.
5-69
Servicing
5.8 Replacing the WBC Bath Assembly

5.8.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the WBC bath assembly.
5.8.2 Toolss
107 cross-recessed screwdriver
5.8.3 Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the WBC bath assembly.
To remove the WBC bath assembly from the main unit:
3. Disconnect the three pneumatics lines from the pinch valve unit.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X8 screws securing the pinch valve unit
(Figure 5-56).
5. Disconnect all fluidic lines from the WBC bath unit.
6. Disconnect the connectors of the heating pipe, temperature switch and temperature
sensor from the WBC bath unit.
7. Disconnect the motors and optical sensors connector from the mixing unit.
8. Remove the pinch valve unit.
9. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M4X8 screws securing the bath unit, and
then remove the WBC bath unit and the mixing unit (Figure 5-56).
5-70
Servicing
Figure 5-56 Removing the WBC bath assembly
1----Pinch valve unit 2----Panhead screw M4X8

3----WBC bath unit 4----Mixing unit
5----Front plate
To disassemble the WBC bath assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the pinch valve unit as per Figure 5-57.
5-71
Servicing
Figure 5-57 Disassembling the WBC bath assembly-1
1----Panhead screw M3X8 2----Bracket

3----5mm pinch valve
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to loosen the 4 M3X6 screws securing the mixing unit, then
remove the unit (Figure 5-58).
1----WBC bath unit 2----Mixing unit

3. To remove the two photocoupler brackets, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4
M3X6 screws securing the photocoupler brackets, and then remove the brackets
5-72
Servicing
(Figure 5-59).
4. To remove the two optical sensors, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X10
screws securing the optical sensors, and then remove the sensors (Figure 5-59).
5. The remaining part of the mixing unit is an integral part and not required to be
disassembled (Figure 5-59).
1----BASO photocoupler 2----Mixing bar

3----Turntable 4----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M1.7X3
5----Stopper 6----Photocoupler bracket
7----Cross-recessed countersunk screw 8----DIFF sensor
M3X6
9----DIFF mix motor 10----Motor support
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X6 screws securing the mounting plate,
and then remove the plate (Figure 5-60).
7. The remaining part of the WBC bath unit is an integral part and not required to be
disassembled (Figure 5-60).
5-73
Servicing
1----Temperature switch 2----Heating pipe

3----Temperature sensor 4----Mounting plate

(with washer)
5.8.4 Installation
Install the WBC bath assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
Connect the heating pipe, temperature switch, temperature sensor, motors and sensors to the
cables indicated below. Refer to Figure 5-59 and Figure 5-60 for positions of these
components on the WBC bath assembly.

1 Heating pipe HT-ACT
2 Temperature switch KT-ACT
3 Temperature sensor ST-ACT
4 DIFF motor M-DIFF
5 DIFF sensor S-DIFF
5-74
Servicing
6 BASO motor M-BASO

7 BASO sensor S-BASO
5.8.5 Verification
2. Check whether the signal lines are connected correctly.
5-75
Servicing
5.9 Replacing the Reagent Preheating Assembly

5.9.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the reagent preheating assembly.
5.9.2 Toolss
104S-#1(38) cross-recessed screwdriver
Diagonal cutting pliers
5.9.3 Removal
3. Disconnect the connectors of the heating pipe, temperature switch and temperature
sensor from the reagent preheating assembly.
4. Cut the cable ties on the 8 adapters of the reagent preheating assembly using the
diagonal cutting pliers, and then remove the 8 adapters.
5. Use the 104S-#1(38) screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X16 screws securing the
reagent preheating assembly, and then remove the assembly (Figure 5-61).
Figure 5-61 Removing the reagent preheating assembly
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw 2----Washer GB93 4

M4X16
3----Plain washer GB97.1 4 4----Support
5----Reagent preheating assembly 6----716 temperature sensor
5-76
Servicing
7----Temperature switch 8----Heating pipe MD-50AZ 24V/50W
5.9.4 Installation
Install the reagent preheating assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Connect the heating pipe, temperature switch and temperature sensor to the cables
indicated below. Refer to Figure 5-61 for positions of these components on the
reagent preheating assembly.

1 Heating pipe HT-PRE
2 Temperature switch KT-PRE
3 Temperature sensor ST-PRE
2. Connect the lines as per Appendix E.
5.9.5 Verification
1. Check whether all components are installed and fixed in place
5-77
Servicing
5.10 Replacing the Open Vial Sampling/SRV

Assembly
5.10.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the open vial sampling/SRV assembly.
5.10.2 Toolss
2mm hexagon wrench
5mm hexagon wrench
150mm monkey wrench
5.10.3 Removal
Follow these four procedures to disassemble the open vial sampling/SRV assembly.
To remove the open vial sampling/SRV assembly from the main unit:
4. Disconnect the optical sensor and step motor connector from the open vial
sampling/SRV assembly.
5. Disconnect the two pneumatic lines from the open vial sampling/SRV assembly.
6. Disconnect all fluidic lines from the open vial sampling/SRV assembly.
7. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M4X8 screws securing the open vial
sampling/SRV assembly, and then remove the assembly (Figure 5-62).
5-78
Servicing
Figure 5-62 Removing the open vial sampling/SRV assembly
1----Front plate 2----Open vial sampling/SRV assembly

To disassemble the open vial sampling/SRV assembly
1. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws fixing the wipe block, and
then remove the block and the wipe (Figure 5-63).
2. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the SRV assembly, and
then remove the assembly (Figure 5-63).
5-79
Servicing
Figure 5-63 Disassembling the open vial sampling/SRV assembly
1----Wipe block 2----SRV assembly

3----Socket cap screw M3X8 4----Wipe block
5----Socket cap screw M3X12 6----Fixing block
7----Open vial sampling assembly
To disassemble the open vial sampling assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X12 screw securing the optical sensor,
and then remove the sensor (Figure 5-64).
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws securing the light screen, and
then remove the light screen (Figure 5-64).
3. Use the 2mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M4X8 screws securing the locating plate, and
then remove the plate (Figure 5-64).
4. Use the 5mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M6x16 screws securing the cylinder, and then
remove the cylinder (Figure 5-64).
5. Disconnect the connectors from the cylinder using the 150mm wrench (Figure 5-64).
5-80
Servicing
Figure 5-64 Disassemble the open vial sampling assembly - 1
1----Connector 2----Light screen

3----Panhead screw M3X8 4----Cylinder SDAD2530-SZ144
5----Optical sensor GP1A05A 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M4X12
7----Socket cap screw M6X16 8----Retaining screw M4X8
9----Locating plate
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws securing the belt clip, and
then remove the clip (Figure 5-65).
7. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X5 screws securing the base, and then
remove the base (Figure 5-65). The guide rod is jointed to the base and is not
necessary to be removed.
5-81
Servicing
Figure 5-65 Disassemble the open vial sampling assembly -2
1----Synchronous belt TBN142MXL025 2----Panhead screw M3X8

3----Belt clip 4----Base
5----Socket cap screw M3X5 6----Guide rod
7----Linear rolling guide
MGN9C1R135ZFCM
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the step motor, then
remove the belt and the motor (Figure 5-66).
9. Use the 1.5mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M3X5 screws securing the synchronous
pulley, and then remove the pulley (Figure 5-66).
10. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws securing the synchronous
pulley to the pulley axis, then remove the pulley and the axis (Figure 5-66).
5-82
Servicing
11. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws securing the linear rolling
guide, then remove the rolling guide (Figure 5-66).
z When installing the linear rolling guide, first secure the upper stop screw
and then lean the rolling guide aside.
z Adjust the tension of the synchronous belt by tightening the 4 M3X8 screws
that secure the step motor.
z When installing the synchronous pulley of the step motor, keep the motor
axis protruding 3mm from the pulley face.
z Apply some lubricant (P/N: A90-000070----) to the pulley axis before

installing the synchronous pulley of the pulley axis.
12. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M3X5 screws that stops the rolling guide
(Figure 5-66).
5-83
Servicing
1----Step motor KH42HM2-951 2----Socket cap screw M3X5

3----Panhead screw M3X8 4----Synchronous pulley P16MXL6.4DF
5----Retaining screw M3X5 6----Synchronous belt TBN142MXL025
7----Washer 8----Synchronous pulley, 16-teeth, MXL, 6.4
wide
9----Pulley axis 10----Socket cap screw M3X8
11----Linear rolling guide 12----Mounting support
MGN9C1R135ZFCM
To disassemble the SRV assembly:
1. Remove the SRV tray (Figure 5-67).
2. Unscrew the spring unit manually (Figure 5-67).
3. Remove the sampling valve, rotor valve and rear fixed valve in sequence (Figure
5-67).
5-84
Servicing
1----Spring unit 2----Sampling valve

3----SRV tray 4----Rotor valve
5----Rear fixed valve
4. Disassemble the spring unit using the 2.5mm wrench (Figure 5-68).
5-85
Servicing
1----Socket cap screw M3X12 4----Spring

2----Washer 5----Sleeve
3----Handle 6----Regulating shaft
5. Use the 1.3mm wrench to unscrew the 2 M2.5X4 screws securing the sample probe,
and then remove the spacer (Figure 5-69).
6. Manually unscrew the adapter (Figure 5-69).
7. Remove the sample probe and the sealing tube (Figure 5-69).
5-86
Servicing
1----Sample probe 2----Retaining screw M2.5X4

3----Spacer 4----Adapter
5----Sealing tube 6----Sampling valve
8. Remove other components from the SRV assembly using the 107 screwdriver and
2.5mm wrench (Figure 5-70).
5-87
Servicing
1----Protective cover 2----Socket cap screw M3X8

3----Panhead screw M3X8 4----Connection board
5----Connection key 6----Fixing block
7----Shaft 8----Socket cap screw M3X16
5.10.4 Installation
Install the open vial sampling/SRV assembly according to the steps stated above in reverse
order.
Precautions:
1. Adjust the upper/lower locating plates of the cylinder rod after installing the related
components.
2. To adjust the position of the lower locating plate: (Figure 5-71 left):
a) Unscrew the retaining screws securing the upper/lower locating plates.

b) Insert the cylinder regulator into the lower locating hole on the sampling valve (Figure
5-71), then rotate the deflector rod to enable the cylinder regulator to enter the locating hole of
the rotor valve (Figure 5-71).
5-88
Servicing
Figure 5-71 Adjusting the cylinder position
1----Lower locating plate 2----Deflector rod

3----Cylinder regulator 4----Sampling valve
5----Cylinder rod 6----Upper locating plate
5-89
Servicing
Figure 5-72 Cylinder regulator
Push the cylinder rod upwards until it stops, move the lower locating plate until it attaches the
deflector rod, then secure the lower locating plate.
To adjust the position of the upper locating plate: (Figure 5-71 right):
1. Insert the cylinder regulator into the upper locating hole on the sampling valve, and
then rotate the deflector rod to enable the cylinder regulator to enter the locating hole
of the rotor valve.
2. Push the cylinder rod downwards until it stops, move the upper locating plate until it
attaches the deflector rod, then secure the upper locating plate.
After installing the wipe block to the main unit, power on the analyzer and follow the
procedures to adjust the position of the wipe block:
1. Log on the software using the service level username and password (Figure 5-73).
5-90
Servicing
Figure 5-73 Login screen
2. CLICK Service on the main screen (Figure 5-74).
Figure 5-74 Main screen
3. The Service screen shows. CLICK the Debug key at the lower right corner of the
screen (Figure 5-75).
5-91
Servicing
Figure 5-75 Service screen
4. The Debug screen shows. CLICK the Wipe Block key (Figure 5-76).
Figure 5-76 Debug screen
5. The wipe debugging screen shows as follows (Figure 5-77).
5-92
Servicing
Figure 5-77 Wipe block debugging screen
6. CLICK the Initialization key. The wipe block bracket moves to the lower position
and then to the upper position. The reference position of the wipe block is determined.
7. CLICK the Middle place key. The wipe block moves to the middle position. CLICK
the Hold Moment key. The motor axis is locked.
8. Insert the height gauge into the wipe block until attaching the bottom of the wipe
(Figure 5-79). Slowly unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws securing the fixing block, move
the wipe block up and down to enable the sample probe to exactly attach the top end
of the height gauge, and then secure the 4 screws.
9. Repeat the steps stated above as needed.
10. Exit the wipe block debugging screen. The analyzer performs initialization
automatically (Figure 5-78).
Figure 5-78 Exiting the wipe block debugging screen
11. After adjusting the wipe block position, you can proceed to other operations.
5-93
Servicing
Figure 5-79 Adjusting the wipe block position
1----Light screen 2----Socket cap screw M3X12

3----Fixing block 4----Optical sensor GP1A05A
5----Wipe block 6----Sample probe
7----Wipe block 8----Height gauge
13. Connect the optical sensor and step motor to the cables indicated below:
5-94
Servicing

1 Optical sensor S-MS
2 Step motor M-MS
5.10.5 Verification
5-95
Servicing
5.11 Replacing the Sample Transmitting Assembly

5.11.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the sample transmitting assembly.
5.11.2 Tools
3mm hexagon wrench
5.11.3 Removal
The sample transmitting assembly can be removed in these two procedures:
To remove the sample transmitting assembly from the analyzer:
1. Remove the sample transmitting assembly from the analyzer. (See Section 5.2.5 for
details).
2. Use the 3mm wrench to unscrew the two M4X6 screws fixing the sample transmitting
connection blocks and then remove the two blocks (Figure 5-80).
5-96
Servicing
4 3 2 1
Figure 5-80 Removing the autoloader
1----Sample transmitting connection block 2----Cross-recessed screw M4X8

3----Bottom board 4----Lower part of the cover
To disassemble the sample transmitting assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two cross-recessed screws fixing the
transmitting assembly cover and the 2 M3X8 screws fixing the scanner, and then
remove the cover (Figure 5-81).
5-97
Servicing
Figure 5-81 Disassembling the autoloader-1
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8 2----Transmitting assembly cover

2. Pull out the connector of the fixed barcode scanner, use the 107 screwdriver to
unscrew the 4 little panhead screws M3X8 fixing the scanner bracket and the scanner
on the back supporting plate unit, and then remove the scanner bracket and the
scanner (See Figure 5-82 and Figure 5-83).
5-98
Servicing
1----Sample transmitting frame 2----Loading unit

3----Deck board unit 4----Front supporting plate unit
5----Back supporting plate unit 6----Unloading unit
7----Feeding unit 8----Barcode scanner
9----Riser unit 10----Shielding cover of the sample
transport adapter
5-99
Servicing
1----Accumulation tray 2----Panhead screw M3X8

3----Fixing board of tray 4----Bracket
3. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the elastic presser and
the barcode scanner on the riser unit, and then remove the presser and the barcode
scanner (See Figure 5-82 and Figure 5-84).
5-100
Servicing
1----Induction plate 3 2----Big flat washer GB96 3

3----Elastic presser 4----Barcode scanner bracket
5----Barcode scanner 6----Riser
7----Bushing 3 8----Panhead screw M3X8
4. Pull out the photocoupler (reflection) connector, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew
the two M3X8 screws fixing the back supporting plate unit and then remove the unit
(See Figure 5-82 and Figure 5-83).
5. Use the 101 screwdriver and the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the rest parts on the
back supporting plate unit according to Figure 5-83.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3X8 screws fixing the riser unit and
then remove the unit (Figure 5-82 and Figure 5-84).
7. Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the rest parts on the riser unit according to
Figure 5-84.
8. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M3X8 screws fixing the front supporting
plate and then remove the board (Figure 5-82 and Figure 5-85).
9. Pull out the connector of sensitive switch on the deck unit and the connector of
photocoupler (reflection), use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 5 M3X8 screws
5-101
Servicing
fixing the deck unit and then remove the unit (see Figure 5-82 and Figure 5-85).
10. Use the 101 screwdriver and the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the deck unit
according to Figure 5-85. Note: Do not disassemble the sponge baffle.
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw M2x8 2----Sensitive switch

3----Sample transmitting deck board 4----Photocoupler (reflection)
5----Sponge baffle 6----Panhead screw M3X8
11. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws fixing the unloading unit, pull
out the connector of optical sensor on the unloading unit, and then remove the
unloading unit (see Figure 5-82 and Figure 5-86).
12. Use the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the unloading unit according to Figure 5-86.
5-102
Servicing
1----Panhead screw M3X8 2----Cross-recessed panhead screw

M4X10
3----Optical sensor GP1A05A 4----Unloading extension spring
5----Induction plate 4 6----Upper cover of gear bed
7----Gear shaft 8----Short teeth bar
9----Gear bed 10----Long teeth bar
11----Lower cover of gear bed 12----Cross-recessed countersunk head
screw M3x8
13----Unloading bracket
13. Pull out the connector of the stepping motor on the feeding unit and the connectors of
the 3 optical sensors, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 3 M3X8 screws fixing
the feeding unit, and then remove the feeding unit (see Figure 5-82 and Figure 5-87).
14. Use the 1.5mm wrench, 2.5mm wrench and the 107 screwdriver to disassemble the
feeding unit according to Figure 5-87.
5-103
Servicing
1----Hexagon socket head cap screw M3X8 2----Guide rail MGN9C1R95ZOCM

3----Guide rail pad 4----Shielding cover of the feeding motor
home position photocoupler
5----Feeding bracket 6----Split washer GB/T896-86.4
7----Synchronous pulley.16 teeth MXL 6.4 8----Driven pulley shaft
9----Panhead screw M3X8 10----Washer
11----Stepping motor PK244M-01B 12----Hexagon set screw M3X5
13----Synchronous pulley. P16MXL6.4 14----Synchronous belt TBN110MXL025
15----Optical sensor GP1A05A 16----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M4X10
17----Belt 18----Feeding slider
19----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6 20----Shielding cover of photocoupler
(with washer)
21----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X12 22----Bushing 3
(with washer)
23----Pincher 24----Flat washer GB97.1 3
25----Hexagon socket head cap screw M3X5
15. Pull out the connector of the stepper motor on the loading unit and the connectors of
the two optical sensors, use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing
the loading unit, and then remove the unit Figure 5-82 and Figure 5-88).
16. Use the 1.5mm wrench, 2.5mm wrench, the 101 screwdriver and the 107 screwdriver
to disassemble the loading unit according to Figure 5-88.
5-104
Servicing
8 9 10 11 12 13
7 14
15
6
5 16
4 17
3 18
2 19
20
1
21
25 24 23 22
1----Driven pulley shaft 2----Washer

3----Synchronous belt TBN160MXL025 4----Synchronous pulley .P16MXL6.4
5----Stepper motor PK244M-01B 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw M2X8
7----Big flat washerGB96 3 8----Right pawl
9----Hexagon set screw M3X5 10----Belt presser
11----Hexagon socket head cap screw M3X5 12----Extension spring
13----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8 14----Bushing 2
(with washer)
15----Left pawl 16----Loading pusher
17----Panhead screw M3X8 18----Optical sensor GP1A05A
19----Guide rail MGN9C1R155ZOCM 20----Hexagon socket head cap screw
M3X8
21----Loading bracket 22----Shielding cover of the
loading/unloading motor home position
photocoupler
23----Panhead screw M3X8 (with washer) 24----Split washer GB/T896-86.4
25----Synchronous pulley .16 teeth MXL 6.4
Double baffle
5-105
Servicing
17. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X8 screws fixing the sample transmitting
adapter board and then remove the board (Figure 5-89).
1----Sample transmitting adapter board 2----Sample transmitting bottom board

5.11.4 Installation
Install the autoloader assembly according to the removal procedures stated above to in
reverse order.
Precautions and position adjustment during the installation:
1. Installation requirements for the loading unit:
Lean the guide rail against one side. Note that the stop screw should be installed
first.
Before assemble the synchronous pulley, grease the surface of the driven pulley
shaft.
After the synchronous pulley of the stepper motor is installed, level the end of the
motor shaft with the end surface of the synchronous pulley.
When installing the stepper motor, adjust the extension of the synchronous belt
before tightening the fixing screw.
5-106
Servicing
2. Installation requirements for the feeding unit:
Lean the guide rail against one side.
Before assembling the synchronous pulley, grease the surface of the driven pulley
shaft.
After the synchronous pulley of the stepper motor is installed, level the end of the
motor shaft with the end surface of the synchronous pulley.
When installing the stepper motor, adjust the extension of the synchronous belt
before tightening the fixing screw.
3. Installation requirements for the unloading unit:
Make sure the teeth bars can move smoothly after the installation. If the resistance is
great, repair them as necessary, otherwise the unit may not be repositioned.
Install the short teeth bar as shown in Figure 5-90.
Figure 5-90 Initial position of the short teeth bar
1) Start up the analyzer and go to the "Service" screen. CLICK the Debug button at the
lower right corner of the screen. At the Debug screen, CLICK the "Mix Unit" button to go to
the "Mix Unit" screen shown in Figure 5-91.
5-107
Servicing
Figure 5-91 Debug screen
Figure 5-92 Mix unit debug screen
2) At the "Mix Unit" screen, CLICK "Initialization" in the "Autoloader" area to initialize the
autoloader; then CLICK "Unload" to complete the initialization of the feeding motor, as shown
in Figure 5-92. Note: if the buttons gray out, CLICK the "Open compressor" button. After the
compressor is open, the buttons will be activated.
5-108
Servicing
3) Loosen the feeding and loading/unloading adjusting screws in turn, and then make
adjustment as per Figure 5-93: the distance between the short teeth bar of the unloading unit
and the sample transport platform shall be 0.5mm, and that between the long teeth bar and the
upper buffle plate of the feeding slider shall be 1mm. Secure the adjusting screws after the
adjustment.
Figure 5-93 Adjusting the unloading unit
4) Fill up the loading tray with tube racks (make sure the racks are placed close to both sides
of the loading tray). At the mix unit debug screen, CLICK the "Unload" button in the
"Autoloader" area to unload, and then check the position of the unloaded tube rack to see if
the next tube rack can be unloaded properly, as shown in Figure 5-94.
Figure 5-94 Checking the position of the unloaded tube rack
1. Installation requirements for the barcode scanner:
While installing the barcode scanner, make sure the beam is emitted in the center of
the barcode on the tube. Otherwise, adjust the position of the barcode scanner.
2. Adjusting the position of the front and back supporting plates of the autoloader with
5-109
Servicing
the fixture
Press the installation fixture firmly against the inside of the transport platform, and
slide it along to where the back boards are installed, as shown in Figure 5-95. Make
sure you do not place the fixture reversedly.
Figure 5-95 Placing the fixture
Install the front supporting plate: move the front supporting board close to the fixture
as shown in Figure 5-96 and Figure 5-97, and then mount the screws. Leave the first
screw not tightly secured; secure the second screw first, and then tighten the first
one.
z While securing the second screw, press the front supporting plate firmly
against the fixture, and make sure the fixuture cling to the transport
platform.
5-110
Servicing
Figure 5-96 Finding the proper position to install the front supporting board
Figure 5-97 Installing the front supporting board
Install the back supporting plate: adjust the position of the back supporting plate as
shown in Figure 5-98 and Figure 5-99, and then mount the screws. Leave the first
screw not tightly secured; secure the second screw first, and then tighten the first
one.
z While securing the second screw, press the front supporting plate firmly
against the fixture, and make sure the fixuture cling to the transport
platform.
5-111
Servicing
Figure 5-98 Adjusting the position of the back supporting plate
Figure 5-99 Installing the back supporting plate
After adjusting the front and back supporting plates, pull the tube rack to through the
passage between the supporting boards to check if it can get through smoothly, If not,
readjust the supporting plates.
1. For the adjustment of the manipulator, see Heading 7.3 Adjusting Positions of
BC-5800&5600 Auto Hematology Analyzer Instalation Guide.
2. See Figure 5-100 for the position and connection of sensors and stepper motors.
5-112
Servicing
Figure 5-100 Position of sensors and the stepper motors
No. Name Function Cable to be

connected
1 Unloader full status sensor Detect whether the unloader is S-FULL
full of tube racks
2 Unloader reset status sensor Detect whether the unloader is S-RST
reset and ready to unload
3 Autoloader feeding motor start Detect the start position of the S-YINT
position sensor autoloader feeding motor
4 Autoloader feeding sensor (left) Detect the left position of the S-LEFT
5 Internal barcode scanner Scan barcodes Sample
transport
adapter J6
6 Tube detecting sensor Detect whether there is a tube S-TUBE
in the rack position
7 Autoloader feeding sensor (right) Detect the right position of the S-RIGHT
8 Autoloader feeding motor stop Detect the stop position of the S-XEND
position sensor autoloader feeding motor
9 Sensitive switch for autoloader Stop loading when the rack is S-READY
loading successfully loaded
10 Sample feeding motor Feed samples M-ASY
11 Autoloader loading motor start Detect the start position of the S-XINT
position sensor autoloader loading motor
12 Sample loading motor Load samples M-ASLX
5-113
Servicing
5.11.5 Verification
1. Check whether each part is assembled and tightened well.
2. Check whether each signal line is connected correctly.
3. Startup the analyzer to check.
5-114
Servicing
5.12 Replacing the Autosampler and Mixer

Assemblies
5.12.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the autosampler and mixer assemblies.
5.12.2 Toolss
4mm hexagon wrench
6mm hexagon wrench
150mm monkey wrench
5.12.3 Removal
The autosampler and mixer assemblies can be removed in three procedures
To remove the autosampler and mixer assemblies from the analyzer.
1. Startup the analyzer to empty the fluidic system, and then shutdown and disconnect
the power cord of the analyzer.
2. Open the lower part of the cover (see Section 5.2.5 for details).
3. Pull out the seven optical sensor connectors and one stepper motor connector from
the two assemblies.
4. Pull out the five gas hoses from the cylinders.
5. Pull out the 3 fluidic tubes from the wipe block unit of the autosampler assembly, and
loosen the nut at the end of the pierce needle.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the four M4X8 screws fixing the two assemblies
and then remove the piercing and mixing assembly (Figure 5-101).
5-115
Servicing
Figure 5-101 Removing the autosampler and mixer assemblies -1
1----Autosampler and mixer assemblies 2----Panhead screw M4X8
7. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the five M4X8 screws fixing the autosampler
assembly and then remove the assembly (Figure 5-102).
5-116
Servicing
Figure 5-102 Removing the autosampler and mixer assemblies -2
1----Panhead screw M4x8 2----Piercing module

3----Mixing module
To disassemble the autosampler assembly:
1. Unscrew the two set screws and remove the cover (Figure 5-103).
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M4x20 screws, use the 2.5mm wrench to
unscrew the four M3x8 screws and then remove the wipe block unit (Figure 5-103).
5-117
Servicing
Figure 5-103 Disassembling the autosampler and mixer assemblies -1
1----Set screw 2----Cover

3----Wipe block unit 4----Hexagon socket head cap screw
M3x8
5----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M4x20
3. Use the 107 screwdriver and the 150mm wrench to disassemble the wipe block unit
according to Figure 5-104.
z Sharp pierce needle, operate with care.
5-118
Servicing
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x5 2----Discharging connector

3----O lock ring 4x1.5 4----Wipe block
5----Plug 6----Filling connector
7----Lock ring 8----Presser
9----piercing needle 10----Block
4. Use the 107 screwdriver, the 2.5mm wrench, the 6mm wrench and the 150mm
wrench to disassemble the rest parts of the autosampler according to Figure 5-105.
5-119
Servicing
15 16 17 18
14 19
13
12
11
10
20
9
8
7 21
6
5 22
4
3
1----Sample probe bed 2----Spring

3----Spring shaft 4----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3X20
5----Wipe block bed 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M4X10 (with washer)
7----Linear guide rail MGN9C2R175Z0CM 8----Hexagon socket head cap screw
M3X8
9----Tube locating shaft 10----Tube locating bed
11----Optical sensor GP1A05A 12----Bent plate
13----Cross-recessed panhead screw 14----Hexagon socket head cap screw
M3X5 M8X20
15----Little spring 16----Assembly bracket
5-120
Servicing
17----Localizer cover 18----Adjusting washer

19----Cross-recessed panhead screw 20----Upright connector
assembly M4X8
21----Assembly installation bed 22----cylinder JDAR-40X50
To disassemble the auto-mixer assembly:
1. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X10 screw fixing the optical sensors and
then remove the six optical sensors (Figure 5-106).
2. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the cylinder nut and the connection bushing that
fix the cylinder and then remove the cylinder (Figure 5-106).
3. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the tube connector on the cylinder (Figure 5-106).
4. Use the 2.5mm wrench to unscrew the M3X12 screw that fixes the swinging arm, and
then remove the arm (Figure 5-106).
5. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M3X8 screw that fixes the pinchers, and then
remove the pinchers (Figure 5-106).
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the four M3X8 screws that fix the stepper motor,
and then remove the motor (Figure 5-106).
7. Use the 1.5mm wrench to unscrew the M3X5 screw that fixes the induction block, and
then remove the block (Figure 5-106).
10
8
7 11
6 12
5 13
4 14
3
15
2 16
1 17
5-121
Servicing
1----Bracket 2----Connection bushing

3----Stepper motor PK244M-03B 4----Panhead screw M3X8
5----Hexagon socket head cap screw 6----Swinging arm
M3X12
7----Pincher 8----Pad
9----Connection bed 10----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M4X10
11----Connection bracket 12----Hexagon set screw M3X5
13----Optical sensor GP1A05A 14----Induction block
15----Cylinder CJ2B16-30S 16----Tube connector SQC4-M5
17----Photocoupler shielding cover
8. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the cylinder nut and the connection bushing that
fix the cylinder and then remove the cylinder (Figure 5-107).
9. Use the 150mm wrench to unscrew the tube connector of the cylinder (Figure 5-107).
10. Use the 4mm wrench to unscrew the two M5x6 screws fixing the cylinder bracket and
then remove the bracket (Figure 5-107).
11. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the two M4x8 screws fixing the connection bent
plate and then remove the plate (Figure 5-107).
5-122
Servicing
1----Panhead screw M4x8 2----Connection bent plate

3----Connection bed 4----Connection bushing
5----Cylinder bracket 6----Hexagon socket head cap screw
M5x6
7----Tube connector SQC4-M5 8----Cylinder CJ2L16-125
9----Bracket
12. Use the 2.5mm wrench to disassemble the rest parts of the mixing module according
to Figure 5-108.
5-123
Servicing
1----Connection bracket 2----Linear guide rail MGN9C1R75Z0CM

3----Hexagon socket head cap screw 4----Bracket
M3x5
5----Linear guide rail MGN9C1R175Z0CM 6----Hexagon socket head cap screw
M3x8
7----Connection bed
5.12.4 Installation
Install the autosampler and auto-mixer assemblies according to the removal procedures stated
above to in reverse order.
Precautions and position adjustment during the installation:
1. Lean the linear guide rail against one side. Note that the stop screw should be
installed first.
2. Make sure the moving unit can move upward and downward/forward and backward
smoothly.
3. After the installation, adjust the initial position of the pincher: Unscrew the two locking
nuts on the front end of the cylinder rods and adjust the connection bushings of
cylinders to fix the pincher position (See Figure 5-109 for how to adjust the pincher).
Then tighten the locking nuts.
5-124
Servicing
Figure 5-109 Pincher adjustment
4. Adjust the left and right initial position of the pincher (Figure 5-110).
Unscrew the locking screws on the swinging arm, startup the analyzer (you may ignore the
mixing motor error reported), enter the Service Debug Mix unit screen, and CLICK
the Init. button for three times so that the swinging arm is on the vertical position. Lean the
swinging arm on the stop baffle to the right, place several pieces of paper between the arm
and the baffle, and then tighten the swinging arm. Initialize the mixing motor again to check the
swinging arm position. The swinging arm should move from the initial position to the stop
position and then return the initial position. When the arm is on the initial position, there should
also be tiny clearance between the swinging arm and the stop baffle so that the arm would not
touch the baffle. If not, repeat the procedures above until the position is proper.
7
6
5
5-125
Servicing
Figure 5-110 Pincher adjustment
1----Connection bushing 2----Locking nut

3----Locking nut 4----Connection bushing
5----Baffle 6----Hexagon socket head cap screw
M3x12
7----Swinging arm
5. Adjust the tube sampling position (Figure 5-111).
After the installation, the autosampler assembly needs to be adjusted to make sure that the
axis deviation of the pierce needle and the sample tube is no greater than 2mm in the diameter
direction. The five holes on the assembly bracket are used to adjust the forward and backward
direction of the assembly, and the four big holes and the pad on the assembly installation bed
are used to adjust the up and down/left and right/around position of the assembly. After the
adjustment, glue and then lock the fixing screws.
Parallel the tube to the pierce needle: Push a tube rack manually on the Y feeding direction,
place an empty collection tube in the clipping position (the position leveling the mixing motor),
enter the Service Debug Mix unit screen, and then CLICK the Mix button to
rotate the tube to the sampling position. Use a ruler to check the parallel of the tube and the
pierce needle in the front and side of the tube. If they are not parallel, adjust the relevant
screws until you see that they are parallel.
Adjust to make the tube and the pierce needle coaxial: Remove the cap and plug from an
empty tube, use a gummed paper to envelop the tubing opening and place the tube into the
rack. Enter the Service Debug Mix unit screen, CLICK the Sample&Mix&pierce
button to pierce the tube, and then CLICK the Return tube button to return the tube to the
rack. Adjust the autosampler unit position through the piercing hole. Repeat the procedures
above if necessary until the piercing hole is in the center of the tube opening.
5-126
Servicing
Figure 5-111 Tube position adjustment
6. Adjust the wipe block (Figure 5-112). Loosen the 4 fixing screws of the connecting rail
block on the wipe block bed (need not remove the screws), place the locating piece
between the wipe block and the cylinder bed, press the wipe block onto the locating
piece, and then secure the 4 screws and remove the locating piece. Ensure that the
press plate at the bottom of the wipe block is not pressed by the locating piece.
Figure 5-112 Adjusting the wipe block position
5-127
Servicing
1----Fixing screws 2----Locating piece
7. You can adjust the manual control screw at the end of the cylinder to control the
piercing depth. See procedures below (Figure 5-113).
Place a standard tube (13mm*81.2mm) in the tube rack. Enter the Service Debug
Mix unit screen, CLICK the Sample&Mix&pierce button, and then check if the distance
from the wipe pedestal to the piercing needle fixing pedestal is 1-2mm. If not, adjust the
cylinder stroke knob, and then secure the cylinder stroke retainer ring, as shown in Figure
5-113.
Figure 5-113 Pierce needle adjustment
8. Refer to Appendix E Tubing in this manual for the tube connection.
9. See Figure 5-114 for the position and connection of the sensors and motors.
5-128
Servicing
Figure 5-114 Sensor positions

1 Sensor for ready tube S-PU
2 Manipulator Z coordinate up sensor S-ZUP
3 Manipulator Z coordinate down sensor S-ZDOWN
4 Sample mixing motor M-ASR
5 Rotating direction start sensor S-ARST
6 Rotating direction end sensor S-AREND
7 Manipulator X coordinate backward sensor S-XBACK
8 Manipulator X coordinate forward sensor S-XFRONT
5.12.5 Verification
1. Check whether each part is assembled and tightened well.
2. Check whether each signal line is connected correctly.
3. Check whether the air tubes and fluidic tubes are connected correctly.
4. Startup the analyzer to check the movement of the auto sampler and auto-mixer
assemblies.
5-129
Servicing
5.13 Replacing the Pneumatic Unit

5.13.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the pneumatic unit.
5.13.2 Tools
101 slotted head screwdriver
300mm monkey wrench
Nipper pliers
3mm hexagon wrench
5.13.3 Removal
1. Power off the analyzer. Disconnect the power cord, control line of the pneumatic
control board and pressure/vacuum lines from the pneumatic unit.
2. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 M3X6 screws securing the pneumatic unit
cover, then remove the cover (Figure 5-115).
Figure 5-115 Disassembling the pneumatic unit-1
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6 2----Pneumatic unit

(with washer)
3----Pneumatic unit cover
5-130
Servicing
3. Disconnect the 6 pneumatic lines from the vacuum pump, release valve and screwed
connectors (Figure 5-116).
1----Screwed connector SQMH-C6-6 3----Release valve AP100-01

2----Vacuum pump
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws fixing the shielding cover of
the pneumatic unit control board, and then remove the shielding cover.
5. Disconnect all connectors from the pneumatic control board and 3 connectors from
the power filter.
6. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the M4X10 screws securing the two earth wires
(Figure 5-117).
7. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws securing the power filter, then
remove the filter (Figure 5-117).
8. Use the 300mm wrench to unscrew the retaining screw securing the release valve,
then remove the valve (Figure 5-117).
9. Use the nipper pliers to unscrew the 2 screws fixing the control line of the interface
board/pneumatic control board, then remove the line (Figure 5-117).
10. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X6 screws securing the upper spacer,
then remove the spacer (Figure 5-117).
5-131
Servicing
1----Locking nut 2----Cross-recessed countersunk screw

M3X6
3----Pneumatic unit 4----Release valve AP100-01
5----Shielding cover of the control board 6----Upper spacer
7----Cross-recessed panhead screw 8----Control line of the interface
M4X10 (with washer) board/pneumatic control board
9----Inch screw #-40X5+8-4 10----Power filter
11. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X6 screws securing the pneumatic
control board, then remove the board (Figure 5-118).
12. Use the 3mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M4X6 screws fixing the fan, then remove the
fan (Figure 5-118).
13. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M3X6 screws securing the temperature
sensor, then remove the sensor (Figure 5-118).
5-132
Servicing
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6 2----Control board

(washer)
3----Shielding cover of the control board 4----Fan KD1212PMB1-6A
5---- Cross-recessed panhead screw 6----Temperature sensor
M3X6
7---- Socket cap screw M4X6 8----Upper spacer
14. Remove the fuse tubes by prizing the tube bracket with the 101 screwdriver (Figure
5-119).
5-133
Servicing
1----Power filter 2----Fuse tube

3----Bracket
15. Lift up the vacuum pump to release the studs, then remove the vacuum pump (Figure
5-120).
16. Unscrew the stud from the base plate of the air compressor using the 300mm wrench
(Figure 5-120).
17. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 M5X10 screws securing the base plate and
guide rod, then remove the base plate and guide rod (Figure 5-120).
18. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 8 M3X6 screws securing the lower spacer,
then remove the spacer (Figure 5-120).
19. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 2 M4X8 screws securing the capacitor, then
remove the capacitor (Figure 5-120).
1----Cross-recessed countersunk screw 2----Lower spacer

M3X6
3----Guide rod 4----Concussion spring
5----Capacitor 6----Cross-recessed panhead screw
M5X10
5-134
Servicing
7----Base plate of the air compressor 8----Pneumatic unit

9----Vacuum pump 10----Sound isolator
11----Cross-recessed panhead screw 12----Capacitor bracket
M4X8
20. Use the 3mm wrench to unscrew the 4 M4X6 screws fixing the fan, then remove the
fan (Figure 5-121).
21. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M5X10 screws fixing the guide rod, then
remove the rod (Figure 5-121).
1----Socket cap screw M4X6 2----Fan KD1212PMB1

3----Cross-recessed panhead screw 4----Lower spacer
M5X10
5----Guide rod
22. Remove the remaining parts from the pneumatic unit using the 107 screwdriver and
300mm wrench (Figure 5-122).
5-135
Servicing
1----Cross-recessed panhead screw 2----Rubber foot PGGL 20 (black)

M4X10 (with washer)
3----Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X6 4----Fixing plate
(with washer)
5----Pneumatic unit frame 6----12V green indicator JI-816L2
7----Screwed connector SQMH-C6-6 8----Internal tooth washer 14 GB/T861.1
9----Nut
5.13.4 Installation
Install the pneumatic unit according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
Precautions:
1. Do not disassemble the sponges from the connections.
2. Install the fan with the text side facing downwards.
3. Connect all connectors according to the labels.
5. Connect cables to the three slots on the power filter (Figure 5-123).
5-136
Servicing
Figure 5-123 Connecting cables to the power filter
1----For yellow/green cable (PE) 2----For brown cable (L)

3----For blue cable (N)
5.13.5 Verification
4. Power on the analyzer and verify your replacement
5. Forced startup of the pneumatic unit: use a solder stick or iron wire to short-circuit Pin
2 and 8 of the control cable socket, and the pneumatic unit will be started up.
Figure 5-124 Forced startup of the pneumatic unit
5-137
Servicing
5.14 Replacing the Ambient Temperature Sensor
5.14.1 Purpose
Follow the procedures to replace the temperature sensor.
5.14.2 Tools
5.14.3 Removal
2. Remove the lower front cover as per Section 5.2.5 .
3. Disconnect the J32 electric connecter from the driver board as Figure 5-125 shows.
4. Use the 107 screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M3X12 screws securing the fixing support,
and then remove the fixing support, ambient temperature sensor and connecting line
as Figure 5-125 shows.
Figure 5-125 Disassembling the ambient temperature sensor
1----Cross-recessed screw M3X12 (with 2----Fixing support

washer)
3----Ambient temperature sensor and
connecting line
5-138
Servicing
5.14.4 Installation
Install the temperature sensor according to the steps stated above in reverse order.
5.14.5 Verification
2. Check whether the temperature sensor is connected correctly.
5-139
Servicing
5.15 Replacing the Blood Sensor
5.15.1 Purpose
Because there will be something wrong with the blood sensor when it is used, it should
be replaced during maintenance.
5.15.2 Tools
5.15.3 Removal
1. Open the top cover (See Section 5.2.4 );
2. Pull out the electric connection-pegs of the blood sensor;
3. Open the upper cover (See Section 5.2.3 );
4. Pull out the pipe wedged in the blood sensor;
5. Loosen and take away the two pan head screws with cross recess M3X6 with 107
cross screwdriver and take away the blood sensor (Figure 5-126)
Figure 5-126 Disassembling the blood sensor
1----Fixing board 2 of blood sensor 2----Fixing board of blood sensor

3----Blood sensor 4----Pipe
5----Pan head screw with cross recess
M3X6
5-140
Servicing
5.15.4 Installation
Reverse the removal procedures to install it.
Note:
1. If the pipe is scratched when it is installed, please replace it.
2. Connect the connector plugs and connectors correctly as instructed.
5.15.5 Verification
1. Check whether all components are installed and fixed well.
2. Check whether the electric connection-pegs are connected correctly.
3. Check whether the pipes are connected correctly.
4. In auto-sampling mode, continuously make once normal sample test and blank
background test. If Insufficient aspiration is not prompted of the normal sample,
but Abnormal sample or Insufficient aspiration can be prompted in
background test, then the replacing is normal.
5-141
Servicing
5.16 Replacing the Filtering Cartridge

5.16.1 Purpose
Because the filtering cartridge may be blocked by dust after being used for a long time (about 2
years), it should be replaced during maintenance.
5.16.2 Tools
104S-#1(38) cross-recessed screwdriver
4mm hexagon wrench
Nipper pliers
5.16.3 Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord of the analyzer.
3. Pull out the 2 gas hoses from the inlet and outlet of the filter and the draining tube at
the bottom.
4. Use the 104S-#1(38) cross-recessed screwdriver to unscrewn the M4X8 screw fixing
the filter.
5. Remove the filter.
6. Loosen the top cap of the filter, and disassemble the cap and the filter bowl (as shown
in Figure 5-127).
7. Use the nipper pliers to loosen (tweak counterclockwise) the manger board (as shown
in Figure 5-128)
5-142
Servicing
Top cap
Filtering
cartridge
Filter bowl
Figure 5-127 Disassembling the filter - 1
Manger board
5-143
Servicing
Guide plate
5.16.4 Installation
1. Install a new filtering cartridge, and then secure the guide plate.
2. Secure the manger board to the top cover by tweaking it clockwise with the nipper
pliers.
3. Secure the filter bowl and the top cover.
4. Perform the steps stated above in the reverse order.
z Make sure you install the top cap properly as indicated by the arrows on the
cap.
z Connect the gas hoses properly to make sure there is no leakage.
5.16.5 Verification
2. Check whether the gas hoses are connected correctly.
5-144
6 Optical System
6.1 Optical System Adjustment and Servicing
Purpose
Replace and repair critical erroneous parts of the optical system.
Tools
Antistatic gloves
Hexagonal wrench
Cross-headed screwdriver
Straight slot screwdriver
Horologic screwdriver
Duke (4K-07) 7um standard particles
RD calibrator, control or RD-5D control (choose only one kind depending on specific
situations)
Oscilloscope or oscillometer
Removal and Installation

Before removing optical parts, you should open the right door and top cover of the analyzer
(refer to "Servicing" for details), and then remove the screws (see Figure 6-1) to open the
shielding cover of the optical system. After installation completes, restore the shielding cover
and fix it with screws. The removal and installation procedure above will not be repeated later
in this manual.
z Disposable dust-free gloves must be worn for all operations of the optical
system.
6-1
Optical System
Figure 6-1 Opening the cover of the optical system
6.2 Removing and Installing Optical System

Assemblies
The optical system can be divided in to 6 parts: front light assembly, flow cell assembly, rear
light assembly, light splitting assembly, rear light collecting assembly and rear light detecting
assembly.
z When removing and installing boards, antistatic gloves must be worn.
z Please make sure that power is off and power cord is disconnected when
removing and installing boards.
z Do not plug or unplug laser semiconductor before power is off, or the laser
semiconductor can be damaged.
6.2.1 Laser driver board

Laser driver board provides power supply for the laser and controls its output power so that it
can work stably.
1. Turn off the power, open the cover of the laser and take the connection wire off the
driver board
6-2
Optical System
2. Loosen the fixing screw 1 and take off the support of the laser driver board.
3. Loosen screw 2, take off the laser driver board and replace it with a new one, and
then install the new laser driver board and fix the screws.
Figure 6-2Installing the laser driver board
1--Fixing screws of the laser driver board 2--Fixing screws of the laser driver board
support
6.2.2 Front light assembly

The function of the front light assembly is to generate the inputting laser beam to the flow cell
that meets certain space distribution requirement. Follow below procedure strictly when
removing and installing the front light assembly. See Figure 6-3 for its composition. You can
only remove the front light assembly from the base plate, removing the components or
sub-assemblies in the front light assembly is not allowed.
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord;
2. Unplug the laser power plug on the laser control board, disconnect plugs of the
heater, the temperature sensor and the overheat protection switch.
3. Loosen the fix screws on both sides of the front light assembly with the hexagonal
wrench, and take off the front light assembly.
4. The front light assembly is adjusted by special tools, so users are only allowed to
remove the assembly from the base plate without dismantling any component or
sub-assembly in it.
6-3
Optical System
Figure 6-3 Front light assembly
1--Heat preserving cotton of laser 4--Collimation lens assembly

2--Lateral heat preserving cotton of laser 5--Front light orienting assembly
3--Laser assembly 6--Cylindrical mirror assembly
5. If the error of the front light assembly is confirmed, the assembly needs to be
replaced.
6. Finally connect the laser power plug and the plugs of the heater, temperature sensor
and over-heat protection switch.
6.2.3 Flow cell assembly

The function of the flow cell is to form stable sheath fluid, enabling the particles to be
detected passing through the flow cell at a certain speed and interacting with the inputting
laser beam, thus generating scattered light. Please follow below procedure strictly when
removing and installing the flow cell assembly.
1. Empty fluidic tubing when starting up the analyzer, and then power it off and
disconnect its power cord;
2. Loosen the two M4 screws fixing the rear light assembly to the base plate, then
remove the entire rear light assembly;
3. Pull out the sheath fluid inlet tube, sample inlet tube and the waste outlet tube (at the
outlet of the flow cell); loosen the four M3x10 screws (with washer) with
cross-headed screwdriver, and then loosen the two M3x10 screws (with washer)
fixing the flow cell tray, finally take out the flow cell assembly. See Figure 6-4.
6-4
Optical System
z Do not bend the three-way connector when dismantling the flow cell.
Figure 6-4 Flow cell fluidic tubing
1--Sample inlet tube (three-way 2--sheath fluid inlet tube

connector)
3--M3x10 panhead screw (with washer) 4-- Flow cell tray
4. Loosen the two connecting screws with the hexagonal wrench; the flow cell then
becomes two parts: rectifier assembly and detection assembly. See Figure 6-5.
5. The detection assembly and the fluid transport assembly need to be cleaned and
replaced according to specific situations.
Figure 6-5 Composition of the flow cell
6-5
Optical System
1--Rectifier assembly 3--Detection assembly

2--O ring 4--Hexagonal screw
6. Install the flow cell assemblies per the above procedure in reverse order.
6.2.4 Rear light assembly

The function of the rear light assembly is to collect scattered light produced by the particles to
be detected, providing the light to the rear light detection assembly for detection. Follow
below procedure strictly when removing and installing the rear light assembly. See Figure 6-6
for its composition.
2. Loosen the fix screws on both sides of the rear light assembly with the hexagonal
wrench, and take off the rear light assembly.
3. Loosen the two fixing screws on the diaphragm lens assembly with the hexagonal
wrench, and then take off the assembly.
Figure 6-6 Rear light assembly
1--Diaphragm lens assembly 2--Rear light orienting assembly
4. Replace the rear light diaphragm lens assembly, and install it to the rear light
orienting assembly to form a new rear light assembly. Please note that the
diaphragm lens assembly and the rear light orienting assembly must be in precise
seamless contact. Then install the rear light collimation assembly to the optical base
plate and fix it. Please note that before installing new rear light assembly, you need to
clean the surfaces of all assemblies with dust-free cloth and absolute alcohol, and
wait until the surfaces get dry.
6.2.5 Light splitting assembly

The function of the light splitting assembly is to split the scattered light collected into two
paths, and provides them to the low-angle PD assembly and the high-angle PD assembly
respectively for detection. See Figure 6-7 for the composition of the light splitting assembly.
6-6
Optical System
2. Loosen the fix screws on both sides of the light splitting assembly with the hexagonal
wrench, and take off the assembly.
3. Remove the two clamping rings with the straight slot screwdriver; loosen the screws
on the top plate and the side plates with the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the
top and side plate.
4. Remove the two protective gaskets; take off the light-splitting lens carefully.
5. When Replacing the light splitting lens, you need to pay attention to the direction of
the lens (see Figure 6-7). Finish installation per the removing procedure in reserve
order.
Figure 6-7 Light splitting assembly
1----Light splitting lens seat 4----Clamping rings

2----Side plate 5----Gasket
3----Top plate 6----Light splitting lens
6.2.6 Rear light collecting assembly

The function of rear light collecting assembly is to focus the scattered light that has passed
through the light splitting assembly to the PD detecting target area to promote collecting
efficiency. It consists of LAS assembly and MAS assembly.
LAS assembly
2. Loosen the two fixing screws of the LAS assembly with hexagonal wrench, and take
the assembly off from the optical base plate.
3. Loosen the two screws fixing the diaphragm with the cross-headed screwdriver,
remove the low-angle diaphragm; loosen the two screws fixing the rear light focus
6-7
Optical System
lens assembly with the screwdriver and remove the assembly.
Figure 6-8 LAS assembly
1----Low-angle diaphragm 2----Rear light focus lens assembly
4. Replace and then fix the low-angle diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly
according to specific situations.
5. Install the LAS assembly to the optical base plate and fix it with the hexagonal
wrench. Make sure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagonal screw
when fixing the assembly.
MAS assembly
2. Loosen the two fixing screws of the MAS assembly with hexagonal wrench, and take
the assembly off from the optical base plate.
3. Loosen the two screws fixing the diaphragm with the cross-headed screwdriver,
remove the diaphragm; loosen the two screws fixing the rear light focus lens
assembly with the screwdriver and remove the assembly.
6-8
Optical System
Figure 6-9 MAS assembly
1----High-angle diaphragm 2----Rear light focus lens assembly
4. Replace and then fix the diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly
according to specific situations.
5. Install the MAS assembly to the optical base plate and fix it with the hexagonal
wrench. Make sure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagonal screw
when fixing the assembly.
6.2.7 Rear light detecting assembly

The function of the rear light detecting assembly is to detect scattered light signal and convert
it into electric signal for subsequent processing. It consists of low-angle PD assembly and
high-angle PD assembly.
Low-angle PD assembly
2. Loosen the two fixing screws of the low-angle PD assembly with hexagonal wrench,
and take the assembly off from the optical base plate.
3. Loosen the two screws fixing the shielding cover with the cross-headed screwdriver,
and take the shielding cover off from the low-angle PD assembly.
6-9
Optical System
Figure 6-10 Low-angle PD assembly
1----Shielding cover 3----PD

2----Low-angle pre-amplification board 4----PD sheath
4. Remove the low-angle pre-amplification board from the PD assembly with the
cross-headed screwdriver, then remove PD slide, replace components and install
them per the procedure above in reserve order. Pay attention not to touch PD
surface.
5. Install the shielding cover to the low-angle PD assembly, and then install the PD
assembly to the optical base plate.
High-angle PD assembly
2. Loosen the two fixing screws of the high-angle PD assembly with hexagonal wrench,
and take the assembly off from the optical base plate.
3. Loosen the two screws fixing the shielding cover with the cross-headed screwdriver,
and take the shielding cover off from the high-angle PD assembly.
6-10
Optical System
Figure 6-11 High-angle PD assembly
1----Shielding cover 3----PD

2----High-angle pre-amplification board 4----PD sheath
4. Remove the high-angle pre-amplification board from the PD assembly with the
cross-headed screwdriver, then remove PD slide, replace components and install
them per the procedure above in reserve order. Pay attention not to touch PD
surface.
5. Install the shielding cover to the high-angle PD assembly, and then install the PD
assembly to the optical base plate.
6.3 Adjustment
After removing any assemblies in the optical system, the system needs to be adjusted. The
adjustment procedure can be adapted according to specific situations of removal.
The adjustment of the optical system can be classified as rough adjustment and fine-tuning.
The purpose of rough adjustment is to collimate all optical assemblies in the system to make
them on the same optic axis so that the system can generate signals quickly when the
operation sequence is detecting standard particles. The purpose of fine-tuning is to ensure
the optical system is in the optimal position. By observing signal waveform with oscilloscope,
the position of the optical assemblies can be subtly adjusted to make the generated signal
6-11
Optical System
meet adjustment standard.

Note: Disposable dust-free gloves must be worn for all operations of the optical
system.
6.3.1 Rough adjustment

Rough adjustment can be divided into the following parts: front light assembly adjustment,
flow cell adjustment, rear light adjustment, rear light collecting diaphragm adjustment and
rear light detecting PD assembly adjustment.
1. Front light assembly adjustment
Adjustment purpose: In horizontal direction, adjust the emitting direction of the front light to
the designed optic axis.
Adjustment principle: the laser beam is distributed symmetrically along the optic axis; when
emitting vertically, the incoming light and the reflected light match together.
Adjustment procedure: first, install rear light assembly, making it close to the positioning
pins (see Figure 6-12), and then collimate the front light assembly and the positioning pins, fix
the fixing screws properly (make sure the front light assembly is close to the optical base
plate and can be turned at the same time), power on the laser, adjust the angle of the laser
assembly to turn the far field spot of the emitting laser vertical. Put the rear light collimating
assembly close to the positioning pins, observe whether the reflected light from the rear light
collimating lens and the incoming light are on the same axis with the hexagonal wrench, turn
the front light assembly slowly to make them match together and fix the front light assembly.
See Figure 6-13
Figure 6-12 Installing rear light assembly
6-12
Optical System
Figure 6-13 Adjusting front light assembly
2. Flow cell adjustment

Adjustment purpose: adjust the flow cell to make its surface be vertical to the incoming
light.
Adjustment principle: when emitting vertically, the reflected light and the incoming light
match together.
Adjustment procedure: turn the flow cell into the optical path (make sure not to put the
aperture detection unit into the optical path), observe whether the reflected light from the flow
cell surface and the incoming light are on the same axis with the hexagonal wrench, adjust
the position of the flow cell slowly to make them match together and fix the flow cell.
Figure 6-14 Rough adjustment of the flow cell
6-13
Optical System
3. Adjustment of the rear light assembly

Horizontal adjustment of rear light position
Adjustment purpose: ensure that the front light and rear light are almost at the same axis.
Adjustment principle: after passing through the nodal point of the lens, the transmission
direction of the light will not change.
Adjustment procedure:
Step 1: take off the rear light assembly, put a piece of blank paper behind the MAS assembly
(at the distance of 20cm), observe whether the spot on the blank paper are symmetrical after
passing through the light splitting lens and the diaphragm of the MAS assembly. Adjust the
screw stem on the MAS assembly to make the spot symmetrical. See Figure 6-15.
Figure 6-15 Horizontal adjustment of rear light collimating assembly
Step2: install the rear light assembly, fix the assembly on the base plate using M4 hexagonal
screws, spring washer and plain washer (ensure that the rear light assembly can be moved
along the pins). Move the rear light collimating assembly horizontally along the positioning
pins and observe the position of the spot on the diaphragm. When the spot is at the center of
the diaphragm (see Figure 6-16 Horizontal adjustment of rear light collimating assembly
completes), fix the M4 hexagonal screws on the base plate.
6-14
Optical System
Figure 6-16 Horizontal adjustment of rear light collimating assembly completes
Step 3: Loosen the 2 M3 hexagonal screws connecting the rear light diaphragm lens
assembly and the orienting assembly slightly to pre-fixing status; see Figure 6-17. Move the
diaphragm lens assembly slightly to turn the spot on the high-angle diaphragm to the center
of the two vertical rulings on the MAS diaphragm; see Figure 6-18. The vertical adjustment of
the diaphragm lens assembly is done; the last step is to fix the screws on the diaphragm lens
assembly.
Loosen the two

screws slightly to
pre-fixing status
Figure 6-17 Adjust rear light position vertically
Figure 6-18 The spot on the high-angle diaphragm is at the center of the two rulings
z The rear light assembly must be close to the positioning pins during
adjustment.
4. Adjustment of the rear light collecting assembly
Adjusting the diaphragm of the LAS assembly
Adjustment purpose: put the LAS diaphragm symmetrically with the optic axis, select
6-15
Optical System
small-angle scattered light by using masking area;

Step 1: put a piece of rough blank paper at the back of the LAS diaphragm, turn the horizontal
adjusting screws to make the spot symmetric horizontally (see Figure 6-19).
step 2: turn the vertical adjusting screws to make the spot symmetric vertically (see Figure
6-19).
Figure 6-19 Adjusting LAS diaphragm
5. Horizontal adjustment of flow cell position

Before conducting fine-tuning, turn the aperture detection unit of the flow cell into the optical
path, observe the diaphragm of the MAS assembly. When the shadow image of the aperture
distributes symmetrically on the diaphragm, the flow cell has been turned into the optical path.
See Figure 6-20.
Figure 6-20 Adjusting the flow cell
1----Horizontal adjusting rotary knob of

the flow cell
6. Adjustment of the direct light masking diaphragm

After the horizontal adjustment of the flow cell is done, turn the direct light masking
diaphragm into the optical path to mask the most intensive light. Two methods can be used to
judge whether the diaphragm is at the position.
6-16
Optical System
Put a piece of paper (with a line on it) on the MAS diaphragm, make the shadow image of the
flow cell distribute symmetrically by the line; see Figure 6-21. Adjust the direct light masking
diaphragm, when the masked spot distributes symmetrically by the line, the adjustment is
done.
Figure 6-21 Adjusting direct light masking diaphragm
1----Spot 3----The line

2----Flow cell aperture 4----High-angle diaphragm
After the adjustment completes, pre-fix the two screws of the direct light masking diaphragm
(see Figure 6-22).
Figure 6-22 The direct light masking diaphragm
1----fixing screws of the direct light

masking diaphragm
7. Adjusting the rear light detection assembly (low-angle part)
Low-angle PD assembly adjustment
Adjustment purpose: ensure that the PD aperture is at the center of the optical path and the
scattered light can be collected by PD completely;
Adjustment procedure: adjust the horizontal and vertical position of the low-angle PD
assembly so that the center of the spot transmitting from the LAS diaphragm can be received
6-17
Optical System
by the aperture completely (see Figure 6-23)
Figure 6-23 Adjusting small-angle PD assembly
1----Light filtering aperture diaphragm 2----Low-angle spot
High-angle PD assembly adjustment
Like low-angle PD assembly adjustment, high-angle PD assembly adjustment is to ensure

that the spot center is completely received by the aperture (see Figure 6-24).
Spot generated after the

beam passes through the
high-angle diaphragm, the
PD aperture must be at the
center of the spot
Figure 6-24 Collimated spot of front light low-angle PD assembly
After all the above steps, the rough adjustment is almost completed, which can ensure that
each assembly is placed symmetrically by the optic axis. The fine-tuning of optical system is
described below.
6.3.2 Fine-tuning
The purpose of fine-tuning is to make sure that the optical system is at the optimal position so
that it can detect the scattered light of designed angle. Fine-tuning concerns the following
three aspects: (1) the laser beam is focused on cell flow;(2) the center of sample flow and the
spot matches together;(3) adjust rear light assembly so that it can detect scattered light of
designed angle. So the main adjustment points are the axial position of the front light system,
horizontal position of the flow cell and the position of rear light collimating assembly.
6-18
Optical System
1. Adjusting the axial position of the front light assembly

Adjustment purpose: ensure that the focus of laser beam is on the cell flow.
Step 1: measure the voltage of test point tp2vref on the laser control board to see if it reaches
4V, if not, adjust the adjustable resistor on the laser control board to turn the voltage to 4V;
Step 2: connect TPOUT on the pre-amplification board of low-angle PD assembly (or connect
TP43 LAS_IN on the signal processing board) to oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1); the settings
of the oscilloscope are: voltage: 50mv/div, time: 500ns/div, AC coupling.
Step 3: use standard particle as the detection sample, add 3 drops of Duke (4K-07) 7um
standard particles with 1.5ml centrifugal tube, then add diluent or ion water to turn the volume
to 1ml. Note that the diluted standard particle solution must be used within 12 hours.
Step 4: perform normal open-vial standard particle test, observe signals of oscilloscope
channel 1, meanwhile adjust the axial position rotary knob of the front light assembly (see
Figure 6-28) until the output signals reach the maximum level and are normally distributed,
the pulse width is around 1.3us and is at its lowest level (see Figure 6-26). And then fix the
screws of the front light orienting assembly.
Figure 6-25 Fine-tuning front light axial position
1----Rotary knob of front light axial 2----Fixing screws of laser axial

adjustment adjustment
6-19
Optical System
Figure 6-26 Signal chart of the front light system outputting standard particles
Note: The sample push cycle of the DIFF channel is 8.5s; in order to simplify adjustment
process and generate signals quickly, you can adjust the front light axial adjusting rotary knob
in advance to turn the distance between the front faces of the front light orienting assembly
and the orienting assembly base to 3mm.
2. Horizontal fine-tuning of flow cell position

Adjustment purpose: ensure that the center of sample flow is at the center of the spot.
Step 1: perform open-vial standard particle test, observe the peak value of the high-angle
signals of the oscilloscope to see if it is stable;
Step 2: adjust the horizontal position of the flow cell until the peak value of the particle signals
displayed on the oscilloscope turns to the maximum and is even;
Figure 6-27 Horizontal adjustment of flow cell position
1----Horizontal adjusting rotary knob of

the flow cell
3. Fine-tuning rear light collimating assembly and direct light masking diaphragm
Adjustment purpose: 1 ensure that the PD assembly detects scattered light of the designed
collecting angle.
6-20
Optical System
2 ensure the direct light masking diaphragm and the sample flow are coaxial.
Step 1: connect TPOUT on the pre-amplification board of high-angle PD assembly (or
connect TP44 MAS_IN on the signal processing board) to oscilloscope channel 2 (CH2); the
settings of the oscilloscope are: voltage: 100mv/div, time: 500ns/div, AC coupling.
step 3: perform normal open-vial standard particle test, adjust the rotary knob of the rear light
collimating assembly, and observe signal pulses of the oscilloscope channel 2 (i.e. high-angle
signal pulses); when the peak value of the pulses is turned to its maximum and the signals
are stable, fix the screws of the rear light collimating assembly.
Step 3: switch to channel 1 (CH1), observe whether the peak value of the signals is
200mv10mv; if it is outside the range, adjust the adjustable resistor on the laser control
board to make it fall within the range 200mv10mv.
Step 4: observe whether the peak value of channel 2 (CH2) is above 800mv; if not, adjust the
rotary knob of the rear light collimating assembly. When the peak value is adjusted to the
defined range, check whether it is at its maximum.
4 Validation of the optical system fine-tuning

Step 1: after the fine-tuning is completed, install and connect the optical system to the
analyzer. Select mode: OV-WB-CBC+DIFF. And then perform counting by using 7um
standard particles. After counting completes, enter "Table Review"--"OpAdjust"--"DIFF
channel". Enter 7um CG target value "36" into "CG Target"--"Particle 1 LAS", calculate the
initial DIFF LAS gain.
Step 2: enter "Setup" and "Gain" screen successively, input the initial DIFF LAS gain
obtained from step 1 and set the initial DIFF MAS gain to 20
Step 3: after finishing above steps, select mode "OV-WB-CBC+5DIFF" and then start
counting using the 7um standard particles. A standard particle scattergram will be generated
(see Figure 6-28):
Figure 6-28 Standard particle scattergram

Click "OpAdjust" under the "Table Review" section of the main screen, and then click
"Count" in the screen to obtain the particle scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel,
observe whether the parameters are in line with below standards.
LAS 0.1 max width<9.00
6-21
Optical System
MAS 0.1 max width<13.00

Step 4: If only the width of the low-angle standard particles is outside the range, loosen the
screws of the direct light masking diaphragm, run the 7um standard particles and slightly
adjust the direct light masking diaphragm until the waveform of the low-angle signals on the
oscilloscope is stable and the width of low-angle standard particles meets requirement. If
both the widths of low-angle and high-angle standard particles are outside the range and
adjusting direct light masking diaphragm cannot solve the problem, slightly adjust the
horizontal position of the flow cell to stabilize the waveform of signals and make the width of
the standard particles meet requirements.
Step 5: when the above standards of standard particle parameters are met, fix the screws of
the flow cell (see Figure 6-29), the rear light diaphragm and the direct light masking
diaphragm, and then fix the protection cover of the optical system.
Step 6: Re-test using 7um standard particles. The requirements in step 3 must be met. If the
width is outside the range, loosen the screws that were fixed in step 5 and repeat step 4-5.
The adjustment of the optical system is almost done.
Figure 6-29 Locking the flow cell
1----Flow cell fixing screws 2----Fixing screws of the direct light

masking diaphragm
3----Rear light fixing screws
6.3.3 Gain Setup

After adjusting the optical system, the position of DIFF and BASO channels needs to be
calibrated. The operation is divided into two steps.
Calibrating the gain
Note: please select steps according to the calibrators or controls used.
R&D calibrator (NEK-CAL) calibration steps
6-22
Optical System
Step 1: under "Count" screen, make sure the WBC background voltage is below 0.1. (If the
WBC background voltage is outside the range, please clean the flow cell or conduct
background counting for several times).
Step 2: enter "Count" screen, select the mode "OV-WB" and "CBC+5DIFF", perform
counting for 3 times successively using calibrators, and set sample numbers to "Analyzer
No.-JZ1", "Analyzer No.-JZ2" and "Analyzer No.-JZ3".Select "Review", enter the "Table
Review" screen, select test data. click "OpAdjust" to enter into the optical adjustment
screen, select "Calibrator". Enter calibrator target value into the "CG Target" tab, calculate
the LAS and MAS gains of the 3 calibrator count cycles respectively, and then calculate the
mean of the gains and record the mean as the final gain (adopt the round-up value).
Step 3: enter "Gain" screen, set WBC_LAS (DIFF) and WBC_MAS (DIFF) to the final value
and then auto-calculate BASO gain per the pre-defined "corresponding factor of BASO and
DIFF".
Step 4: perform counting once again with calibrator. The LAS and MAS CG position must
meet requirements.
LAS CG position: target value 2.00;
MAS CG position: target value 2.00;
z The target values of calibrators vary with different batches, so please

confirm the target value of specific batches before using them.
B55 calibrator calibration steps
No.-ZK1", "Analyzer No.-ZK2" and "Analyzer No.-ZK3".Select "Review", enter the "Table
Review" screen, select test data. click "OpAdjust" to enter into the optical adjustment screen,
select "Calibrator". Enter calibrator target value into the "CG Target" column, calculate the
LAS and MAS gains of the 3 calibrator count cycles respectively, and then calculate the mean
of the gains and record the mean as the final gain (adopt the round-up value).
DIFF".
meet requirements.
6-23
Optical System
R&D control (CBC-5DMR) calibration steps (for countries and regions outside
China)
No.-ZK1", "Analyzer No.-ZK2" and "Analyzer No.-ZK3".Select "Review", enter the "Table
Review" screen, select test data. click "OpAdjust" to enter into the optical adjustment
screen, select "Calibrator". Enter calibrator target value into the "CG Target" column,
calculate the LAS and MAS gains of the 3 calibrator count cycles respectively, and then
calculate the mean of the gains and record the mean as the final gain (adopt the round-up
value).
DIFF".
meet requirements.
Sample Verification
Step 1: select samples
After set up the gain of the above standard particles, select 10 tubes of fresh anticoagulant
venous blood that meet below requirements (within 6 hours after the samples are
collected).The 10 samples must meet below two requirements:
Requirement 1: parameter requirement (parameters on the "Count" screen)
Table 6-1Parameter requirements on normal fresh blood
Judging criteria Technical requirements

WBC count 6~10(10^9/L)
Neu% Neu%is between 40% to 80%
Lym% Lym% is between 20 to50
Mon% Mon% is between 3 to8
Eos% Eos% is between 0.5 to8
Bas% Bas% is between 0 to1
No flag for left shift, immature cell, abnormal
Others
lymphocyte or scattergram
These parameters can be observed in the "Table Review" screen ("Count" screen).
If no qualified sample can be found, there are two possibilities. One is the samples of the
hospital are abnormal, for example the hospital is a hematopathy hospital or the hospital only
takes capillary blood. Under this situation, engineers need to get blood sample from other
6-24
Optical System
channels. Another possibility is the analyzer is abnormal and needs to be checked.
Requirement 2: scattergram form requirements
For samples that are qualified under Requirement 1, its scattergram form still needs to be
observed. If the scattergram form is abnormal or the algorithm differential is apparently
incorrect, then the samples are not qualified.
The scattergram of normal fresh blood is shown in below Figure 6-30:
Figure 6-30 Scattergram of normal fresh blood
If the WBC scattergram of normal fresh blood is different from the above figure, then the
sample is also unqualified, for example the border of cell populations is vague, the cell
populations are badly clustered or the scattergram form is loose or with many unorderly dots.
See Figure 6-31.
Figure 6-31 Unqualified scattergram form

Meanwhile, the samples of which the algorithm differential is apparently incorrect are also
unqualified. See Figure 6-32.
Figure 6-32 Scattergram of incorrect algorithm differential
Some samples cannot be differentiated, the parameters of the samples are displayed as "**".
They are unqualified for Requirement 1, so their scattergrams are omitted here.
Step 2: Judgement of status

After Step 1, 10 samples are obtained. Observe the 10 samples under "OpAdjust" screen
6-25
Optical System
(enter the screen from "Table Review") as shown in Figure 6-33.
Figure 6-33 "OpAdjust" screen
Select "Sample Mode" under the "OpAdjust" screen and then click "Calculate", the
parameters of the two types of particles will be displayed in the white box on the right. The
two types of particles are marked with red box in the scattergram. See Figure 6-33.
Repeat the operation on the 10 samples selected from Step 1, if more than 7 samples are
qualified, the analyzer is in normal condition, otherwise it is abnormal. If deviation to the
sample direction is found in all the samples, there must be problem concerning gain setup or
adjustment. Please reset the gain of or fine-tune the optical system.
Particle 1 (the particle in the red box on the lower left side of the scattergram) requirements:
LAS CG range: [49, 57];

MAS CG range: [27, 32];
Particle 2 (the particle in the red box on the upper right side of the scattergram) requirements:
LAS CG range: [103, 112];

MAS CG range: [84, 95];
Note: [ ] represents closed interval, that is the value can be equal to the limits.
If above requirements cannot be met, do as the following steps.
1. Re-calibrate the optical system per the gain calibration procedure.
2. If after calibration, the fresh blood CG range requirements still cannot be met,
6-26
Optical System
fine-tune the optical system again and re-calibrate the gain until the requirements
are met.
3. If the gain adjustment of the optical system succeeds, but the CG position of fresh
blood scattergram is still unqualified, check other components of the analyzer
(reaction bath temperature, reagent condition, stirring motor speed).
6.4 Common Failures of the Optical System
6.4.1 Sample scattergram is abnormal

Failure phenomena
1. The DIFF scattergram of normal fresh blood gets loose, the border between cell
populations is vague or disappears, the distribution of cell scatters is abnormal, and
DIFF differential is incorrect;
2. Run 7um standard particles under "OV-WB-CBC+5DIFF" mode, after counting

finishes, the scattergram is loose or in abnormal form; after going through
"Review"->"OpAdjust"->"Std.Part."->"Calculate", the 0.1max width of LAS and
MAS under DIFF channel is outside the range in 6.3.2 .
Causes of the failures

When all other systems of the analyzer are normal and no alarm is triggered, the main
causes of the abnormal scattergram of normal fresh blood are: flow cell contamination and
flow cell clog. The confirmation and resolving methods are provided below.
Confirmation and resolving method
Flow cell contamination
When the sample scattergram is abnormal and the neutrophil granulocytes in the DIFF
scattergram are divided into two layers, a part of the neutrophil granulocytes are classified as
eosinophilic granulocytes, thus resulting in high Eos# (see below figure), and then the
contamination of flow cell can be confirmed.
Figure 6-34 Sample scattergram when flow cell is contaminated
Improper transportation, storage, usage and maintenance of the analyzer may cause the
contamination of the flow cell. Dust, oil stains or pollutants on the flow cell deform the laser
beam that passes through the flow cell and rests on blood cells, thus resulting in abnormal
scattergram.
6-27
Optical System
Flow cell contamination can be divided into flow cell exterior wall contamination and flow
cell aperture contamination. The phenomena under the two cases are similar. You need to
observe the optical system to confirm the contamination situation, and then take
corresponding measures.
Confirmation method of flow cell exterior wall contamination
1. Open the right door of the analyzer when it is on, remove the top panel of the
analyzer and the top cover of the optical system, you can find there are 1-2 reflected
light spots on the front and back faces of the flow cell as shown in below figure.
When the exterior wall of the flow cell is clean, there is no obvious reflected light
spot.
Figure 6-35 The reflected light spots on the exterior wall of the flow cell
2. Put a piece of blank paper or a name card before the high-angle PD assembly (see
below figure), you will find a thick bright optical ring. When the exterior wall of the
flow cell is clean, there is only a weak halo.
The ring
Figure 6-36 The light spot before the high-angle PD when the exterior wall of the flow
cell is contaminated
Resolving method
1. Wipe the surface of the flow cell with clean dust-free cloth and absolute alcohol.
2. When the surface of the flow cell is wiped to the extent described in "Confirmation
method of flow cell exterior wall contamination", that means it is clean;
6-28
Optical System
3. Perform counting for over five times using normal fresh blood and 7um standard
particles under the "OV-WB-CBC+5DIFF" mode; observe the DIFF scattergram to
confirm the cleaning effect.
z Wipe the exterior wall of the flow cell unidirectionally, do not wipe it back ad
forth;
z Do not touch the direct light masking diaphragm when wiping the surface of
the flow cell.
Confirmation method of flow cell aperture contamination
1. Open the right door of the analyzer when it is on, remove the top panel of the
analyzer and the top cover of the optical system, you can find there are 1 reflected
light spot in the center of the flow cell as shown in below figure. When the aperture
of the flow cell is clean, there is no obvious reflected light spot.
Figure 6-37 The reflected light spot in the center of the flow cell when it is
contaminated
2. Put a piece of blank paper before the high-angle PD assembly (see below figure),
you will find a thin sharp optical ring. When the aperture of the flow cell is clean,
there is only a weak halo.
6-29
Optical System
The ring
Figure 6-38 The light spot before the high-angle PD when the aperture of the flow cell
is contaminated
z When clean flow cell runs out of dilution or is filled with bubbles, you can
also see 1 bright reflected light spot in the center of the flow cell. Before
observe the flow cell, please make sure it is filled with dilution and free from
air or bubble.
Resolving method
1. Enter "Service""Maintenance" from the main screen, select "Flow Cell" from
"Probe Cleanser Maintenance" tab, clean the flow cell using probe cleanser
according to the tips displayed on the screen;
2. After finish maintenance, select "Mode""OV-WB-CBC+5DIFF" under the "Count"
screen, run a background counting;
particles under the "OV-WB-CBC+5DIFF" mode, observe the DIFF scattergram to
confirm probe cleanser maintenance effect;
4. If the failure persists, perform manual cleaning according to below procedure;
5. Wear clean disposable plastic gloves, connect a long plastic tube to a clean
disposable syringe, and connect a two-way connector to the other end of the tube,
aspirate probe cleanser to soak the tube with the syringe to clean the tubing and the
connector;
6-30
Optical System
Connect
two-way connector
(a) (b)
Figure 6-39 Tube preparation; (a) tube connection preparation; (b) tube cleaning
6. Fill a plastic cup with certain amount of probe cleanser (or use the probe cleanser
reagent bottle directly).Unplug the waste tube of the flow cell from electromagnetic
valve SV6, connect the tube to the cleaned tube of the above step to make the tube
length suitable for operation. Put one end of the tube into the plastic cup filled with
probe cleanser and place the plastic cup on the base plate of the analyzer as shown
in below figure to facilitate service operation;
Use the cleaned tube of the

above step for connection
Figure 6-40 Tube connection mode

7. Connect the sheath fluid inlet of the rectifier assembly with the syringe as shown in
below figure, then slowly pump the syringe to flush the flow cell channel with probe
cleanser and soak it for 10 minutes;
6-31
Optical System
Connected with
syringe
Figure 6-41 Syringe connection mode when cleaning the flow cell aperture manually
8. Restore tube connection after soaking finishes, run 1 background counting under
"OV-WB-CBC+5DIFF" mode;
particles under the "OV-WB-CBC+5DIFF" mode; observe the DIFF scattergram to
confirm probe cleanser cleaning effect.
z Do not plug or unplug fluidic tubing in the optical system, do not put any
fluid (including containers of fluid) into the optical system;
z The syringe can only be pulled instead of being pushed to avoid pollutants
clogging the flow cell channel;
z As the probe cleanser is corrosive to the fluid tubing, do not soak the tubing
for over 10 minutes each time, and the tubing should not be soaked for too
many times.
Flow cell aperture clog
When the flow cell channel is clogged by clots or foreign substances in the fluidic tubing,
stable sheath fluid cannot be generated, thus resulting into abnormal scattergram. The
phenomena are as follows:
1. The sample scattergram is abnormal, and the DIFF scattergram of normal fresh
blood and 7um standard particle is apparently abnormal as shown in below figure;
6-32
Optical System
Figure 6-42Scattergram of sample and 7um standard particle when the flow cell
aperture is clogged
2. When conduct counting under "CBC-5DIFF" mode, open the right plate of the
analyzer, the dropping speed of waste cistern WC2 is lower than normal speed;
3. Open the top cover of the optical system, no problem is found in the optical system.
Resolving method
1. You can solve this problem by referring to the resolving method of "flow cell aperture
contamination", first use the "Maintenance" function of the analyzer, if the problem
persists, conduct manual cleaning;
2. After finish Step 6 of resolving "flow cell aperture contamination", connect the
sample inlet of the rectifier assembly with a syringe as shown in below figure,
slowly pump the syringe to flush the flow cell channel with probe cleanser and soak
it for 10 minutes.
Connected with
syringe
Figure 6-43 Connection mode when cleaning sample syringe manually
3. Proceed with Step 7 and the following steps of resolving "flow cell aperture
contamination", connect the syringe with the sheath fluid inlet of the rectifier
assembly and finish cleaning and unclogging.
6.4.2 Laser diode current error

Error phenomena
The analyzer alarms "Laser diode current error", and the alarm cannot be cleared or
appears again after being cleared.
6-33
Optical System
Causes of the error

The laser diode is damaged, or its power cord is not well connected or is open-circuited,
which makes the laser diode current outside normal range, thus the failure alarm is triggered.
1. Open the right plate of the analyzer when it is on, remove the top plate and the top
cover of the optical system, use blank paper or name card to observe the laser light
spot emitted by the front light assembly;
2. If the spot is not in complete elliptical shape, instead, there are two obvious dark
lines in it, or it is in petal shape, or the brightness of the laser light is low, then the
laser diode is damaged and the optical system needs to be replaced;
3. If the spot shows no obvious abnormity, but is unusually bright, power off the
analyzer, replug the laser power cord and then observe the laser spot. Or check
whether the laser power cord is well-connected or is open-circuited with a multimeter.
If the error is caused by the power cord problem, replace the laser power cord.
z When removing and installing boards, antistatic gloves must be worn.
z Please make sure that power is off and power cord is disconnected when
removing and installing boards.
z Do not plug or unplug laser semiconductor before power is off, or the laser
semiconductor can be damaged.
6.4.3 Standard particle width goes beyond standard

Error phenomena
1. Run 7um standard particle under "OV-WB-CBC+5DIFF" mode, after counting
finishes, go through "Review""OpAdjust""Calculate", LAS 0.1 max width >9.00,
MAS 0.1 max width>13.00;
2. The DIFF scattergram of normal fresh blood is slightly loose, the border between cell
populations can be observed, the distribution of cell scatters is normal, and DIFF
differential shows no obvious error.
Causes of the error

The optical system components are loosened or deformed slightly due to storage,
transportation and usage of the analyzer, the center of laser beam is away from the sample
flow, thus resulting into unqualified standard particle width.
1. Check whether the flow cell is contaminated or clogged. Refer to Section 6.4.1 for
detailed operations.
2. After the flow cell is confirmed clean, check whether the light spot on the high-angle
diaphragm is apparently unsymmetrical. See Figure 6-21. If the light spot on the
6-34
Optical System
high-angle diaphragm is apparently unsymmetrical, adjust the optical system per the
method in 6.3.1 .
3. If LAS 0.1 max width is beyond standard, adjust the horizontal position of the direct
light masking diaphragm per the method in 6.3.2 .
4. If MAS 0.1 max width is beyond standard, adjust the horizontal position of the flow
cell per the method in 6.3.2 .
5. After adjustment, run 7um standard particles, make sure the 0.1 max width of
standard particles is qualified.
6. Perform counting for over 5 times using normal fresh blood under the
"OV-WB-CBC+5DIFF" mode, observe the DIFF scattergram to confirm the
adjustment effect.
z The error has nothing to do with the focal length position of the front and
rear light, the diaphragm position and the PD aperture position, please do
not adjust those parts;
z An oscilloscope needs to be used to facilitate the adjustment.
6-35
7 Troubleshooting
When error occurs to the analyzer, view recent system log to analyze causes of the error.
CLICK "Service" - "Log", the operations of the analyzer will be displayed. See Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Log information
7.1 Error code and information
Error code Error Error code Error
Mid control board: function Opening sample

0x00000001 0x000000CE
code error compartment door failed
Mid control board: address MP: pinch cylinder front
0x00000002 0x000000CF
code error photocoupler error
Mid control board: data MP: pinch cylinder rear
0x00000003 0x000000D0
length error photocoupler error
Mid control board: MP: pinch cylinder cannot
0x00000004 0x000000D1
command ID error go forward
Mid control board: MP: pinch cylinder cannot
0x00000005 0x000000D2
verification code error go backward
7-1
Troubleshooting
Mid control board: end code MP: elevation up

0x00000006 0x000000D3
error photocoupler error
MP: elevation down
0x00000007 PDB: FPGA error 0x000000D4
photocoupler error
MCB: valve command and MP: elevation cylinder
0x00000009 0x000000D5
data len not match cannot go up
Priming and draining time is MP: elevation cylinder
0x0000000A 0x000000D6
0 cannot go down
Last priming and draining MP: mix motor start pos.
0x0000000B 0x000000D7
didn't finish photocoupler error
Priming or draining not MP: mix motor stop pos.
0x0000000E 0x000000D8
ending in time photocoupler error
Transmit unit: function code MP: mix motor to start
0x00000064 0x000000D9
error position failed
Transmit unit: address code MP: mix motor to stop
0x00000065 0x000000DA
error position failed
Transmit unit: data length MP: mix motor rotation is
0x00000066 0x000000DB
error not allowed
Transmit unit: command ID Wipe block motor down
0x00000067 0x000000DC
error photocoupler failed
Transmit unit: verification Wipe block cannot go to up
0x00000068 0x000000DD
code error position
Transmit unit: end code Wipe block cannot go to
0x00000069 0x000000DE
error down position
Opening sample
0x0000006A 0x000000DF compartment door not
position failed
allowed
AL: load motor to stop
0x0000006B 0x000000E0 Wipe block motor is working
position failed
AL: feed motor to start Wipe block cannot go to up
0x0000006C 0x000000E1
position failed position
AL: feed motor to stop MP: cylinder
0x0000006D 0x000000E2
position failed piercing/photocoupler error
AL: unloader to start MP: cylinder
0x0000006E 0x000000E3
position failed return/photocoupler error
AL: unloader to stop MP: pierce cylinder pierce is
0x0000006F 0x000000E4
position failed not allowed
AL: loading unit MP: pierce cylinder return is
0x00000070 0x000000E5
photocoupler error not allowed
AL: feeding unit counter
0x00000071 0x000000E9 MP: mix-unit is not initialized
error
MP: pinch cylinder to front
0x00000072 AL: loading is not allowed 0x000000EA
pos. failed
0x00000073 AL: Unloading is not 0x00000199 Laser diode temp. sensor
7-2
Troubleshooting
allowed now error

0x00000074 AL: unloading tray is full 0x0000019B PDB: EEPROM error
Other unit: function code
0x00000075 Autoloader is working 0x000001F4
error
AL: feed motor is not Other unit: address code
0x00000076 0x000001F5
initialized error
0x00000077 Tube ID read error 0x000001F6 Other unit: data length error
Other unit: command ID
0x00000079 Rack(s) moved manually 0x000001F7
error
Other unit: verification code
0x0000007A Scanner setup error 0x000001F8
error
MP: pinch cylinder to rear
0x000000EB 0x000001F9 Other unit: end code error
pos. failed
MP: elevation cylinder to up
0x000000EC 0x000001FA PDB: U74(AD7928) error
pos. failed
MP: elevation cylinder to
0x000000ED 0x000001FB PDB: U75(AD7928) error
down pos. failed
Sample compartment door
0x000000EE 0x00003001 PDB instruction invalid
opened abnormally
0x000000EF Manipulator is working 0x00003002 PDB instruction abnormal
Syringe unit: function code
0x0000012C 0x00003101 No Diluent
error
Syringe unit: address code
0x0000012D 0x00003102 No LH lyse
error
Syringe unit: data length
0x0000012E 0x00003103 No LEO(I) lyse
error
Syringe unit: command ID
0x0000012F 0x00003104 No LEO(II) lyse
error
Syringe unit: verification
0x00000130 0x00003105 No LBA lyse
code error
DIL cistern is not fully
0x00000131 Syringe unit: end code error 0x00003106
primed
FCM cistern is not fully
0x00000132 Sheath syringe is working 0x00003107
primed
Sheath syringe initialization
0x00000133 0x00003108 Waste cistern is full
failure
Sheath syringe to start
0x00000134 0x00003109 WC1 cistern is not drained
position failed
Sheath syringe to stop
0x00000135 0x0000310A WC2 cistern is not drained
position failed
Sheath syringe Cleanser cistern is not fully
0x00000136 0x0000310B
photocoupler open-circuited primed
0x00000137 Sheath syringe 0x0000310C No Cleanser
7-3
Troubleshooting
photocoupler short-circuited
Sheath syringe aspirates DIL floater short or outlet
0x00000138 0x0000310D
too much clogged
Sheath syringe dispenses FCM floater short or outlet
0x00000139 0x0000310E
too much clogged
Sheath syringe works too Cleanser floater short or
0x0000013A 0x0000310F
fast outlet clogged
WC1 cistern dobber
0x0000013B Sheath syringe timeout 0x00003110
open-circuited
WC2 cistern dobber
0x0000013C Pump syringe is working 0x00003111
open-circuited
Pump syringe initialization
0x0000013D 0x00003161 Front cover open
failure
Pump syringe moves to
0x0000013E 0x00003162 Laser box open
start position failure
Pump syringe moves to DIFF stirring motor
0x0000013F 0x00003201
stop position failure abnormal
Pump syringe photocoupler BASO stirring motor
0x00000140 0x00003202
open-circuited abnormal
Pump syringe photocoupler
0x00000141 0x00003211 Laser diode temp. error
short-circuited
Pump syringe aspirates too
0x00000142 0x00003212 Laser diode current error
much
Pump syringe dispenses
0x00000143 0x00003221 Preheat bath temp. error
too much
Pump syringe works too
0x00000144 0x00003222 Reaction bath temp. error
fast
Temperature out of working
0x00000145 Pump syringe timeout 0x00003231
range
Temp. unit: function code Temperature out of
0x00000190 0x00003232
error operating range
Temp. unit: address code
0x00000191 0x00003241 250 KPA pressure abnormal
error
0x00000192 Temp. unit: data length error 0x00007007 Background abnormal
Temp. unit: command ID
0x00000193 0x00007008 Sample not enough
error
Temp. unit: verification code
0x00000194 0x00007009 Sample test sensor error
error
0x00000195 Temp. unit: end code error 0x00007101 Diluent expired
0x00000196 PDB: ADS1210 error 0x00007102 LEO(I) expired
Heater: preheat bath temp.
0x00000197 0x00007103 LEO(II) expired
sensor error
0x00000198 Heater: reaction bath temp. 0x00007104 LBA expired
7-4
Troubleshooting
sensor error
0x00003242 160 KPA pressure abnormal 0x00007105 LH expired
0x00003243 70 KPA pressure abnormal 0x00007106 Cleanser expired
-40 KPA pressure Real-time clock error
0x00003244 0x00007111
abnormal
-85 KPA pressure Network connection error
0x00003245 0xFFFF2000
abnormal
Too many vacancy Network communication
0x00003252 0xFFFF2001
positions error
RBC peak data len not Auto communication
0x00005001 0xFFFF2002
equal to width's operation error
0x00005002 SB: parameter setup error 0xFFFF2003 IP address collision
0x00006001 MB: EEPROM error 0xFFFF3002 Printer out of paper
0x00006101 Open DSPI error 0xFFFF3003 ps data generation error
0x00006102 Read or write DSPI error 0xFFFF3005 Auto-print records full
0x00006103 DSPI data decode error 0xFFFF3006 Printer paper jammed
0x00006111 Open COM(PDB) error 0xFFFF3007 Unknown printer error
WC3 cistern dobber
0x00006112 COM(PDB) ACK timeout 0x00003112
open-circuited
COM(PDB) check sum WC3 cistern is not drained
0x00006113 0x00003113
error
LAS background voltage Diluent volume low
0x00007001 0xFFFFC000
abnormal
RBC aperture voltage LEO(I) lyse volume low
0x00007002 0xFFFFC001
abnormal
0x00007003 HGB error 0xFFFFC002 LEO(II) lyse volume low
0x00007004 HGB adjust 0xFFFFC003 LBA lyse volume low
0x00007005 RBC clog 0xFFFFC004 LH lyse volume low
0x00007006 RBC bubbles 0xFFFFC005 Cleanser volume low
0x0000007C Tube barcode is too long 0xFFFFC006 Insufficient diluent
Mix & pierce unit: Insufficient LEO(I) lyse
0x000000C8 0xFFFFC007
verification code error
Mix & pierce unit: command Insufficient LEO(II) lyse
0x000000C9 0xFFFFC008
ID error
Mix & pierce unit: end code Insufficient LBA lyse
0x000000CA 0xFFFFC009
error
Mix & pierce unit: data Insufficient LH lyse
0x000000CB 0xFFFFC00A
length error
Mix & pierce unit: address Insufficient cleanser
0x000000CC 0xFFFFC00B
code error
Mix & pierce unit: function
0x000000CD
code error
7-5
Troubleshooting
7.2 Causes of Common Errors
Error code Error Cause

Software error or communication
Mid control board: function interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000001 code error analyzer
Mid control board: address interference, please try again or restart the
Mid control board: data interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000003 length error analyzer
Mid control board: command interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000004 ID error analyzer
Mid control board: interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000005 verification code error analyzer
Mid control board: end code interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000006 error analyzer
0x00000007 PDB: FPGA error Please replace the power driver board
MCB: valve command and interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000009 data len not match analyzer.
Priming and draining time is Fluidic sequence or software error, please try
0x0000000A 0 again or restart the analyzer.
Last priming and draining Fluidic sequence or software error, please try
0x0000000B didn't finish again or restart the analyzer
1. Please check if there is sufficient diluent;
2. Floater switch is damaged, please replace
it;
Priming or draining not 3. Tubing leakage, please dismantle the
0x0000000E ending in time analyzer and check.
Transmit unit: function code interference, please try again or restart the
Transmit unit: address code interference, please try again or restart the
Transmit unit: data length interference, please try again or restart the
7-6
Troubleshooting

Transmit unit: command ID interference, please try again or restart the
Transmit unit: verification interference, please try again or restart the
interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000069 Transmit unit: end code error analyzer
Photocoupler at the autoloader loading start
position is open-circuited. The phenomenon
is the load motor is at start position or hits the
mechanical limit point;
AL: load motor to start the load motor is damaged. The phenomenon
0x0000006A position failed is the load motor does not move.
The photocoupler or contact switch at the
loading stop position of the autoloader is
open-circuited. The phenomenon is the load
motor is at stop position or hits the
mechanical limit point;
AL: load motor to stop the load motor is damaged. The phenomenon
0x0000006B position failed is the load motor does not move
The feeding reset photocoupler of the
autoloader is open-circuited, the
phenomenon is the feed motor moves;
AL: feed motor to start the feed motor is damaged, the phenomenon
0x0000006C position failed is the feed motor does not move.
The feeding reset photocoupler of the
autoloader is short-circuited, the
phenomenon is the feed motor moves;
AL: feed motor to stop the feed motor is damaged, the phenomenon
0x0000006D position failed is the feed motor does not move.
The photocoupler of the unloader is
open-circuited, the phenomenon is the feed
motor moves;
AL: unloader to start position the feed motor is damaged, the phenomenon
0x0000006E failed is the feed motor does not move.
The photocoupler of the unloader is
short-circuited, the phenomenon is the feed
motor moves;
AL: unloader to stop position the feed motor is damaged, the phenomenon
0x0000006F failed is the feed motor does not move.
AL: loading unit Please replace the two photocouplers at the
0x00000070 photocoupler error load position of the sample transport unit
7-7
Troubleshooting
AL: feeding unit counter Photocoupler error or counting mechanism

0x00000071 error error
Software error or improper operation, please
0x00000072 AL: loading is not allowed try again or restart the analyzer
AL: Unloading is not Software error or improper operation, please
0x00000073 allowed now try again or restart the analyzer
Please remove the tube racks on the
unloading tray, at least one tube rack on the
0x00000074 AL: unloading tray is full outer line needs to be removed
Software error or improper operation, please
0x00000075 Autoloader is working try again or restart the analyzer
AL: feed motor is not Fluidic sequence or software error, please try
0x00000076 initialized again or restart the analyzer
Scanner error, enter the scanner test screen
to check scanner communication status,
0x00000077 Tube ID read error replace the scanner if necessary;
If the first step operation fails to solve the
0x00000079 Rack(s) moved manually error, please replace the power driver board.
0x0000007A Scanner setup error Operate per the software prompts.
Please use barcodes consisting of less than
0x0000007C Tube barcode is too long 16 digits.
Mix & pierce unit: verification interference, please try again or restart the
0x000000C8 code error analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: command interference, please try again or restart the
0x000000C9 ID error analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: end code interference, please try again or restart the
0x000000CA error analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: data interference, please try again or restart the
0x000000CB length error analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: address interference, please try again or restart the
0x000000CC code error analyzer.
Mix & pierce unit: function interference, please try again or restart the
0x000000CD code error analyzer.
MP: pinch cylinder front Photocoupler error, the phenomenon is pinch
0x000000CF photocoupler error cylinder moves normally;
The pneumatic unit is abnormal, Valve 98 of X
MP: pinch cylinder rear direction cylinder is damaged or the
0x000000D0 photocoupler error connection wire is not well-connected. The
7-8
Troubleshooting
phenomenon is the X direction cylinder does

not move or moves slowly.
MP: pinch cylinder cannot go Photocoupler error, the phenomenon is pinch
0x000000D1 forward cylinder moves normally;
The pneumatic unit is abnormal, Valve 98 of
pinch cylinder is damaged or the connection
wire is not well-connected. The phenomenon
MP: pinch cylinder cannot go is the X direction cylinder does not move or
0x000000D2 backward moves slowly.
MP: elevation up 1. Photocoupler error, the phenomenon is the
0x000000D3 photocoupler error elevation cylinder moves normally;
2. The pneumatic unit is abnormal, Valve 90
and 91 of elevation cylinder are damaged or
the connection wire is not well-connected.
MP: elevation down The phenomenon is the elevation cylinder
0x000000D4 photocoupler error does not move or moves slowly.
MP: elevation cylinder 1. Photocoupler error, the phenomenon is the
0x000000D5 cannot go up elevation cylinder moves normally;
MP: elevation cylinder Software error or improper operation, please
0x000000D6 cannot go down try again or restart the analyzer.
MP: mix motor start pos. 1. Photocoupler error. The phenomenon is
0x000000D7 photocoupler error mix motor moves normally;
MP: mix motor stop pos. 2. Mix motor error. The phenomenon is the
0x000000D8 photocoupler error mix motor does not move or is blocked.
MP: mix motor to start 1. Photocoupler error. The phenomenon is
0x000000D9 position failed mix motor moves normally;
MP: mix motor to stop 2. Mix motor error. The phenomenon is the
0x000000DA position failed mix motor does not move or is blocked.
MP: mix motor rotation is not Software error or improper operation, please
0x000000DB allowed try again or restart the analyzer.
Wipe block motor down 1. Photocoupler error. The phenomenon is
0x000000DC photocoupler failed wipe motor moves;
Wipe block cannot go to up 2. Wipe motor error. The phenomenon is wipe
0x000000DD position motor does not move;
Wipe block cannot go to 1. Photocoupler error. The phenomenon is
0x000000DE down position wipe block is not at down position;
Please perform wipe motor self-test and then
0x000000E0 Wipe block motor is working try again.
Wipe block cannot go to up Please perform wipe motor self-test and then
0x000000E1 position try again.
1. The pneumatic unit is abnormal, Valve 92
of pinch cylinder is damaged or; 2. the
MP: cylinder connection wire is not well-connected. The
0x000000E2 piercing/photocoupler error phenomenon is pierce cylinder does not
7-9
Troubleshooting
move;
MP: cylinder 3. Pierce photocoupler error. The
0x000000E3 return/photocoupler error phenomenon is pierce cylinder moves;
MP: pierce cylinder pierce is Fluidic sequence or software error, please try
0x000000E4 not allowed again or restart the analyzer.
MP: pierce cylinder return is Fluidic sequence or software error, please try
0x000000E5 not allowed again or restart the analyzer.
Please perform fluidic system initialization
0x000000E9 MP: mix-unit is not initialized and try again.
Pinch cylinder does not move; please check
MP: pinch cylinder to front the pneumatic unit, Valve 89 and the
0x000000EA pos. failed connection wire.
Pinch cylinder does not move; please check
MP: pinch cylinder to rear the pneumatic unit, Valve 89 and the
0x000000EB pos. failed connection wire.
Elevation cylinder does not move, please
MP: elevation cylinder to up check the pneumatic unit, Valve 90 and 91,
0x000000EC pos. failed and the connection wire.
Elevation cylinder does not move, please
MP: elevation cylinder to check the pneumatic unit, Valve 90 and 91,
0x000000ED down pos. failed and the connection wire.
Fluidic sequence or software error, please try
0x000000EF Manipulator is working again or restart the analyzer.
Syringe unit: function code interference, please try again or restart the
0x0000012C error analyzer.
Syringe unit: address code interference, please try again or restart the
0x0000012D error analyzer.
Syringe unit: data length interference, please try again or restart the
0x0000012E error analyzer.
Syringe unit: command ID interference, please try again or restart the
0x0000012F error analyzer.
Syringe unit: verification interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000130 code error analyzer.
0x00000131 Syringe unit: end code error analyzer.
Please perform sheath syringe self-test and
0x00000132 Sheath syringe is working try again.
0x00000133 Sheath syringe initialization 1. Sheath syringe photocoupler error The
7-10
Troubleshooting
failure phenomenon is sheath syringe motor moves;

2. Sheath syringe motor error. The
Sheath syringe to start phenomenon is sheath syringe motor does
0x00000134 position failed not move.
1. Sheath syringe photocoupler error The
Sheath syringe to stop phenomenon is sheath syringe is not at start
0x00000135 position failed position;
2. Sheath syringe motor error. The
Sheath syringe photocoupler phenomenon is sheath syringe is at start
0x00000136 open-circuited position;
Sheath syringe photocoupler error. The
Sheath syringe photocoupler phenomenon is sheath syringe is at start
0x00000137 short-circuited position;
Sheath syringe aspirates too Please perform sheath syringe self-test and
0x00000138 much try again.
Sheath syringe dispenses Please perform sheath syringe self-test and
0x00000139 too much try again.
Sheath syringe works too Please perform sheath syringe self-test and
0x0000013A fast try again.
Sheath syringe unit error, please check
whether the resistance of the syringe is too
0x0000013B Sheath syringe timeout great.
Please perform pump syringe self-test and try
0x0000013C Pump syringe is working again.
Pump syringe initialization 1. Pump syringe photocoupler error. The
0x0000013D failure phenomenon is pump syringe motor moves;
2. Pump syringe motor error. The
Pump syringe moves to start phenomenon is pump syringe motor does not
0x0000013E position failure move.
1. Pump syringe photocoupler error. The
Pump syringe moves to stop phenomenon is pump syringe is at start
0x0000013F position failure position;
Pump syringe photocoupler phenomenon is pump syringe is not at start
0x00000140 open-circuited position.
Pump syringe photocoupler phenomenon is pump syringe is not at start
0x00000141 short-circuited position;
Pump syringe aspirates too phenomenon is pump syringe is at start
0x00000142 much position.
Pump syringe dispenses too phenomenon is pump syringe is at start
0x00000143 much position.
7-11
Troubleshooting
Pump syringe photocoupler error. The

phenomenon is pump syringe is not at start
0x00000144 Pump syringe works too fast position.
Please perform pump syringe self-test and try
0x00000145 Pump syringe timeout again.
Temp. unit: function code interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000190 error analyzer.
Temp. unit: address code interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000192 Temp. unit: data length error analyzer.
Temp. unit: command ID interference, please try again or restart the
Temp. unit: verification code interference, please try again or restart the
0x00000195 Temp. unit: end code error analyzer.
1. If D25 cannot light up, please check
0x00000196 PDB: ADS1210 error 12VDC power;
2. If D25 is on, please check whether the
Heater: preheat bath temp. bead of AD circuit module or other
0x00000197 sensor error components are not welded completely;
Heater: reaction bath temp. 3. Check whether the crystal oscillator X2 is
0x00000198 sensor error short-circuited;
Laser diode temp. sensor 1. Check whether the laser diode temperature
0x00000199 error sensor is well connected;
2. If it is connected, check whether the +12V
power supply on the driver board works
0x0000019B PDB: EEPROM error normally;
Other unit: function code interference, please try again or restart the
0x000001F4 error analyzer.
Other unit: address code interference, please try again or restart the
0x000001F6 Other unit: data length error analyzer.
7-12
Troubleshooting

Other unit: command ID interference, please try again or restart the
Other unit: verification code interference, please try again or restart the
0x000001F9 Other unit: end code error analyzer.
1. Check whether the +12V power supply of
0x000001FA PDB: U74(AD7928) error the driver board is normal;
2. Check whether the voltage of PIN5 (AVDD)
on U74 is normal. The normal voltage is
0x000001FB PDB: U75(AD7928) error +5V5%;
The temperature obtained through system
0x00003211 Laser diode temp. error inquiry is not within [30, 40]
The current obtained through system inquiry
0x00003212 Laser diode current error is not within the range [20, 50]
The temperature of preheat bath is not within
0x00003221 Preheat bath temp. error the reference range 30-50
The temperature of reaction bath is not within
0x00003222 Reaction bath temp. error the reference range 30-45
Temperature out of working The ambient temperature is not within the
0x00003231 range working reference range 15-30
Temperature out of The ambient temperature is not within the
0x00003232 operating range running reference range 4-40
The pressure is not within the range
0x00003241 250 KPA pressure abnormal 200-300kPa
The pressure is not within the range -46KPa
0x00003244 -40 KPA pressure abnormal ~-30KPa
The pressure is not within the range -97KPa
0x00003245 -85 KPA pressure abnormal ~-58KPa
LAS background voltage The value detected is out of the normal range
0x00007001 abnormal (0-400mv)
RBC aperture voltage The value detected is out of the normal range
0x00007002 abnormal (10v-14v)
HGB error The background voltage is out of the range
0x00007003 0-2V
0x00007004 HGB adjust HGB voltage has not been adjusted
0x00007005 RBC clog The START delay time > set value + 2s or
7-13
Troubleshooting
RBC count time > set value + 2s;

The sum of the RBC baseline time that is over
the upper and lower limits is greater than 50%
of the RBC count time
RBC bubbles The START delay time < set value - 2s or
0x00007006 RBC count time < set value - 2s
Background abnormal The background is not within the range
(WBC 0.3 109 / L, RBC 0.03 1012/ L,
0x00007007 HGB 1 g / L, HCT 0.5 %, PLT 10 109 / L)
The sample detection photocoupler fails to
detect sample. Sample volume is not enough
0x00007008 Sample not enough or too hyaline
7.3 Function Sequence Codes and Information
Type Name Code

Manual open vial mode F001
CBC 5DIFF Predilute mode F002
measurement Manual closed tube mode F003
Autoloader mode F004
Dispense diluent under predilute
F005
mode
Clean wipe block under predilute
F006
mode
SRV to manual position F121
To predilute mode F122
Mode switch SRV to auto mode F123
Prepare to dispense diluent off
F124
the analyzer
Autoloder mode to open vial
F125
mode
Open vial mode to autoloader
F126
mode
Manual open vial mode F007
Predilute mode F008
CBC measurement
Manual closed tube mode F009
Autoloader mode F010
Startup Start up the analyzer after
F011
normal shutdown
Start up the analyzer after
F012
abnormal shutdown
Start up the analyzer after F013
7-14
Troubleshooting
draining
Normal shutdown F014
Shutdown
Pack-up and shutdown F015
LEO(1) replacement F021
LEO(2) replacement F022
LH replacement F023
LBA replacement F024
Replace reagent
Replace diluent F025
Replace cleanser F026
Fluidic tubing priming of the
F028
analyzer
Cleanser Auto-maintenance (cleanser
F047
maintenance soaking)
RBC bath soaking with probe
F043
cleanser
Premix bath soaking with probe
F044
cleanser
HGB bath soaking with probe
F045
cleanser
SRV maintenance with probe
F059
cleanser
WBC module maintenance with
F060
probe cleanser
Analyzer maintenance with
F061
probe cleanser
Flow cell maintenance with
F062
probe cleanser
Flushing F048
Aperture unclogging Zapping F049
Unclogging F050
Flow Cell Bubble Removal F051
RBC bath cleaning F052
Pre-mix bath cleaning F053
Components
WBC bath cleaning F054
cleaning
HGB bath cleaning F055
Open Vial unit cleaning F056
Piercing unit cleaning F057
Draining/priming Fluidic system cleaning F058
DIL bath priming F071
FCM bath priming F072
Cleanser cistern priming F073
WC1 cistern draning F081
WC2 cistern draning F082
7-15
Troubleshooting
DIL cistern draning F083

FCM cistern draning F084
RBC bath draning F085
Premix bath draining F086
HGB bath draning F087
WBC bath draning F088
Cleanser cistern draining F090
Fluidic system draining F091
WC3 bath draning F092
RBC bath priming F093
Premix bath priming F094
HGB bath priming F095
WBC bath priming F096
DIL floater self-test F074
FCM floater self-test F075
Cleanser floater self-test F076
Component self-test
WC1 floater self-test F077
Enter standby mode F131
Standby Exit standby mode in 3 hours F132
Exit standby mode after 3 hours F133
Fluidic system restores from
F041
failure
Fluidic initialization F101
7.4 Error analysis and processing
During the operation, if an error is detected, the analyzer will display the corresponding error
message on the upper left corner of the screen. In the error message area, the severity levels
are indicated by background colors, with red for the highest and blue for the lowest.
CLICK the error message on the screen and the corresponding help information will pop up.
CLICK the "Remove Error" button as instructed by the help information to remove errors.
Some errors can also be removed as instructed by the manual.
7.4.1 Pressure errors

Error Message Description Possible cause(s)
250 KPA pressure The pressure obtained The output pressure is not correct, inner
abnormal through system inquiry is failure of the pneumatic unit may exist;
not within [200, 300]. The calibration factor of the output
pressure is not correct, it needs to be
recalibrated;
7-16
Troubleshooting
Air leakage from one of the air valves or

junction boards;
The output pressure of the regulator
deviates from normal value too much;
3-way connecter of cylinder is
disconnected or leaking;
Air leakage of the pressure filter;
Air leakage of the pinch valve;
Abnormal pressure sensor.
160 KPA pressure The pressure obtained The pressure calibration factor is
abnormal through system inquiry is incorrect; it needs to be re-calibrated;
not within the range Air leakage of FCM cistern;
[128, 188]; Air leakage of the damaged air valves
GV75 and GV53;
Abnormal pressure sensor;
Air leakage of tubing connector;
Abnormal 250Kpa pressure output;
70 KPA pressure The pressure obtained The pressure calibration factor is
abnormal through system inquiry is incorrect, it needs to be re-calibrated;
not within the range [55, Air leakage of DIL cistern (or cleanser
81]. cistern), including cistern structure and
related air valves;
Abnormal air path of the metering pump;
error may occur to air valves and the
junction board;
Abnormal pressure sensor;
Abnormal 250Kpa pressure output;
-40 KPA pressure The pressure obtained The pressure calibration factor is
abnormal through system inquiry is incorrect; it needs to be re-calibrated;
not within the range [-46, Air leakage of WC1 cistern;
-30]. Air valve GV77 is damaged;
Air valve GV75 is damaged;
Abnormal output vacuum;
Abnormal sensor;
-85 KPA pressure The pressure obtained The output vacuum is not correct, inner
abnormal through system inquiry is failure of the pneumatic unit may exist;
not within the range [-97, The calibration factor of the output
-58]. vacuum is not correct, it needs to be
recalibrated;
Abnormal air path of the metering pump;
error may occur to air valves and the
junction board;
7-17
Troubleshooting
Air leakage of pneumatic connector;

Abnormal sensor.
7.4.2 Reagent errors

No Diluent Diluent has run out or Diluent in the diluent container has run
the sensor connected out.
with the diluent tube is in The sensor of diluent tube is not well
poor contact. connected or is damaged; the sensor
needs to be replaced.
No LH lyse The LH lyse has run out Lyse in LH lyse container has run out.
or the sensor connected The sensor of LH lyse tube is not well
with the LH lyse tube is connected or is damaged; the sensor
in poor contact needs to be replaced.
No LEO(I) lyse The LEO(I) lyse has run Lyse in LEO(I) lyse container has run out.
out or the sensor The sensor of LEO(I) lyse tube is not well
connected with the connected or is damaged, the sensor
LEO(I) lyse tube is in needs to be replaced.
poor contact
No LEO(II) lyse The LEO(II lyse has run Lyse in LEO(II) lyse container has run
out or the sensor out.
connected with the The sensor of LEO(II) lyse tube is not
LEO(II) lyse tube is in well connected or is damaged, the sensor
poor contact needs to be replaced.
No LBA lyse The LBA lyse has run Lyse in LBA lyse container has run out.
out or the sensor The sensor of LBA lyse tube is not well
connected with the LBA connected or is damaged, the sensor
lyse tube is in poor needs to be replaced.
contact
No Cleanser Cleanser has run out or Diluent in the cleanser container has run
the sensor connected out.
with the cleanser tube is The sensor of cleanser tube is not well
in poor contact. connected or is damaged, the sensor
needs to be replaced.
Waste cistern is full The waste cistern is full Diluent in the waste cistern has run out.
or the sensor connected The sensor of waste tube is not well
with the waste cistern is connected or is damaged, the sensor
in poor contact. needs to be replaced.
Diluent has expired Diluent expired
Diluent expired The expiration setting of diluent is
incorrect.
LEO(I) expired LEO(I) lyse has expired LEO(I) lyse has expired.
7-18
Troubleshooting
The expiration setting of LEO(I) lyse is

incorrect.
LEO(II) lyse has expired LEO(II) lyse has expired.
LEO(II) expired The expiration setting of LEO(II) lyse is
incorrect.
LBA lyse has expired LBA lyse has expired.
LBA expired The expiration setting of LBA lyse is
incorrect.
LH lyse has expired LH lyse has expired.
LH expired The expiration setting of LH lyse is
incorrect.
Cleanser has expired Cleanser has expired.
Cleanser expired The expiration setting of cleanser is
incorrect.
7.4.3 Hardware errors

Refer to Chapter 4 Hardware System for how to troubleshoot each board.
Common adjusting points of the boards are:
Adjustment of volumetric board VR3 and VR4:

Adjusting procedure:
1. Remove the side plate, top plate, main board, and the protective cover of signal
board, and take off the protective cover of volumetric board;
2. Remove the four screws fixing the volumetric board, take out the board without
moving other components. Pay attention to electrostatic prevention. Remove the
glue on VR3 and VR4 to prepare for adjustment;
3. Take off the signal wires of volumetric board and reconnect the brown wire to the
signal board and volumetric board, the 2 indicators on the volumetric board will light
up;
7-19
Troubleshooting
Figure 7-2 Pick out the brown wire
4. After the indicators turn on, set multimeter to measure DC voltage, connect the black
pen-shape detector of the multimeter to TPGND, the red pen-shape detector
monitors the voltage of TP2 and TP3. Adjust potentiometer VR4 and VR3 with
horologic driver to turn the voltage of each test point to 2.55-2.65V, if fails, please
replace the volumetric board; then put volumetric tube into the volumetric board, test
the voltage of VR3 and VR4, which should be 2.90V; if it cannot reach 2.9V, replace
the volumetric tube.
Figure 7-3 Measure VR3 and VR4
5. Lift the latch plate of the connector lightly with nipper and connect the brown wire to
the connector. Make sure that the connector is fixed securely.
7-20
Troubleshooting
Adjusting VR1 of sample detecting board
1. Connect the sample detection board to be tested to sample sensor;
2. Set multimeter to measure DC voltage, the black pen-shape detector is connected to

TPGND, the red detector monitors TP1;
3. Adjust VR1 with the driver (pay attention to the difference between VR1 and VR2),
observe whether the measured values change, and adjust voltage of the test point to
3.50.1V;
Figure 7-4 Measure VR3 and VR4
4. Block the sending and receiving ends of the sensor with non-transparent object, then
the output voltage should be 00.05V; otherwise the sensor is damaged.
5. Finally press the TELFON tube into the sensor slot, the output voltage should be no
less than 1.5V; otherwise the sensor is damaged.
7.4.4 Measurement errors

Background One or more background Contaminated bath(s) or aperture.
abnormal results are outside the The diluent is contaminated or expired.
specification range. Relevant tubing is contaminated.
Bubbles or clog is flagged during the
background counting.
Interference from the outside occurs for
the shielding is not close enough.
If HGB result is out of range, check
whether the HGB blank voltage is normal.
Polluted SRV. SRV needs cleaning
LAS background Value is out of the range LAS voltage signal is wrongly inducted.
voltage abnormal of 0-400mv. Flow cell is contaminated.
7-21
Troubleshooting
The testing circuit is abnormal.

Aperture voltage is Value is out of the range Incorrect reference value setting.
abnormal of 10-14mv. No diluent in the RBC bath.
Aperture or the installation of aperture is
abnormal.
Related testing circuits are abnormal.
HGB error The background voltage No diluent in the bath, HGB light is not
is 0-2V turned on, contaminated bath.
Expired reagent or contaminated
reagent.
Incorrect gain setting.
Abnormal HGB light assembly.
Related testing circuits are abnormal.
RBC clog The time taken for RBC Incorrect reference count time setting.
counting is too long Contaminated bath or impurity in the
aperture.
Damaged photocoupler of the volumetric
tube.
Abnormal -0.04Mpa pressure, maybe too
low.
Fluidic valve SV37 or SV38 error.
Poor connection between relevant valve
and the driver board.
RBC bubbles The time taken for RBC Incorrect reference count time setting.
counting is too short Damaged photocoupler of the volumetric
tube.
Fluid in the volumetric tube cannot be
drained successfully due to valve error.
Poor connection between relevant valve
and the driver board.
Abnormal -0.04Mpa pressure, maybe too
high.
7.4.5 Temperature errors

Laser diode temp. The temperature Error occurs to the temperature sensor
error obtained through inside the optical system;
system inquiry is not Error occurs to the heater inside the optical
within the range [30, 40]. system.
Laser diode current The current obtained Aging laser;

error through system inquiry Wrong setting or damage of the
is not within the range potentiometer of laser control board. The
7-22
Troubleshooting
[20, 50] board needs to be replaced.

Preheat bath temp. Abnormal temperature The preheat temperature is outside the
abnormal of preheat bath or the reference range 30-50, please adjust
temperature sensor of the temperature to meet the working
preheat bath is requirement of the analyzer.
damaged. Damaged temperature sensor of preheat
bath. The temperature sensor needs to be
replaced.
Reaction bath temp. Abnormal temperature The reaction temperature is outside the
abnormal of reaction bath or the reference range 30-45, please adjust
temperature sensor of the temperature to meet the working
reaction bath is requirement of the analyzer.
damaged. Damaged temperature sensor of reaction
bath. The temperature sensor needs to be
replaced.
Temperature out of The ambient The ambient temperature is outside the
working range temperature is abnormal range 15-30. Adjust the operation
or the temperature ambient temperature to meet the working
sensor is damaged. temperature requirement.
Damaged ambient temperature sensor. The
temperature sensor needs to be replaced.
Temperature out of The ambient The ambient temperature is outside the
operating range temperature is abnormal range 4-40. Adjust the operation
or the temperature ambient temperature to meet the working
sensor is damaged. temperature requirement.
Damaged ambient temperature sensor. The
temperature sensor needs to be replaced.
7.4.6 Scattergram errors

Monocytes differential
Inaccurate volume of 4-DIFF differential
result is too high.
reagents is added in. LEO(I) should be
Results of most normal
1.02ml and LEO(II) should be 0.32ml.
samples are 10%
Monocytes too high Polluted DIFF reaction bath.
higher. The division
Reaction bath temperature is out of the
between monocytes and
normal range. The reaction is not
neutrophils is not
sufficient.
distinct.
WBC analysis results: If cells are differentiated in the DIFF
Spots in DIFF Spots in DIFF, and scattergram, but the ghost cells and
No spot in BASO mostly there are many lymphocytes stick together, the RBC
ghost cells; little or even hemolysis is not sufficient. The reason
7-23
Troubleshooting
no BASO spot; WBC may be that

value is 0 or ***. Hemolysis resistance of the sample itself.
Inaccurate volume of LEO(I) and LEO(II)
is added in.
Abnormal temperature of the reaction
bath.
If cells are not differentiated in the DIFF
scattergram and all cell subpopulations
stick together, hemolysis may fail. The
sample almost does not react with the
lyse due to abnormal mixing system or
the out-of-control reaction bath
temperature.
If cells are normally differentiated in the
DIFF scattergram, the problem lies with
the BASO reaction bath. Check:
whether the sample is added into the
BASO channel normally to make sure if
the reagent inlet steel tube of the BASO
bath is clogged.
whether the sample preparation during
the BASO analysis is normal to make
sure if the pinch valve before the BASO
reaction bath works normally.
Sheath flow is not formed. Many bubbles
enter the WBC channel. Check:
whether the diluent container is empty to
make sure if something is wrong with the
Spots are randomly
diluent sensor.
Spots scatter all over scattered in the
whether the FCM cistern is empty. If so,
the scattergram scattergram obtained
prime the FCM cistern. If priming fails,
from normal samples.
something is wrong with the FCM floater
sensor. If priming goes normally, check
whether the pinch valve below the FCM
cistern works normally.
Calculate the gain of the analyzer
The scattergrams
according to the standard particles
obtained from normal
position in the scattergram. If the new
samples are
gain is normal, the differential of the
Compressed compressed either
scattergram is good and the problem of
scattergram evenly or to one side,.
compressed scattergram is removed,
the BASO scattegram is
steps below are unnecessary.
obviously cut off and
If gain setup cannot solve the problem,
total spots are fewer.
refer to the optical system section in the
7-24
Troubleshooting
service manual to troubleshoot the

analyzer.
If the optical system is of a new version,
check whether the heating of the front
light assembly is normal and whether
there is error message of laser diode
temperature on the count screen. If the
heating is normal, refer to the optical
system section in the service manual to
troubleshoot the analyzer.
Conduct a visual check on the differential
effect of the DIFF scattergram. If the
differential effect is not good, check:
whether the reagent connection is correct
and whether the reagent is within the
open-vial expiration date.
Check whether the reaction bath
temperature, the ambient temperature
and the added volume of reagents are
Frequent flagging of Most normal samples
normal.
left shift are flagged left shift
If the related fluidic system is normal,
refer to the optical adjustment process of
the analyzer to readjust the optical
system.
If the DIFF differential is well clustered,
the high angle gain of the DIFF channel
may be too small. Refer to the optical
adjustment process of the analyzer to
reset the high angle gain.
7.4.7 Analyzing and processing common errors

Processing errors of WBC channel
Description: WBC results are low, DIFF/BASO scattergram is abnormal
Error analysis:
7-25
Figure 7-5 Analyzing process of low WBC results
7-26
Troubleshooting
Typical cause of low WBC results: piercing probe clog

Error phenomenon: when conducting repeatability test, the WBC/RBC
results get lower gradually.
When conduct counting under autoloader mode, there is a sequence for piercing probe
cleaning after sample aspiration. After cleaning the probe, some diluent remains in the
aspirating tube, the piercing probe is clogged. If this happens, dispense probe cleanser into
the tube and conduct counting under autoloader mode. If the problem persists, replace the
piercing probe.
Processing errors of RBC channel

Error phenomenon: RBC bubbles, RBC clog, etc.
Error analysis:
The START delay time (n1) and RBC count time (n2) are the mean values of five background
counts, they can be altered in "Setup".
RBC bubble error reporting strategy:
During sample testing: the START delay time < n1-2s or RBC count time < n2-2s, the error
message "RBC bubbles" will be reported;
RBC clog error reporting strategy:
1 Time: the START delay time > n1+2s or RBC count time > n2+2s, "RBC clog" will be
reported;
2 Baseline: the sum of the RBC baseline time that is over the upper and lower limits is greater
than 50 of RBC count time, "RBC clog" will be reported.
The RBC baseline time that is over the upper and lower limits can be viewed in "Special info.".
See below figure
Figure 7-6 Special info.
z The unit of RBC count time is 0.1s and the unit of RBC baseline is ms.
When the sum of the RBC baseline time that is over the upper and lower limits is greater than
50 of RBC count time, there are impurities in the sample or liquid, please check;
7-27
Troubleshooting
Figure 7-7 Analyzing process of RBC channel
7-28
Troubleshooting
Processing errors of HGB channel

Error phenomenon: error in HGB channel
Error analysis:
Reagent expired
or contaminated?
Diluent in DIL DIL cistern

cistern? self-test
SRV position OK?

Dispense liquid
OK?
Diluent dispensed on the

side wall of HGB bath?
2mm tube is left out?
Dispensing normal?
Gain setup
(2.28V)
HGB indicator on?
Connection OK?
Indicator unit abnormal?
HGB indicator
normal? The wall of HGB
bath dirty?
Dispense bubbles 70KPA pressure normal
Check valve and GV65 OK?
Figure 7-8 Analyzing process of HGB channel
Analyzing special information

Error phenomenon: WBC, RBC, HGB and PLT results are abnormal.
After perform counting, CLICK "Review" - "Graph" - "Special", below screen will be displayed:
7-29
Troubleshooting
When conducting
background count, the
difference value between
HGB blank voltage and
measurement voltage is
less than 3.
RBC count time must be in
the range of set value
0.25s, the START delay
time must be in the range of
set value 0.5s.
Representing total number

of pulses/number of valid
pulses/number of invalid
pulses
Representing total number of
pulses/total count of RBC
recognized by the
algorithm/total count of PLT
Figure 7-9 Special info.
The range of special info. for normal samples should be as Figure 7-9.
Analyzing the error of blank screen

Error phenomenon: the display goes blank
Error analysis:
When the error of blank screen occurs, first check whether the LED of the indicator board is on;
if not, consider if the 5V and 24V circuits are short-circuited and then solve the problem
according to below procedure.
Figure 7-10 Analyzing procedure of the blank screen error
7-30
Troubleshooting
z If no problem is found with the circuits and main board, the error may lie
with the inverter. However, as there is no valid test point between the
inverter and the display, the error can only be verified by replacing the
inverter and the display.
Analyzing pressure errors

Error phenomenon: abnormal pressure and vacuum of the analyzer is
reported
Internal tube of
Vacuum and
Pneumatic Connection pneumatic unit
Pneumatic unit pressure are -85k
unit on? correct? and 250k
is loose?
Air pump broken
Sound in pinch filter

Venting sound Tubes
Pressure filter water outlet tube Clean filter Replace filter
loud? connected? indicates filter failure
Pressure
Pressure Inlet status of the Replace the
adjusted
regulator regulator correct? regulator
correctly?
Replace
Pressure Replace with other pressure
sensor pressure sensor? detection
Normal? board
Figure 7-11 Analyzing procedure of pressure errors

5V power is short-circuited
Error phenomenon:
Turn on the power, press the power button, the indicator turns green and then off, the fan of the
analyzer is rotating, but the system does not generate any response.
Troubleshooting
1. Make sure which board causes the error of short-circuited 5V power.
Unplug the power cords of the main board and signal processing board, the power supply
board only provides power to the power driver board, restart the analyzer to see if the error still
exists. If the indicator on the front plate turns green, the error has been removed, otherwise the
error persists. If the error disappears, then the short-circuit of 5V power is caused by other
boards, please go on with Step ; otherwise, the driver board or its peripheral wires or
components are short-circuited, please go on with Step 2.
The power supply board only provides power to the driver board and signal processing
board, restart the analyzer to see if the error still exists. If yes, the error is caused by the signal
7-31
Troubleshooting
processing board and its peripheral wires; if no, the error is caused by the main board.
2. Make sure short-circuit occurs inside or outside the board. If it occurs inside the board,
the board needs to be replaced; if it occurs outside the board, check which wire
causes the error.
Unplug all wires of the board that have 5V power signal (excluding the power cord), restart
the analyzer to see if the error is removed. If yes, the error is caused by external wires or
components, go on with below Step ; if not, the error lies with the board itself, remove
impurities (dust or water stain) on the board, restart the analyzer, if the error still exists, replace
the board.
Add a piece of wire each time to connect with the board, if the error occurs, then the
short-circuit of 5V power is caused by the wire added, go on with Step 3; if the error disappears,
turn off the power and connect another piece of wire, and then turn on the power; repeat the
process until the error occurs or all wires are checked.
3. Make sure which component or the wire itself is short-circuited, find out the reason
and eliminate the error.
z Pay more attention to the photocoupler and connection wire of the driver
board.

Error phenomenon:
Turn on the power, press the power button, the indicator turns green, but the display does not
light up and the fan of the analyzer does not rotate.
Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting procedure is the same as that of the short-circuited 5V power. The only
difference is when judging which wire causes the short-circuit of 12V power; the wires that
have 12V power signal need to be checked.

Error phenomenon:
Turn on the power, press the power button, the indicator turns green and then off, the display
does not light up and the fan of the analyzer does not rotate.
Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting procedure is the same as that of the short-circuited 5V power. Only the
power driver board has 24V power, so the error is only relevant with the driver board and its
connection wires or components.
7-32
Troubleshooting
z Pay more attention to the WBC bath and its connection wires to see if the
erosion of them causes the short-circuit of 24V power.
Abnormal scattergram - spots scatter all over the scattergram

Error phenomenon:
Abnormal scattergram with spots all over it is generated during measurement of normal
samples. See below figure:
Figure 7-12 Abnormal scattergram - spots scatter all over the scattergram
Troubleshooting
1. Please check whether the diluent container is empty. Sometime the floater does not
report error when the container gets empty;
2. Open the right door, check whether there are diluent in the FCM cistern; if no, prime
the FCM cistern through "Maintenance" screen;
3. If after performing "Prime FCM Cistern", no fluid enters into the cistern, check if the
SV53 is normal. If the counting process cannot start and stop normally, then the valve
must be damaged.
4. If Burkert valve SV53 can open and close normally, then the air valve controlling
pressure and vacuum switching of the FCM cistern must be damaged, GV80 needs to
be replaced.
If vertical lines appear on both sides of the scattergram (see Figure 7-13), that is because air
enters into reagent tubing. Check whether reagent bottles were replaced recently or the
reagent tubing is loose. Then perform background counting for several times, the error can be
eliminated.
7-33
Troubleshooting
Figure 7-13 Abnormal scattergram - vertical lines on both sides
Contaminated flow cell

Error phenomenon:
WBC differential effect gets poorer, neutrophils are not well-clustered, the count of eosinophils
increases. After perform counting using 7um standard particles under OV-WB mode, the
scattergram is not well-clustered, DIFF scattergram shows multiple layers. See below Figure
7-14:
Figure 7-14 7um standard particle scattergram (abnormal - flow cell contaminated)
Troubleshooting
Refer to Chapter 6 6.4.1 Sample scattergram is abnormal for troubleshooting.
The direct light masking diaphragm of the rear light unit is not
symmetrical
Error phenomenon:
WBC differential effect becomes poor, neutrophils decrease and lymphocytes increase. After
perform counting using 7um standard particles under OV-WB mode, the spots are not
well-clustered, low angle DIFF scattergram is dispersed. See below Figure 7-15:
7-34
Troubleshooting
Figure 7-15 7um standard particle scattergram (abnormal - direct-light masking

diaphragm is not symmetrical)
Troubleshooting
Refer to Chapter 6 6.3.2 Fine-tuning - Fine-tuning rear light collimating assembly and direct
light masking diaphragm for troubleshooting.
Change of front light

Error phenomenon:
WBC result is too low, the blood sample scattergram shrinks (see Figure 7-16) and the
problem cannot be solved by adjusting the gain; gain setup is out of the normal range.
Figure 7-16 Compressed scattergram of normal sample (abnormal - change of front

light)
Troubleshooting
Refer to Chapter 6.3.2 Fine-tuning - Adjusting the axial position of the front light assembly
Adjusting flag sensitivity parameters

Default flag sensitivity has been set for the analyzer in factory; when installing the analyzer,
there is no need to set up sensitivity parameters.
BC-5800has 4 adjustable flag sensitivity parameters, which are "Left Shift", "Immature Cells",
"Abn./Atypical Lym" and "RBC Lyse Resist", their default sensitivity values are 5, 5, 5, and 0
respectively. The adjustable range of sensitivity parameters is 0-10, the lower the value is, the
higher the flag rate. When a flag sensitivity parameter is set to 0, the flag will not be displayed
7-35
Troubleshooting
when testing samples.

We suggest that the service engineer adjust the sensitivity parameters if the following
requirements are necessary in daily use.
The "RBC lyse resist" sensitivity can be set as 5 when the user wants "RBC lyse
resist" flag.
If a user thinks the flag frequency is too low, he can increase the sensitivity
parameter of the flag (The sensitivity parameter should not be greater than 8).
If users do not want too many flags, they want to decrease the sensitivity and would
like to take the risk, the flag sensitivity can be decreased.
z All parameters should not be less than 3 except for "RBC lyse resist".
When the flag sensitivity parameters are within the range 3-8, the flag frequency should be
acceptable. If the flag frequency of a parameter is exceptionally high, and the sample is normal,
then the analyzer itself needs to be checked.
The flag sensitivity parameters can be set as follows:
Login the "Main" screen with the service engineer access level and CLICK the
"Setup" icon to enter into the "Setup" screen.
After entering the "Setup" screen, CLICK the "Advanced" button to enter the
"Advanced" screen.
In the "Advanced" screen, CLICK the "Edit" button under the "Flag Sensitivity", the
edit box of parameter sensitivity pops up (Figure 7-17). Then adjust the setup
parameters of the corresponding flags according to the users requirements. After the
setup is finished, CLICK Ok and quit the "Advanced" screen.
Figure 7-17 Flag sensitivity parameters setup screen
7-36
Troubleshooting
Adjusting of flag sensitivity parameters of the non-diff algorithm

Default non-diff algorithm sensitivity has been set for the analyzer in factory; when installing
the analyzer, there is no need to set up sensitivity parameters.
The non-diff algorithm sensitivity parameter of BC-5800 has two options, which are "Strong"
and "Weak". The default value is "Strong".
If non-diff occurs frequently in daily use and the service engineers cannot solve the problem,
then whether the setting can be modified will be decided by "R&D".
The non-diff algorithm sensitivity parameters can be set as follows:
Login the "Main" screen with the service engineer access level and CLICK the
"Setup" icon to enter into the "Setup" screen.
After entering the "Setup" screen, CLICK the "Advanced" button to enter the
"Advanced" screen.
In the "Advanced" screen, CLICK the pull-down button under the "Non-diff
sensitivity" and the pull-down list of the "Non-diff sensitivity" pops up (Figure 7-18).
Then adjust the setup parameters of non-diff algorithm according to the advice
provided by "R&D". After the setup is finished, quit the "Advanced " screen and save
the parameters.
Figure 7-18 Non-diff algorithm sensitivity parameters setup screen
7-37
8 Maintaining Your Analyzer
8.1 List of Parts That Need to Be Replaced

Periodically
See below for the list of parts that need to be replaced periodically:
Description Code Position Service life
Cylinder liner (Service 082-000205-00
spare part of THOMAS
air pump) THOMAS air pump 11,800 hours
Piston ring (service 082-000206-00
spare part of THOMAS
air pump) THOMAS air pump 11,800 hours
Pincher 3100-20-41102 Mix unit 60,000 times
Filter core (service spare 082-000209-00 Back panel unit 2 years
part of CHELIC filter)
PHOTOELEC Optical 011-000021-00 The analyzer, mix 48,000 hours

Sensor IP55 940nm unit, WBC unit and
15cm sample transport unit
Filter. Inline Filter 65um 082-000156-00 The analyzer 5 years
1/8I.D.Tubing
Probe wipe unit 801-3110-00093-00 Auto-sampling unit 36,000 times
Air drier, diaphragm type M6Q-070003--- The analyzer 4 years
IDG1-02
Shielded ground wire 3100-20-41305 The analyzer 1 years
8.2 Basic Maintenance from Service Engineer

In order to monitor device status at customer side and reduce failure rate, service engineers
are required to visit customers at least once in 3 months to conduct some basic maintenance.
Tools and consumables:
Common dismantling tools (cross-headed screwdriver, slotted-head screwdriver,
cutting nippers, hexagonal wrench and buckles)
Probe cleanser
5mL disposable syringe
7um standard particles, controls or calibrators and corresponding targets
8-1
Maintaining Your Analyzer
Figure 8-1 Field maintenance procedure
8.2.1 Check operating status of the analyzer

Log in as service engineer, view system log to see if failures occurred frequently recently (1
month is recommended). If yes, communicate with users to investigate daily operating status,
so that problems can be found out and solved in time. If trend failure of the analyzer is found,
replace parts according to the troubleshooting methods of common failures in Chapter 7.
8-2
8.2.2 Check temperature and pressure

Enter "Service" - "Status" screen, CLICK "Temp & Pres", check if the values of temperature
and pressure are in the required range. See Figure 8-2. If the values are not within the range,
adjust each regulator to turn the pressure into the range.
Figure 8-2"Temp & Pres" screen
8.2.3 Probe Cleanser Maintenance of SRV

Go to "Service" - "Maintenance" screen, CLICK "SRV", maintain SRV with probe cleanser.
See Figure 8-3.
8-3
Figure 8-3 Probe cleanser maintenance of SRV
8.2.4 Removing and Cleaning SRV
1. Turn off the pneumatic unit, put a piece of dry cloth under SRV to clean the leftover
reagent or liquid when removing it from the analyzer.
2. Pull out the leftover liquid tray under the SRV, clean it with clear water.
3. Move the bracket of the open vial probe wipe down until the probe wipe gets out of the
sample probe.
4. Turn the hand hold of the spring counter-clockwise to remove it, take off the sampling
valve and rotor valve of SRV. See Figure 8-4.
8-4
Figure 8-4 Removing SRV
5. Aspirate probe cleanser with a syringe and dispense it into the holes and slots of the
sampling valve, rotor valve and rear fixed valve, and clean them lightly. See Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 Clean holes and slots with probe cleanser
6. Wipe the contacting faces between the three valves with clean wet cloth and probe
cleanser, and then wash them with distilled water.
8-5
7. Reinstall the SRV.
z The hand hold of rotor valve should face to the analyzer; the curved surface
of rotor valve should face up. After installation turn the hand hold of rotor
valve to up position.
8.2.5 Cleaning Open Vial Probe Wipe and Pierce Probe Wipe
1. Pull the bracket of the probe wipe down to the utmost, and remove the open vial probe
wipe lightly from the sample probe;
2. Remove the open vial probe wipe from the bracket, and pull off the pipe connected
with the probe wipe. See Figure 8-6:
Figure 8-6Removing open vial probe wipe
3. Wash the open vial probe wipe with clear water, then dry it and install per the removing
procedure in reverse order.
4. Clean pierce probe wipe and the exterior wall of pierce probe with clean cloth and
clear water. See Figure 8-7
8-6
Figure 8-7Clean pierce probe wipe
8.2.6 Maintaining Flow Cell

1. Go to "Service" "Maintenance" screen, CLICK "Flow Cell", maintain flow cell with
probe cleanser. See Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-8 Wash flow cell with probe cleanser
2. Clean the exterior wall of flow cell
Open the optical shielding box, wrap a cotton stick with lens wiping paper (generally it can be
found in all hospitals), wipe the exterior wall of the flow cell from center to sides to make it
clean.
8-7
z Do it with caution, do not touch the diaphragm.
8.2.7 Maintaining Other Parts

Remove the mix unit of WBC bath, clear crystals from motors, photocouplers, trays
and wall of the bath. Remember not to use materials that produce scraps easily and
pay attention to screws as they may fall into the analyzer.
Check if the focus of touchscreen is dispersed; if yes, go to "Service" "Self-test"

to calibrate the touchscreen;
Enter "Service" "Init." "Runs init.", CLICK on specific information. See Figure
8-9.
Figure 8-9 Summary information
Confirm piercing times of the pierce probe; if it is over 36,000, please replace the
pierce probe unit; if not, clean the probe wipe.
Check whether the two yellow pinch tubes at the outlet of WBC bath have been used
for over 12 months. If yes, replace them.
Check whether there is liquid in the isolation chamber on the back panel that is
8-8
connected with the vacuum. If yes remove the isolation chamber and pour out the
liquid.
Replace the filter core once every two years. Refer to for the
operation.
Remove dust from the analyzer, clean and maintain it.
8.2.8 Cleaning the Analyzer

1. Restart the pneumatic unit.
2. Enter the main screen, CLICK "Service" "Clean" "Overall" to perform overall
maintenance.
3. Perform cleaning for once or background count for 3 times, if still not qualified, check
the cleaning procedure above and perform cleaning again (till now, overall
maintenance is finished).
8.2.9 Test Verification

1 Optical gain verification. Verify with calibrators. LAS CG position and MAS CG position must
be within the range corresponding CG target. The range of CG target is target 2.Then
confirm with 7um standard particle. LAS 0.1max width must be 9, MAS 0.1max width must
be 13. For detailed operations, refer to 6.3.2 Validation of the optical system fine-tuning.
2 Verify the accuracy of the analyzer by performing counting with calibrators and controls. If
still not qualified, re-perform calibration.
3 Perform open vial and autoloading test using fresh blood (more than 10 tubes). The precision
and repeatability must be high and scattergram must be the same as shown in Figure 8-10:
Figure 8-10 Scattergram validation
8-9
9 Appendices
A List of Spare Parts
A.1 Spare PCBA

No. Description MINDRAY code/model
1. Main board 051-000197-00

2. Signal processing board 051-000192-00
3. Driver board 051-000191-00
4. Power board 3100-20-41188
5. Pre-amplification board (high angle) 051-000124-00
6. Pre-amplification board (low angle) 051-000125-00
7. Laser control board 3100-20-41194
8. Volumetric board 3100-20-41196
9. Indicator board 3100-20-41198
10. Interface board 3100-20-41200
11. Pneumatic control board 3100-20-41202
12. Sample transport board 051-000154-00
13. Touchscreen control board 051-000202-00
14. Sample detecting board 051-000145-00
15. Pressure detecting board 051-000196-00
16. Recorder driver board TR6C-20-16651
A.2 Spare parts

17. Hard disk 80GB 7200rpm Ultra ATA/133RoHS100 023-000050-00
18. Sensitive switch OMR0N D2SW-01H 3001-10-07060
19. Three-way
0030-30-13196 micro-valve (short
line)
20. Two-way micro-valve
0030-30-13197
(short line)
21. Two-way valve ASCO458283 3003-20-34942
22. Syringe Assembly 100ul 3100-10-49438
23. HGB bath (Mould MR40704) 3100-20-40704
24. RBC premix bath (Mould MR40797) 3100-20-40797
25. RBC transferring connector 3100-20-40804
A-1
Appendices
26. Piercing probe 801-3110-00092-00

27. Optical system 801-3110-00045-00
28. 3110 pneumatic unit (220V)(FRU) 801-3110-00032-00
29. 0.32ml metering pump (3110) 115-003893-00
30. Metering pump (1ml) 3100-30-40739
31. 2ml metering pump (3110) 115-002968-00
32. 2.6ml metering pump 115-002967-00
33. 3110 tube rack assembly 115-003326-00
34. Metering pump (0.5ml) 3100-30-40748
35. Metering pump (1.5ml) 3100-30-40753
36. Metering pump LEO(I) 3100-30-40758
37. HGB bracket assembly 3100-30-40765
38. Preheat assembly 115-002261-00
39. SRV assembly 115-003211-00
40. SRV rear fixed valve assembly 115-003221-00
41. SRV rotor valve assembly 115-003222-00
42. SRV sampling valve assembly 115-003223-00
43. Touchscreen assembly 115-003179-00
44. Syringe assembly (100ul) 3100-30-41017
45. Syringe assembly (2.5ml) 3100-30-41018
46. Pinch valve assembly (5mm) 3100-30-41125
47. Pinch valve assembly (8mm) 3100-30-41126
48. Main board 051-000197-00
49. Signal processing board 051-000192-00
50. Driver board 051-000191-00
51. Power board 3100-20-41188
52. Pre-amplification board (high angle) 051-000124-00
53. Pre-amplification board (low angle) 051-000125-00
54. Laser control board 3100-20-41194
55. Volumetric board 3100-20-41196
56. Indicator board 3100-20-41198
57. Interface board 3100-20-41200
58. Pneumatic control board 3100-20-41202
59. Sample transport board 051-000154-00
60. Touchscreen control board 051-000202-00
61. Sample detecting board 051-000145-00
62. Pressure detecting board 051-000196-00
63. Recorder driver board TR6C-20-16651
64. Waster cistern 1 assembly 115-002264-00
65. Waster cistern 2 assembly 3100-30-41244
66. Diluent cistern assembly 115-003177-00
67. WBC reaction bath assembly 3100-30-41261
68. Mixing unit 115-002934-00
A-2
Appendices
69. Burkert valve assembly 115-004352-00

70. Front cover assembly (5800) 801-3110-00035-00
71. Front cover assembly (5600) 801-3110-00036-00
72. Disassembly unit 3100-30-49138
73. LEO(I) lyse cap assembly 3100-30-49451
74. LEO(II) lyse cap assembly 3100-30-49452
75. LBA lyse cap assembly 3100-30-49453
76. LH lyse cap assembly (5800) 115-003239-00
77. Cap assembly of diluent 3100-30-49455
78. Cap assembly of cleanser 115-003240-00
79. Cap assembly of waste 115-003238-00
80. Volumetric tube 801-3100-00227-00
81. RBC bath 801-3110-00002-00
82. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GA010E1-MLX-DC12V M6Q-020002---
83. Gas valve. Solenoid valve GA010E1-11-MLX-DC12V
M6Q-020018---
(without connecting line)
84. Gas valve. Solenoid valve 0104E1-21-PLL-DC12V (without
M6Q-020005---
connecting line)
85. Gas valve. Pressure relief valve LRP-1/4-2.5 082-000150-00
86. Gas valve. Vacuum regulator IRV1000-01 M6Q-020007---
87. Air drier (diaphragm type) IDG1-02 M6Q-070003---
88. Filter. Inline Filter 65um 1/8" I.D.Tubing 082-000156-00
89. Connector (vertical tube) 4ID, M5, SPA4-M5 M6Q-030010---
90. Connector (micro and straight) 4ID, M3, LC-0425-M3 M6Q-030009---
91. Air filter, Rc1/8" automatically drain, AF150-00 082-000135-00
92. Fluidic valve, uckbill checkvalve 1/8"X1/8" M6Y-020003---
93. Blood sensor and connection wire 3100-21-49017
A.3 Consumable
No. Description MINDRAY Package
code/model Specification
94. Tubing. PU tube 4mmX2.5mm transparent M6G-020002--- 20M
95. Tubing. PU tube 6mmX4mm transparent M6G-020003--- 20M
96. Tubing. NB tube 6mmX4mm white M6G-020004--- 20M
97. Tubing. MPF tube 2mmX3.5mm M6G-020005--- 50FT
98. Tubing. Silicone, 1/16"X3/16", TYGON 3350 M6G-020006--- 50FT
99. Tubing. Chemfluor FEP, 0.062"ODX0.031"ID M6G-020008--- 50FT
100. Tubing. Silica gel 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/ coil M6G-020009--- 50FT
101. Tubing. PharMed, 1/16"ODX1/8"ID M6G-020011--- 25FT
102. Tubing. PU,ID: 3/32", OD3/16", clear M6G-020054--- 100FT
103. Tubing. 3/32"X5/32", S-50-HL AAX02004,
M90-100071--- 100FT
Tygon
A-3
Appendices
104. Tubing. Teflon, 1.5mmX2.5mm, 9023-14, TFS M90-100031--- 100FT

105. Tubing. 1/8"X1/4", R-3603 AAC02007, Tygon M90-000025--- 100FT
106. Tubing. PTFE, 1/32"X1/16", 3000074, 100ft/coil M90-000026--- 100FT
107. Tubing. 1/16"X3/16",F-5500-A,Fluran 082-000055-00 50FT
108. Tubing. FEP, 0.040"X0.066"X100ft 0040-10-32301 100FT
109. Air filter GB8368-98 3001-10-07054 4PCS
110. Centrifugal tube (1.5mL) A21-000013--- 20PCS
111. M-58D diluent 105-000383-00 20L
112. M-58LEO(I) lyse (500ml) 105-000386-00 500ml4
113. M-58LEO(I) lyse (1L) 105-000387-00 1L4
114. M-58LEO(II) lyse (500ml) 105-000390-00 500ml4
115. M-58LEO(II) lyse (Chinese/1L) 105-000391-00 1L4
116. M-58LH lyse (500ml) 105-000393-00 500ml4
117. M-58LBA lyse (500ml) 105-000395-00 500ml4
118. M-58LBA lyse (1L) 105-000396-00 1L4
119. Probe cleanser (Chinese/50mL) 105-000385-00 50ml
120. M-58 cleanser A12-000152--- 1L4
A.4 Prefix of board sockets

Prefix of Labeling
Board PCBA part No.
sockets method
Main board 051-000197-00 A A-J1...
Signal processing 051-000192-00
B B-J1...
board
Driver board 051-000191-00 C C-J1...
Power board 3100-20-41188 D D-J1...
Pre-amplification 051-000124-00
E E-J1...
board (MAS)
Pre-amplification 051-000125-00
F F-J1...
board (LAS)
Laser control board 3100-20-41194 G G-J1...
Volumetric board 3100-20-41196 H H-J1...
Indicator board 3100-20-41198 I I-J1...
Interface board 3100-20-41200 K K-J1...
Pneumatic control 3100-20-41202
L L-J1...
board
Transport board 051-000154-00 M M-J1...
Recorder driver TR6C-20-16651
N N-J1...
board
Sample detecting 051-000145-00
P P-J1...
board
Pressure detecting 051-000196-00
Q Q-J1
board
A-4
Appendices
A.5 Cable
No. Material Description MINDRAY code/model
1. USB extension line 009-000135-00
2. Power cord harness 009-000200-00
3. Connecting line connecting main board and driver board 3100-20-41288
USB connecting line connecting main board and
4. 3100-20-41289
interface board
Network connecting line connecting main board and
5. 3100-20-41290
interface board
6. TFT display signal line 3100-20-41291
7. Hard disk signal line 3100-20-41292
8. Touchscreen signal line 3100-20-41294
9. Power cord of TFT screen converter 3100-20-41295
10. Hard disk power cord 3100-20-41296
11. Electromagnet control line 3100-20-41297
12. LAS signal line 3100-20-41298
13. MAS signal line 3100-20-41299
14. RBC/PLT signal line 3100-20-41300
15. Volumetric signal line 3100-20-41302
16. HGB signal line 3100-20-41303
17. Fan and connecting line of the analyzer 3100-20-41304
18. Screen ground wire 3100-20-41305
19. Control line of laser heater 3100-20-41306
20. Control line of valve 1 to 16 009-000176-00
23. Pump transferring line 3100-20-41310
24. Connecting line harness of tube rack transport unit 3100-20-49003
25. Control line of Y direction transport motor 3100-20-49003-01
26. Control line of X direction transport motor 3100-20-49003-02
Position sensor transferring line of tube rack transport
27. 3100-20-49003-03
unit
28. Connecting line of pneumatic compensating capacitor 3100-20-49004
29. Connecting line of pneumatic unit temperature switch 3100-20-49005
30. Connecting line harness of piercing&mixing unit 009-000181-00
31. Connecting line harness of motors and sensors 009-000184-00
32. Control line of whole blood aspirating syringe motor 3100-20-49007-01
33. Pump connecing line 3100-20-49007-02
34. DC motor control line 3100-20-49007-03
35. Control line of WBC sample dispensing syringe motor 3100-20-49007-04
36. Connecting line of syringe unit position sensor 009-000185-00
A-5
Appendices
Connecting line connecting power driver board and

37. 3100-20-49007-06
indicator board
38. Control line of manual sampling motor 3100-20-49007-07
39. Position sensor transferring line 3100-20-49007-08
Compressor control line connecting driver board and
40. 3100-20-49012
interface board
41. Laser control line of driver board 3100-20-49013
42. Signal line of barcode reader 3100-20-49015
43. Touchscreen transferring line 3100-20-49016
44. Network cable (connecting the analyzer to computer) 3100-20-49018
Communication line connecting main board and signal
45. 3100-20-49019
processing board
46. Connecting line harness of autoloader 3100-20-49020
47. Blood oxygen sensor transferring line 3100-20-49021
Connecting line connecting driver board and blood
48. 3100-20-49022
sensor adapter board
49. Connecting line harness of heater 3100-20-49023
50. Transferring line of laser diode temperature sensor 3100-20-49024
51. Transferring line of ambient temperature sensor 3100-20-49025
52. Transferring line of reagent status detector 009-000179-00
53. Power cord of compressor 3100-20-49031
54. Power cord of compressor fan 3100-20-49033
Control line connecting interface board and pneumatic
55. 3100-20-49034
unit control board
56. AC input power cord of pneumatic unit control board 3100-20-49035
57. Control line of pneumatic unit control board 3100-20-49036
58. Fan and connecting line of compressor 3100-20-49037
59. Connecting line of sensitive switch 3100-20-49040
60. Fan and connecting line of power box 3100-20-49042
61. AC input power cord of power board 3100-20-49043
62. Compressor ground wire 3100-20-49047
63. Network cable (connecting the analyzer to HUB) 3100-20-49655
64. Laser temperature switch and connecting line 3100-21-41010
65. Laser heater and connecting line 3100-21-41011
66. Heater and connecting line (40W) 3100-21-41301
68. Control line of valve 49 to valve 64 (open vial model) 090-000600-00
70. Ambient temperature sensor and connecting line 3100-21-49002
71. Connecting line of power switch 009-000096-00
72. Control line of valve 49 to valve 64 (open vial model) 3100-21-49009
74. Blood sensor and connecting line 3100-21-49017
A-6
Appendices
75. Connecting line of laser control board semi-conductor 3100-21-49030

76. Control line of pneumatic unit indicator 3100-21-49032
77. Temperature sensor and connecting line 3100-21-49038
78. Connecting line of tube detector 009-000242-00
79. Heater and connecting line (50W) 3100-21-49045
80. Temperature switch and connecting line 3100-21-49046
81. Autoloader motor and connecting line 3100-21-49048
82. Mixing motor and connecting line 3100-21-49049
83. AC input connecting line 009-000097-00
Connecting line connecting power driver board and
84. 009-000440-00
pressure control board
A-7
Appendices
B List of Wearing Parts

1. Cylinder liner (service spare part of THOMAS air pump) 082-000205-00
2. Piston ring (service spare part of THOMAS air pump) 082-000206-00
3. Pincher 3100-20-41102
4. Filter core (service spare part of CHELIC filter) 082-000209-00
5. PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor IP55 940nm 15cm 011-000021-00

6. Filter. Inline Filter 65um 1/8" I.D.Tubing 082-000156-00
7. Probe wipe unit 801-3110-00093-00
8. Air drier (diaphragm type) IDG1-02 M6Q-070003---
9. Screen ground wire 3100-20-41305
10. Fuse - FUSE SLOW-BLOW 250V 2.5A M07-00067F---
11. Fuse - FUSE Time-lag 250V 5A M07-00104F---
12. Fuse - FUSE SLO-BL0 125V 5A 5TT5BEL M07-00069F---
13. Wipe block of open vial unit 3100-20-40864
14. Check valve AP19CV0012NN ARK-PLAS M6Y-020003---
15. Air filter GB8368-98 3001-10-07054
B-1
C Fluidic Diagram
C-2
Appendices
D Pump and Valve Function Table
D.1 Fluidic Valve Function Table

Description Function
SV1 Work with GV52, SV07 and SV08 to clean wBC sample preparing tubing
Work with SV06 to drive sample; work with SV07 and SV08 to clean sample
SV2
dispensing syringe tubing
Work with SV7 and SV8 to back flush sample probe; work with SV6 to form
SV3
sheath fluid path
SV4 Not available
Work with DP8 to dispense diluent and sample in SRV (altogether 2.6ml) to
SV5 RBC premix bath, or to dispense 2.6ml diluent and first dilution sample in SRV
to RBC bath
SV6 Flow cell waste outlet
SV7 Work with DP4 to send sample in WBC bath to sample preparing tubing
SV8 Waste outlet of sample preparing tubing
SV9 Control the fluid flow direction of whole blood aspirating syringe
Work with whole blood aspirating syringe SV09 to drive sample into SRV;
SV10
clean SRV and sample probe;
Work with M50 cleanser cistern and SV13 to dispense cleanser into
SV11
WBC-realted channels
SV12
HGB-realted channels
SV13 Control priming of M50 cleanser cistern to all channels
SV14
RBC-realted channels
Work with GV78 to prime reagent in M-50 cleanser container to M-50 cleanser
SV15
cistern under the effect of vacuum
Work with V13 and V10 to dispense cleanser into sampling channel; work with
SV16 DP4, SV7, GV52, SV11 and SV10 to aspirate probe cleanser outside the
analyzer
SV17 Work with DIL cistern, GV50 and GV51 to dispense diluent into WBC bath;
SV18 Wash SRV and DIFF blood-dispensing channel under CBC mode
SV19 Work with DP7 to dispense 2ml of diluent into HGB bath
SV20 Work with GV55 to wash the exterior wall of pierce probe
SV21 Work with GV56 to wash the exterior wall of open vial sample probe
SV22 Work with DP8 and SV5 to dispense 2.6ml of diluent into RBC bath or RBC
D-1
Appendices
premix bath
SV23 Work with DP6 to aspirate first dilution sample from RBC premix bath
SV24 Work with GV57 to clean SRV and its surrounded area
SV25 Work with DP1 to add 0.32ml of LEO II lyse into DIFF bath
SV26 Work with DP2 to add 0.52ml of LEO I lyse into DIFF bath
SV27 Work with DP3 to add 0.52ml of LBA lyse into BASO bath
SV28 Work with DP5 to add 1ml of LH lyse into HGB bath
SV29 Waste draining of RBC premix bath
SV30 Waste draining of BASO bath
SV31 Waste draining of DIFF bath
SV32 Water draining of pressure filter
SV33 Work with SV38 to dry RBC volumetric tube
SV34 Wash the back bath of RBC bath
SV35 Draining HGB bath
SV36 Draining RBC bath
Connected with RBC back bath and volumetric tube, aspirate fluid of RBC front
SV37
bath to back bath under the effect of WC3 vacuum
SV38 Work with SV33 to dry RBC volumetric tube
D.2 Air Valve Function Table

GV49 Control PV6, waste draining and vacuum formation of WC3

Control PV12, work with SV17 to prime diluent into BASO bath; work with
GV50 GV52, SV7 and DP4 to send sample in BASO bath to the tubing before sample
probe
Control PV11, work with SV17 to prime diluent into DIFF bath; work with GV52,
GV51
SV7 and DP4 to send sample in DIFF bath to the tubing before sample probe
Control PV10, work with DP4, SV7, GV50 (or GV51) to send sample in BASO
GV52
(or DIFF) bath into the tubing before sample probe to prepare for analysis
Control PV8, work with GV80 to prime diluent into FCM cistern under the effect
GV53
of vacuum
Control PV7, work with GV79 to prime diluent into DIL cistern under the effect
GV54
of vacuum
GV55 Control PV5, waste draining of pierce wipe block, dry the pierce probe
Control PV4, waste draining of open vial wipe block, dry the open vial sample
GV56
probe
D-2
Appendices
Control PV3, work with SV24 to drain the waste after cleaning the surrounded
GV57
area of SRV to WC1 under the effect of vacuum
Control PV2, work with GV77 to drain the waste in WC1 to outside waste
GV58
container under the effect of pressure
GV59 Control PV1, drain waste in WC2 to WC1 under the effect of vacuum
Control SRV moving cylinder, switch SRV to the blood dispensing status of
GV60
open vial mode
Control SRV moving cylinder, switch SRV to the sampling status of open vial
GV61
mode
GV65 Pump bubbles into HGB bath
GV66 Pump bubbles into RBC premix bath
GV67 Pump bubbles into RBC bath
Work with GV55 and waste pump to dry the air discharging channel of
GV68
autoloading sample probe under the effect of pressure
Control DP1, work with SV25 to dispense 0.32ml of LEO(II) reagent into DIFF
GV69
bath
GV70 Control DP5, work with SV28 to dispense 1ml of HGB lyse into HGB bath
Control DP2, work with SV26 to dispense LEO(I) reagent and sample in SRV
GV71
(altogether 0.52ml) into DIFF bath
Control DP3, work with SV27 to dispense LBA reagent and sample in SRV
GV72
(altogether 0.5ml) into BASO bath
Control DP7, work with SV19 to dispense diluent and sample in SRV
GV73
(altogether 2ml) into HGB bath
Control DP8, work with SV22 to dispense diluent and sample in SRV
GV74 (altogether 2.6ml) into RBC premix bath; work with SV22 and SV5 to dispense
diluent and first dilution sample in SRV (altogether 2.6ml) into RBC bath
Control DP4, work with SV7 and GV52, aspirate sample in DIFF/BASO bath to
GV75
sample preparing tubing under the effect of vacuum
Control DP6, work with SV23, aspirate first dilution sample in premix bath into
GV76
sample back-aspirating tubing
Work with GV58 to drain the waste in WC1 to outside waste container under
GV77
the effect of pressure
Work with SV15 to prime cleanser into cleanser cistern under the effect of
GV78
vacuum
GV79 Work with GV54 to prime diluent into DIL cistern under the effect of vacuum
GV80 Work with GV53 to prime diluent into FCM cistern under the effect of vacuum
Control the forward and backward moving cylinder of mixing unit; the
GV89
manipulator moves forward and backward
Control the up and down moving cylinder of mixing unit; when it is on, the
GV90
manipulator moves down
GV91 Control the up and down moving cylinder of mixing unit; when it is on, the
D-3
Appendices
manipulator moves up
GV92 Control the movement of pierce cylinder
D.3 Metering Pump Function Table

DP1 Controlled by GV69, work with SV25 to dispense 0.32ml of LEO(II) reagent
(0.32ml) into DIFF bath
DP2
(0.52ml of
transparent Controlled by GV71, work with SV26 to dispense LEO(I) reagent and sample in
diaphragm) SRV (altogether 0.52ml) into DIFF bath
DP3 Controlled by GV72, work with SV27 to dispense LBA reagent and sample in
(0.52ml) SRV (altogether 0.52ml) into BASO bath
DP4 Controlled by GV75, work with SV7 and GV52, aspirate sample in DIFF/BASO
(1.5ml) bath to sample preparing tubing under the effect of vacuum
DP5 Controlled by GV70, work with SV28 to dispense 1ml of HGB lyse into HGB
(1ml) bath
DP6 Controlled by GV76, aspirate the first dilution sample in RBC premix bath back
(1ml) to SRV under the effect of vacuum
DP7 Controlled by GV73, work with SV19 to dispense diluent and sample in SRV
(2ml) (altogether 2ml) into HGB bath
Controlled by GV74, work with SV22 to dispense diluent and sample in SRV
DP8
(altogether 2.6ml) into RBC premix bath; work with SV22 and SV5 to dispense
(2.6ml)
diluent and first dilution sample in SRV (altogether 2.6ml) into RBC bath
D.4 Pinch Valve Function Table

PV1 (8mm) Controlled by GV59, discharge waste in WC2 cistern into WC1 cistern
PV2(8mm) Controlled by GV58, discharge waste in WC1 cistern into waste container
Controlled by GV57, discharge the waste after cleaning the surrounded area of
PV3 (8mm)
SRV into WC1 cistern
Controlled by GV56, discharge the waste after cleaning open vial probe wipe
PV4 (8mm)
into waste pump
Controlled by GV55, discharge the waste after cleaning autoloading probe
PV5 (8mm)
wipe into waste pump
PV6(8mm) Controlled by GV49, discharge waste in WC3 cistern into WC1 cistern
PV10 (5mm) Controlled by GV52, clean and control the lower tubing of WBC unit
PV11 (5mm) Controlled by GV51, control the flow direction of fluid in DIFF bath
D-4
Appendices
PV12(5mm) Controlled by GV50, control the flow direction of fluid in BASO bath
D.5 Check Valve Function Table
CV3 The one-way flow of bubble-dispensing air in RBC bath

CV4 The one-way flow of air that cleans pierce probe wipe
CV5 The one-way flow of bubble-dispensing air in premix bath
CV6 The one-way flow of bubble-dispensing air in HGB bath
CV7 The one-way flow of 0.07M air
CV8 The one-way flow of -0.085M air
D-5
Appendices
E Tubing
Tube naming principle: connector No. - tube model - tube number - tube length - connector
No.
For example: 73-4-T167-205-J47, J73 and J74 are connector numbers, 4 is tube model,
T167 is the tube number in 3110, 205 stands for tube length (the unit is mm).
E.1 SRV Fluidics Connection
E-1
Appendices
E.2 Airway System Connection
E-2
Appendices
E.3 Valve and Pump Connection1
SV1 SV1 SV1 SV5 SV1 SV1 SV8
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV6 SV7 SV8

SV5 SV5
1 2 1 2 1 2
8-T46-20 8-T45-20 8-T44-50
C12 C5
8-T43-35
19-T143-60 C35 J73-4-T167-205-J74
19-T144-20
8-T141-100

SV9
19-T156-17 19-T158-17 19-T162-17 19-T166-30
J76-4-T145-220-J75 C15 19-T164-30
19-T154-47C1119-T155-34C13 19-T161-34 C16 1-T165-1000 C17
C66
C29 8-T131-25 C43 C52 C50 C49
8-T133-100 8-T121-35 8-T96-40 8-T81-15 8-T76-40 8-T71-100
C28 8-T132-15 C34
8-T82-15 8-T72-15
8-T149-90
8-T122-15 8-T97-15 8-T77-20

SV18 SV20 SV21 SV24
SV17 SV19 SV22 SV23
1 2
C9 8-T150-15
J25-18-T42-180-J26
19-T200-20
19-T199-20
SV29 SV30 SV31 SV32

SV25 SV26 SV27 SV28
19-T120-50
19-T203-35
C22 C23
DP7
DP8
DP1 DP2
DP3
DP5 DP6 DP4
E-3
Appendices
E.4 Valve and Pump Connection 2
SV1 SV2 SV3 SV6 SV7 SV8

SV5 SV5
1 2 1 2 1 2
19-T85-25 19-T184-30
19-T47-15
C10 J21-4-T153-65-J22 C41 19-T163-20 C2
19-T157-180 19-T182-60

C8 SV9
C19 19-T135-100
SV18 SV20 SV21 SV24

SV17 SV19 SV22 SV23
1 2
SV29 SV30 SV31 SV32

SV25 SV26 SV27 SV28
DP7
DP8
DP1 DP2
DP3
DP5 DP6 DP4
E-4
Appendices
E.5 Air Valve Unit Connection 1

C99 CV8 C100 C101
10-T305-25 15-T307-1800 15-T311-120
C131
10-T304-25 12-T306-60 C103
C87 15-T234-220 15-T235-15
C89
C88
15-T236-15
15-T233-20
GF1
15-T237-15
15-T303-120
15-T313-50
15-T343-35
C96
GV92
C86 15-T230-15
15-T344-20 C108 GV89
GV90
15-T345-30
GV68
GV80 GV74 C124 GV91
15-T349-35
15-T308-180
J101-21-T312-100-J102 GV60
15-T346-20 GV61
C109
GV73 C125
GV79 15-T314-15
15-T315-30
GV67
15-T347-60
GV49
GV78 GV72 C126
15-T316-15 GV50
15-T318-30
GV51
GV52
GV77 GV71 C127
15-T238-250
GV66 15-T317-15 15-T320-30
15-T309-20 C115 GV55

GV56
GV76 GV70 C128
15-T319-15 GV57
15-T322-30
GV58
15-T310-60
GV59
15-T260-15
15-T251-15
GV65 15-T321-15
GV75
GV69
C129
15-T239-15
GF2
C90 C91
E-5
Appendices
E.6 Air Valve Unit Connection 2
15-T271-1800
10-T269-25 10-T270-25
C98 CV7 C102
15-T289-30 15-T287-30 15-T285-25

15-T268-110 C110 C118 GF1
15-T272-35
C97 15-T284-120
GV92 15-T261-50
C119
C111 15-T286-20 GV89
12-T257-200 C104 15-T273-20
GV68 GV90
12-T262-40
GV80
15-T274-40
GV74 GV91
C120
GV60
15-T288-20
GV61
C114
15-T265-20 J99-21-T279-600-J100
C112 GV73
GV79 C105 C121
15-T263-30
15-T275-20
15-T291-30
GV67 15-T290-20
15-T266-20
15-T276-50
GV49
GV78 C106 GV72
C122 GV50
15-T280-125
15-T293-30
GV51
15-T292-20
C113 GV52
15-T264-40
GV77 15-T277-20 GV71
GV66
C123
15-T294-20 GV55
15-T278-80
C116 GV56
GV76 15-T281-20 GV70
GV57
15-T282-30
GV58
15-T295-60
GV59
15-T283-20 GV65
GV75
GV69
C117
GF2
E-6
Appendices
E.7 Pinch Valve Connection
DIL
FCM
Large cable
clip 6-T23-790
6-T22-880
OUT OUT
SV53 SV54
NC NC
6-T20-50
6-T19-50 6-T18-190 M-58D
PV6 C45
WC3 5-T70-300 5-T187-50
bottom
5-T218- PV5 C62 5-T189- WC
Closed tube 340 1
probe wipe 1100 C64
Open vial 5-T100- PV4
probe wipe 1290 5-T188-50
15-T348-
PV3 C63 5-T193-
260
SRV sampling 4-T74-150- 100
5-T75-530 WC1
valve M J58
C51 PV2 bottom
5-T192-420
E-7
Appendices
E.8 Cistern Connection
E-8
Appendices
E.9 WBC Assembly of the Front Board
E-9
Appendices
E.10 RBC Bath Assembly
E-10
Appendices
E.11 Tubing Models
No. Part No. Description Characteristics
1 M90-100071--- TYGON tube S-50-HL ID3/32' 50 thick tube

TEFLON TUBING ID1.5mm OD2.5mm
4 M90-100031--- 9023-14 1.5 TEFLON tube
Tubing.
5 A21-000002--- Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100 White, thick silica gel tube
TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4
6 M90-000025--- ' WALL1/16' 3603 thick soft tube
8 082-000108-00 Tubing.M-87-D3,2mmX3.5mm,AV31X2103 TPU tube

Mid-sized silica gel tube,
10 M6G-020006--- Tubing. Silicone, 1/16"X3/16", TYGON 3350 thick transferring tube
11 0040-10-32301 TEFLON TUBING ID 0.04' OD 1/16' 1.0 TEFLON tube

Micro silica gel tube, thin
12 M6G-020009--- Tubing. Silica gel 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/ coil transferring tube
0.78 transparent TEFLON
13 M6G-020008--- FEP TEFLON .TUBING ID=0.031'OD 0.062' tube
14 M6G-020011--- Tubing. PharMed,1/16"ODX1/8"ID Yellow pinch valve

PU air tube (outer diameter
15 M6G-020002--- PU0425(transparent) 4, inner diameter 2.5)
PU air tube (outer diameter
17 M6G-020003--- PU0640(transparent) 6, inner diameter 4)
TEFLON .031ID X .062OD
18 M90-000026--- P/N,3000074-100 0.78 TEFLON tube
Tubing.
19 3001-10-07069 1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 50 thin tube
Tubing.
21 082-000109-00 0.5mmX1.5mm,PSPTFE-0059-020-492 Thin TEFLON tube
24 M6G-020054--- Tubing. PU,ID: 1/8", OD1/4", clear TPU tube
E-11
Appendices
E.12 Connector
Name Part No. Description Quantity
C14, C16, C17, C20, C21, C25, C26,
C27, C30, C31, C36, C37, C38, C42,
C44, C46, C47, C51, C53, C54, C55, I connector -
C61, C98, C99, C100, C102, C132 M90-100027--- large - medium 27
I connector -
C4, C18, C83, C101, C104, C130 M90-100028-01 medium 6
L connector -
thread - quick
C67, C68, C72, C73, C74, C75, C93 M6Q-030006--- plug 9
C1, C56, C58, C87, C89, C90, C91, L connector -
C117, C118, C129, C131 M90-100100--- medium 11
C24, C60, C65 M90-100065--- T connector 3
C2, C3, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10, C11,
C12, C13, C15, C19, C22, C23, C28,
C29, C33, C34, C35, C43, C49, C50,
C52, C67, C86, C88, C96, C97, C103,
C105, C106, C110, C116, C124, C125, T connector -
C126, C127, C128 M90-100028--- medium 39
Y connector -
C45, C62, C63, C64 M90-100030--- large 4
C32, C39, C40, C41, C48, C66, C108,
C109, C111, C112, C113, C114, C115, Y connector -
C119, C120, C121, C122, C123 M90-100028-03 medium 18
Y three-way
C76, C78, C92 M6Q-030003--- connector - large 3
Y three-way
connector - large
C77, C94, C133, C134 M6Q-030002--- - medium 4
Y three-way
connector -
thread - quick
C95 M6Q-030004--- plug 1
L connector -
thread - quick
C79, C80, C81, C82 M6Q-030005--- plug(R1/4) 4
Volumetric tube
C59 3001-10-07066 connector 1
E-12
Appendices
Threading
chaser tube -
thread - quick
C84, C85 M6Q-030001--- plug 2
E.13 Transferring Tube

Name Part No. Description Unit
J23, J24, J25, J26, J30, J34,
J64, J65, J66, J69, J70, J77,
J78, J79, J84, J85, J89, J90,
J93, J94, J96, J99, J100, Thick and thin
J101, J102, J103 0030-20-13339 transferring tube EA
J45, J46, J47, J48, J49, J50,
J81, J86, J97, J98, J104, Thick transferring
J105 M6G-020006--- tube mm
J3,J4, J17, J18, J21, J22,
J27, J28, J29, J31, J32, J33,
J35, J36, J37, J38, J39, J40,
J41, J42, J43, J44, J51, J52,
J53, J54, J55, J56, J57, J58,
J59, J60, J73, J74, J75, J76, Black transferring
J80, J91, J92 082-000055-00 tube mm
J67, J68, J82, J83, J87, J88 2000-20-03314 Step transferring tube EA
J15, J16 M6G-020009--- Thin transferring tube mm
J1, J2, J5, J6, J7, J8, J9,
J10, J11, J12, J13, J14, J19,
J20, J71, J72, J95 M6G-020009--- Thin transferring tube mm
E.14 Other Materials

Name Part No. Description Quantity Name
GF1, GF2 3001-10-07054 Air filter 2 GF1, GF2
Air filter
Rc1/8"AF150-00
GF3 082-000135-00 customized 1 GF3
Drier M6Q-070003--- Drier 1 Drier
SF1 082-000156-00 Small fluid filter 1 SF1
Lifting restrictor Lifting restrictor
tube 3100-20-41116 Lifting restrictor tube 2 tube
Flexible Flexible restrictor Flexible
restrictor tube 3100-20-41117 tube 1 restrictor tube
E-13
Appendices
E.15 Tubing Connection

Tube naming principle: connector No. - tube model - tube number - tube length - connector
No.
For example: 73-4-T167-205-J47, J73 and J74 are connector numbers, 4 is tube model,
T167 is the tube number in 3110, 205 stands for tube length (the unit is mm)
Name Model-length Unit Description Length(mm)
T1 19-850 The analyzer 50 thin tube 850
Thick transparent soft

T2 6-1800 The analyzer tube 1800
Double layer tube, inner

T3 20-850 The analyzer diameter 1.5875 850





T9 4-140 The analyzer Thick TELFON tube 140
E-14
Appendices


T16 1-20 The analyzer Thick soft tube 20







E-15
Appendices
Valves and
T30 4-45 pumps Thick TELFON tube 45
TEFLON tube, inner

Valves and
Valves and
White, thick silica gel

TEFLON tube, inner

T39 11-230 SRV diameter 1.016 230
TEFLON tube, inner

T40 11-260 SRV diameter 1.016 260
E-16
Appendices
Valves and TEFLON tube, inner

T42 18-180 pumps diameter 0.7874 180
T43 8-35 The analyzer TPU tube 35
Valves and
T44 8-50 pumps TPU tube 50
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
T47 19-15 pumps 50 thin tube 15
TEFLON tube, inner

TEFLON tube, inner


E-17
Appendices




Valves and
E-18
Appendices
Valves and
T73 4-620 SRV Thick TELFON tube 620

Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
TEFLON tube, inner

T80 11-200 SRV diameter 1.016 200
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
T86 19-460 SRV 50 thin tube 460
E-19
Appendices
TEFLON tube, inner

T89 11-800 SRV diameter 1.016 800
TEFLON tube, inner

T90 11-800 SRV diameter 1.016 800
TEFLON tube, inner

TEFLON tube, inner

T93 19-460 SRV 50 thin tube 460
TEFLON tube, inner

T94 11-150 SRV diameter 1.016 150
TEFLON tube, inner

T95 11-350 SRV diameter 1.016 350
Valves and
Valves and
TEFLON tube, inner


E-20
Appendices
T104 23-1000 The analyzer Thin TEFLON tube 1000
T105 10-25 The analyzer Thick transferring tube 25

PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
T106 15-300 The analyzer diameter 2.5) 300
E-21
Appendices
PU air tube (outer

diameter 4, inner
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
T124 12-20 The analyzer Thin transferring tube 20
TEFLON tube, inner

TEFLON tube, inner


PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
Valves and
E-22
Appendices
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
T136 19-260 SRV 50 thin tube 260
TEFLON tube, inner

T137 11-150 SRV diameter 1.016 150
TEFLON tube, inner

T138 11-760 SRV diameter 1.016 760
TEFLON tube, inner

Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
TEFLON tube, inner

T146 11-280 SRV diameter 1.016 280
E-23
Appendices
TEFLON tube, inner

T147 11-200 SRV diameter 1.016 200
Transparent TEFLON
tube, inner diameter
T148 13-365 SRV 0.7874 365
T148 (open vial TEFLON tube, inner

model) 11-690 SRV diameter 1.016 690
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and TEFLON tube, inner

T151 18-500 pumps diameter 0.7874 500
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
TEFLON tube, inner


E-24
Appendices
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
Valves and
T165 1-1000 pumps Thick soft tube 1000
Valves and
Valves and
T169 14-60 The analyzer Thin pinch tube, yellow 60
TEFLON tube, inner

TEFLON tube, inner

TEFLON tube, inner

TEFLON tube, inner

E-25
Appendices
TEFLON tube, inner

TEFLON tube, inner

TEFLON tube, inner

Valves and
Valves and
Valves and



E-26
Appendices



T194 5-1800 The analyzer Waste tube 1800

PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
Valves and
Valves and


Valves and
Valves and
E-27
Appendices

PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner

Transparent TEFLON
T215 13-260 SRV 0.7874 260
Transparent TEFLON
T216 13-230 SRV 0.7874 230


T219 16-50 The analyzer Nylon tube 50

PU soft tube (outer
diameter 6, inner
T221 17-2000 The analyzer diameter 4) 2000
E-28
Appendices
PU soft tube (outer

diameter 6, inner
PU soft tube (outer
diameter 6, inner
Thick TPU tube

T224 24-400 The analyzer 400
PU soft tube (outer
diameter 6, inner
PU soft tube (outer
diameter 6, inner
PU soft tube (outer
diameter 6, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
T230 15-15 Air valve diameter 2.5) 15
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
E-29
Appendices
PU air tube (outer

diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
T245 15-380 The analyzer PU air tube (outer 380
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
T251 15-15 Air valve PU air tube (outer 15
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
E-30
Appendices
T252 17-170 The analyzer PU soft tube (outer 170

diameter 6, inner
diameter 4)
diameter 6, inner
diameter 4)
diameter 6, inner
diameter 4)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
T257 12-200 Air valve Thin transferring tube 200

diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)

diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
E-31
Appendices

diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
T269 10-25 Air valve Thick transferring tube 25

diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
T279 21-600 Air valve Thin TEFLON tube 600

diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
E-32
Appendices

diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
diameter 4, inner
diameter 2.5)
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU soft tube (outer
diameter 6, inner
PU soft tube (outer
diameter 6, inner
E-33
Appendices
PU air tube (outer

diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU soft tube (outer
diameter 6, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner

PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
T312 21-100 Air valve Thin TEFLON tube 100
E-34
Appendices
PU air tube (outer

diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
E-35
Appendices
PU air tube (outer

diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner

PU soft tube (outer
diameter 6, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
E-36
Appendices
PU air tube (outer

diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
PU air tube (outer
T348 diameter 4, inner
15-260 The analyzer diameter 2.5) 260
PU air tube (outer
T349 diameter 4, inner
15-35 Air valve diameter 2.5) 35

T350 6-50 50
tube
The analyzer
T351 4-250 Thick TELFON tube 250

The analyzer
PU air tube (outer
T352 17-60 diameter 6, inner 60
The analyzer diameter 4)
PU air tube (outer
T353 17-60 diameter 6, inner 60
The analyzer diameter 4)
Thick soft tube

P1 1-210 SRV 210
Thick soft tube

P2 1-180 SRV 180
PU air tube (outer
diameter 4, inner
P3 15-86 SRV diameter 2.5) 86
Thick soft tube

P4 1-240 SRV 240
E-37
Appendices
Thick soft tube

P5 1-660 The analyzer 660
Thick soft tube

P6 1-720 SRV 720
Thick soft tube

P7 1-780 SRV 780
Thick soft tube

P8 1-780 SRV 780
Thick soft tube

P9 1-85 The analyzer 85
E-38

BC 5800

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BC 5800

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BC-5800

Auto Hematology Analyzer

Intellectual Property Statement

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.

, are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

z It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

This warranty shall not extend to:

any product of any other manufacturer.

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500

1 Using This Manual 1-1

2 System Structure 2-1

3 Fluidic System 3-1

4 Hardware System 4-1

4.13 SATA and IDE Signal Conversion Board ......................................................... 4-154

6 Optical System 6-1

8 Maintaining Your Analyzer 8-1

z Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

1.2 Who Should Read This Manual

Comprehensive knowledge of electric circuit and fluidic system;

Comprehensive knowledge of reagents;

Comprehensive knowledge of quality control;

Thorough understanding of troubleshooting;

The ability to operate the analyzer skillfully;

The ability to use a digital voltmeter and an oscilloscope masterly;

And the ability to read pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related

1.3 How to Find Information

If you want to See

1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual

1.5 Special Terms Used in This Manual

When you read It means

You will find the following symbols in this manual.

When you see Then

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

read the statement below the symbol. The statement is

When you see It means

CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING

WARNING, LASER BEAM

WARNING, HOT SURFACE

PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)

FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE

CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

z It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

z Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.

z Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

z Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc.

z Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer

z For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray

z To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove

z Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a

z This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

z Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

2.1 System Overview

Software running environment

2.2 Fluidic System

Please refer to Chapter 3 Fluidic System of this manual.

2.3 Hardware System

Please refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System of this manual.

2.4 Main Structure